2022 Cadillac CT5 Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

CT5

2022

2022 C

T5

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o�-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

84728180 A

• Owner and Warranty Manuals • Connected Services • myCadillac Mobile App • How To Videos• Vehicle Diagnostics • Schedule Maintenance • Vehicle Features• Many Additional Resources

Scan to Access

United States Canada

Customer Assistance 1-800-458-8006

Roadside Assistance1-800-224-1400


Customer Assistance1-888-446-2000

United States and Canada

Connected Services1-888-4-ONSTAR

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

ai161972528869_22_CAD_CT5_COV_en_US_84728180A_2021MAY18.pdf 1 4/29/2021 3:41:28 PM

Cadillac CT5 Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-15268585) -2022 - CRC - 5/12/21

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . . 6

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . . . 88

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 409

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . 440

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems, slogans,vehicle model names, and vehiclebody designs appearing in this manualincluding, but not limited to, GM, theGM logo, CADILLAC, the CADILLACEmblem, and CT5, are trademarksand/or service marks of GeneralMotors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Company” for CadillacMotor Car Division wherever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,

model variants, country specifications,features/applications that may not beavailable in your region, or changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner’s manual, including changes tostandard or optional content.

Refer to the purchase documentationrelating to your specific vehicle toconfirm the features.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ceguide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84728180 A First Printing ©2021 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


2 INTRODUCTION

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ DangerDanger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ WarningWarning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

CautionCaution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do not,”“Do not do this,” or “Do not let thishappen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation or

information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gauge,or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’s manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

* : Shown when the service manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbols thatmay be found on the vehicle and whatthey mean. See the features in thismanual for information.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly


INTRODUCTION 3

P : Do Not Apply High PressureWater

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

R : Fuse Block Cover Lock Location

+ : Fuses

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints

Q : Keep Fuse Block Covers ProperlyInstalled

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

h : Risk of Electrical Fire

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Stop/Start

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

k : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


4 INTRODUCTION

Instrument Panel Overview


INTRODUCTION 5

1. Air Vents 0 213.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals 0 138.

Exterior Lamp Controls 0 135.

IntelliBeam System Button (IfEquipped). See Exterior LampControls 0 135.

3. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped).See Manual Mode 0 250.

4. Instrument Cluster (Base Level) 0 96orInstrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 98.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 90.

6. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 137.

7. Home Button and InfotainmentControls. See Overview 0 144.

8. Infotainment. See Introduction0 143.

9. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 209.

10. Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 43 (If Equipped).

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 312 (IfEquipped).

Automatic Park Assist Button (IfEquipped). See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing 0 296.

Park Assist Button. See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 296.

11. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 138.

12. Infotainment Controls. SeeOverview 0 144 (If Equipped).

13. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 246.

See Manual Transmission 0 251.

14. Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 257.

Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) 0 257.

Auto Engine Stop/Start Switch. SeeStarting the Engine 0 239.

MODE Switch. See Driver ModeControl 0 259.

15. Steering Wheel Controls 0 89.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

16. Horn 0 90.

17. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 89.

18. Cruise Control 0 267 (If Equipped).

Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced)0 270 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System0 304 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 89 (IfEquipped).

19. Hood Release. See Hood 0 329.

20. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out ofView). See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 106.

21. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 139.

22. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 122 (IfEquipped).

23. Electric Parking Brake (EPB)Switch. See Electric Parking Brake0 255.


6 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Keys, Doors, andWindowsKeys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . 28Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 28Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . 28Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WarningLeaving children in a vehicle with aremote key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the remote key in thevehicle, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with aremote key.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 7

The key inside the remote key is usedfor the driver door and glove box.

To remove the mechanical key, pressthe button on the side of the remotekey near the bottom, and pull themechanical key out. Never pull themechanical key out without pressingthe button.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

See your dealer if a new mechanicalkey is needed.

Contact Roadside Service if locked outof the vehicle. See Roadside Service0 434.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisor mayremotely unlock the vehicle. SeeOnStar Overview 0 443.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 439.

If there is a decrease in the remotekey operating range:. Check the distance. The remote keymay be too far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal.

. Check the remote key battery. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection.

. If the remote key is still not workingcorrectly, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allows forvehicle entry when the remote key iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “Keyless AccessOperation” later in this section.

The remote key functions for Lock,Unlock, Remote Start and Panic maywork up to 60 m (197 ft). The remotekey functions for trunk may work upto 30 m (98 ft).

Other conditions can impact theperformance of the remote key. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 7.



Q : Press to lock all doors and the fueldoor, if equipped. The turn signalindicators may flash and/or the hornmay sound on the second press toindicate locking. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Pressing Q may also arm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 22.

If equipped with remote foldingmirror, pressing Q on the remote keymay fold the mirrors. See FoldingMirrors 0 26.

K : Press to unlock the driver doorand the fuel door, if equipped. Pressagain within five seconds to unlock alldoors. The remote key can be

programmed to unlock all doors onthe first button press. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126. When remotelyunlocking the vehicle at night, theheadlamps and back-up lamps maycome on for about 30 seconds to lightyour approach to the vehicle. The turnsignal indicators may flash to indicateunlocking.

If equipped with remote windowoperation, press and hold K on theremote key for about three seconds toopen all windows. The vehicle must beoff and the remote window operationmust be enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Pressing K will disarm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 22.

If equipped with remote foldingmirror, pressing K on the remote keymay unfold the mirrors. See FoldingMirrors 0 26.

S : PressS twice to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle using theremote key. See Remote Vehicle Start0 13.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirps threetimes. Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the turnsignal lamps flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thevehicle is started.

X : Press twice to release the trunk.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system lets youlock and unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing theremote key from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The remote key must bewithin 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk or doorbeing opened. If equipped, there willbe a sensor on the outside doorhandles.

The Keyless Access system can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first door handle press from thedriver door button. Keyless unlockingcan also be turned off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.



If equipped with memory seats,remote keys 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 40.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from theDriver Door

Driver Door Lock Button Shown,Passenger Similar

When the doors are locked and theremote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor handle, touching the driver doorhandle inside sensor will unlock thedriver door. Touching the driver dooroutside handle sensor will lock thedoors.

Driver Door Lock Sensor Shown,Passenger Similar

If equipped with remote foldingmirror, touching the driver doorhandle sensor may fold and unfold themirrors. See Folding Mirrors 0 26.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from thePassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theremote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor handle, touching the inside doorhandle sensor of the passenger doorwill unlock all doors. Touching thesensor on the outside of the doorhandle will lock the doors.

Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking ofExterior Door Handles and Trunk

If equipped, keyless unlocking of theexterior door handles and trunk canbe disabled and enabled.

Disabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Qand K on the remote key at the sametime for approximately four seconds.The turn signal lamps will flash fourtimes quickly to indicate access isdisabled. Using any exterior handle tounlock the doors or open the trunkwill cause the turn signal lamps toflash four times quickly, indicatingaccess is disabled. If disabled, disarmthe alarm system before starting thevehicle.

Disabling Keyless Unlocking may alsobe configured under VehiclePersonalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.



Enabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Qand K on the remote key at the sametime for approximately four seconds.The turn signal lamps will flash twicequickly to indicate access is enabled.

Enabling Keyless Unlocking may alsobe configured under VehiclePersonalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Passive (Walkaway) Locking

The Keyless Access system will lockthe vehicle several seconds after alldoors are closed if the vehicle is offand at least one remote key has beenremoved or none remain in thevehicle.

If equipped, the fuel door willalso lock.

If other electronic devices interferewith the remote key signal, the vehiclemay not detect the remote key insidethe vehicle. If passive (walkaway)locking is enabled, the doors may lockwith the remote key inside the vehicle.Do not leave the remote key in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see Vehicle Personalization0 126.

If equipped with remote foldingmirror, passive (walkaway) lockingmay fold and unfold the mirrors. SeeFolding Mirrors 0 26.

Temporary Disable of Passive(Walkaway) Locking

Temporarily disable passive locking bypressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or until threechimes are heard. Passive (walkaway)locking will then remain disabled untilQ on the interior door is pressed,or until the vehicle is turned on.

Remote Key Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off and aremote key is left in the vehicle, thehorn will chirp three times after alldoors are closed. To turn on or off seeVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Remote Key No Longer In VehicleAlert

If the vehicle is on, with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for a remote keyinside. If a remote key is not detected,the Driver Information Center (DIC)will display NO KEY FOUND and thehorn will chirp three times.

This occurs only once each time thevehicle is driven. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Press the touch pad on the rear of thetrunk above the license plate if theremote key is within 1 m (3 ft).

Mechanical Key Access

To access a vehicle with a weakremote key battery, see Door Locks0 14.

Programming Remote Keys tothe Vehicle

Only remote keys programmed to thevehicle will work. If a remote key islost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed through



your dealer. The vehicle can bereprogrammed so that lost or stolenremote keys no longer work. Eachvehicle can have up to eight remotekeys matched to it.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowRemote Key Battery

For improved vehicle security, theremote key is equipped with a motionsensor. When starting the vehicle,if the remote key has been idle for awhile, the DIC may display KEY INSLEEP MODE, MOVE KEY, THENSTART. Move the remote key slightlyand try starting the vehicle. Whenstarting the vehicle, if the remote keybattery is depleted or there is signalinterference, the DIC may display NOKEY FOUND, REPLACE BATTERY INKEY or NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY IN KEYPOCKET THEN START YOURVEHICLE, follow the steps shownbelow:

1. Place the remote key into the rearcupholder.

2. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brake pedaland ENGINE START/STOP.

Replace the remote key battery assoon as possible.

Battery Replacement

{ WarningNever allow children to play withthe remote key. The remote keycontains a small battery, which canbe a choking hazard. If swallowed,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

internal burns can occur, resultingin severe injury or death. Seekmedical attention immediately if abattery is swallowed.

{ WarningTo avoid personal injury, do nottouch metal surfaces on the remotekey when it has been exposed toextreme heat. These surfaces can behot to the touch at temperaturesabove 59 °C (138 °F).

CautionWhen replacing the battery, do nottouch any of the circuitry on theremote key. Static from your bodycould damage the remote key.



CautionAlways replace the battery with thecorrect type. Replacing the batterywith an incorrect type couldpotentially create a risk of batteryexplosion. Dispose of used batteriesaccording to instructions and locallaws. Do not attempt to burn,crush, or cut the used battery, andavoid exposing the battery toenvironments with extremely lowair pressures or high temperatures.

Replace the battery if the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY IN KEY.

1. Press the button on the side of theremote key near the bottom andpull the mechanical key out. Neverpull the mechanical key outwithout pressing the button.

2. Use the mechanical key blade inthe slot to remove the batterycover by hand.

3. Turn the remote key over.

4. Remove the battery cover.

5. Remove the seal by pulling on thetab to access the battery.



6. Remove the old battery. Do not usea metal object.

7. Insert the new battery, negativeside facing down. Replace with aCR2450 or equivalent battery.

8. Replace the seal, pushing it intothe groove around the batterycompartment.

9. Replace the battery cover bysnapping it back into theremote key.

10. Reinsert the mechanical key.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows the engine to bestarted from outside the vehicle. It isnot available on vehicles with amanual transmission.

S : This button on the remote key isfor remote start.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during a remotestart. The rear window defogger maycome on during remote start based oncold ambient conditions. The reardefog indicator light does not come onduring remote start.

If equipped, the heated and ventilatedfront seats may also come on whenthe vehicle personalization setting isenabled. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats 0 43.

If equipped with a remote start heatedsteering wheel, it may come on duringa remote start. See Heated SteeringWheel 0 89.

Laws in some local communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters. Forexample, some laws may require aperson using remote start to have thevehicle in view. Check localregulations for any requirements.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do notuse the remote start feature. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote key range may be shorterwhile the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the remote key. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 7.

You are allowed multiple startstotaling 30 minutes of engine runtime. The maximum run time of asingle start is 15 minutes, and it will

shut off automatically. You could dothree 10 minute starts, if youmanually shut off after 10 minutes.The last 10 minute start would shutoff automatically as your total30 minutes will have been used.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. PressS twice on the remote key.The turn signal lamps will flash.The lamps flash to confirm therequest to remote start the vehiclehas been received. During theremote start, the parking lampswill remain on as long as theengine is running.

2. The engine will shut off after15 minutes or after the remainderof the 30 minute total runningtime is used, unless you stop theremote start before engine runninghas completed or the vehicle isturned on.

3. Press the brake pedal and turn theignition on to drive the vehicle.

Additional Engine Run Time

Remote start can be used for up to30 minutes of total engine run time.



After two remote starts of 15 minutes,or multiple shorter time startstotaling 30 minutes have been used,the vehicle must be started and thenturned off before the remote start canbe used again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. PressS once. The parking lampswill turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and thenback off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate ifany of the following occur:. The ignition is in any mode otherthan off.

. A remote key is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashers are on.

. There is an emission control systemmalfunction.

. The engine coolant temperature istoo high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. The 30 minutes of engine run timehave been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WarningUnlocked doors can be dangerous.

. Passengers, especially children,can easily open the doors andfall out of a moving vehicle. Thedoors can be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if the doors arenot locked. So, all passengersshould wear seat belts properlyand the doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle is driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may be unableto get out. A child can beovercome by extreme heat andcan suffer permanent injuries or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

even death from heat stroke.Always lock the vehicle wheneverleaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked door whenyou slow down or stop thevehicle. Locking the doors canhelp prevent this fromhappening.

Always take your remote key with youwhen exiting the vehicle to preventbeing locked out. To lock or unlockthe doors from outside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the remote key.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 7.

. Use the mechanical key in thedriver door. The key lock cylinder iscovered with a cap.

See “Driver Door Key Lock CylinderAccess (In Case of Dead Battery)”later in this section.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:



. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

. Pull the front door handle once toopen the door. Pull the rear doorhandle once to unlock and oncemore to open the door.

Keyless Access

The remote key must be within 1 m(3 ft) of the trunk or door beingopened or locked. To unlock andunlatch any door, press the releasebutton on the inside grip area of theoutside door handle. Touch the sensoron the front outside door handle to

lock. See “Keyless Access Operation” inRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7.

Driver Door Key Lock CylinderAccess (In Case of Dead Battery)

To access the driver door key lockcylinder and unlatch the door:

1. Insert the mechanical key into theslot at the bottom of the handleand push upward all the way untilthe cover frees. Do not pry or pullon the key.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert the mechanical key in thecylinder.



4. Turn the mechanical key clockwiseuntil it stops.

5. Slowly turn the mechanical keycounterclockwise while pulling thehandle to unlatch the door.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 if the doordoes not fully open.

To replace the cap:

1. Align the top edge of the cover tothe handle.

2. Turn downward to snap cover intoposition.

3. Check to ensure cap is fully seated.

Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong mechanical keyis used, or the correct mechanical keyis not fully inserted. The free-turningdoor lock feature prevents the lockfrom being forced open. To reset thelock, turn it to the vertical positionwith the correct mechanical key fullyinserted. Remove the mechanical keyand insert it again. If this does notreset the lock, turn the mechanicalkey halfway around in the cylinderand repeat the reset procedure.

Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors. Theindicator light in the switch willilluminate when locked.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

If equipped, the fuel door is alsolocked or unlocked using thesefeatures.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the actual lockingof the doors until five seconds after alldoors are closed.

When Q is pressed on the power doorlock switch with the door open, achime will sound three timesindicating that delayed locking isactive.

The doors will then lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors are closed.If a door is reopened beforefive seconds have elapsed, thefive-second timer will reset once allthe doors are closed again.

Press Q on the door lock switch again,or press Q on the key, to override thisfeature and lock the doorsimmediately.



Delayed locking can be programmed.See Vehicle Personalization 0 126.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, the ignitionis on, and the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

If a vehicle door is unlocked, and thenopened and closed, the doors will lockeither when your foot is removed fromthe brake or the vehicle speedbecomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY and the power door lockswitch is pressed with the driver dooropen, all the doors will lock and onlythe driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open, whenall doors are closed the vehicle willcheck for keys inside. If any remotekey programmed to the vehicle isdetected and the number of keysinside has not reduced, the driver doorwill unlock and the horn will chirpthree times.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Safety Locks

Manual Safety Locks

The safety lock is on the inside edgeof the rear doors. To use thesafety lock:

1. Move the lever forward to the lockposition.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat for the other rear door.

To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by activating theinside handle, by pressing thepower door lock switch, or by usingthe remote key.

2. Open the door from the outside.

When the safety lock is enabled,adults and older children will not beable to open the rear door from theinside. Cancel the safety locks toenable the doors to open from theinside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open it fromthe outside.

2. Move the lever rearward to unlock.Repeat for the other door.



Doors

Trunk

{ WarningExhaust gases can enter the vehicleif it is driven with the liftgate ortrunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting that brings inonly outside air and set the fanspeed to the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” in theIndex.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). If the vehicle is equipped with apower liftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust 0 245.

Manual Trunk

To release the trunk, the vehicle mustbe off or in P (Park).

. Press| on the driver door.

. PressX twice quickly on theremote key.

. Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk above the license platewhen all doors are unlocked.

The trunk can be opened while thevehicle is locked by pressing the touchpad above the license plate while theremote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of therear of the vehicle. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 7.



Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle. Do not use the handle as atie-down. Do not press the touch padwhile closing the trunk; this will causethe trunk lid to be unlatched.

The trunk has an electric latch. If thevehicle has lost power or the batteryis disconnected, the trunk will notopen. If this happens, enter the rearcompartment by folding the rear seatsdown, and pull the emergency releasehandle to open the trunk.

Hands-Free Trunk

If equipped, the trunk may be openedwith a kicking motion under the rearbumper at the location of theprojected logo. The remote key mustbe within 1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature can becustomized. See Vehicle Personalization0 126. Choose from the following:

On-Open Only : The kicking motion isactivated to open the trunk.

Off : The feature is disabled.

To operate, kick your foot straight upin one swift motion under the centerof the rear bumper at the location ofthe projected logo, then pull it back.. Do not sweep your foot side to side.. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; it will not activate.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If it does not respond to the kick,open the trunk by another methodor start the vehicle and the featurewill be re-enabled.

Projected Logo

If equipped with this feature, a vehiclelogo will be projected for one minuteonto the ground near the rear bumperwhen a remote key is detected withinapproximately 2 m (6 ft). Theprojected logo may not be visibleunder brighter daytime conditions.



1. 1 m (3 ft) Hands-Free OperationDetection Zone

2. 2 m (6 ft) Projected LogoDetection Zone

The projected logo shows where thekicking motion is to take place.

The projected logo will only beavailable for this remote key after ithas been out of range for at least20 seconds.

If a remote key is again detectedwithin approximately 2 m (6 ft) of thetrunk, or another hands-free operationhas been detected, the one-minutetimer will be reset.

The projected logo will not workunder these conditions:. The vehicle battery is low.. The transmission is not in P (Park).. Hands Free Trunk Control is set toOff in vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 126.

. The vehicle remains parked for10 days or more, with no remotekey use or Keyless Access operation.To re-enable, press any button onthe remote key or open and close avehicle door.

The projected logo will not work for asingle remote key when a remote key:. Has been left within approximately2 m (6 ft) of the trunk for severalminutes.

. Has been left inside the vehicle andall vehicle doors are closed.

. Has approached the area outside ofthe trunk five times within severalminutes.

Lens Cleaning

Clean the recessed lens with acotton swab.



Hands-Free Trunk and Projected Logo Availability

Action Hands-Free Trunk Projected Logo

Remote key entering projected logodetection zone

Operative On for one minute

Remote key left inside projected logodetection zone for minimum of5 minutes

Operative Off until remote key button press or adoor is opened and closed

Remote key brought in and out ofprojected logo detection zone five timesor more within 5 minutes

Operative Off for one hour or until remote keybutton press or a door is opened andclosed

Vehicle remains parked for 10 daysor more

Operative Off until remote key button press or adoor is opened and closed

Vehicle battery is low Non-operative Off

Transmission is not in P (Park) Non-operative Off

Hands-free trunk is disabled in vehiclepersonalization

Non-operative Off



Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

CautionDo not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damage thehandle.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergencytrunk release handle on the trunk lid.This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull the releasehandle to open the trunk from theinside.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on the instrumentpanel near the windshield, indicatesthe status of the system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is secured duringthe delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunk is open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.

Arming the Alarm System1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:. Use the remote key.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 23. Use the Keyless Access system.

. With a door open, press Q onthe interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarm systemwill arm, and the indicator lightwill begin to slowly flash indicatingthe alarm system is operating.Pressing Q on the remote key asecond time will bypass the30-second delay and immediatelyarm the alarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will not armif the doors are locked with themechanical key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the remote key,the horn will chirp and the lights willflash to indicate pre-alarm. If thevehicle is not started, or the door isnot unlocked by pressing K on theremote key during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will be activated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the trunk, or the hoodis opened without first disarming thesystem. When the alarm is activated,the turn signals flash and the horn

sounds for about 30 seconds. Thealarm system will then re-arm tomonitor the next unauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the remote key.

. Unlock the vehicle using the KeylessAccess system.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle after all occupantshave left the vehicle and all doorsare closed.

. Always unlock a door with theremote key or use the KeylessAccess system.

Unlatching the driver door with themechanical key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the remote key andthe horn chirps and the lights flashthree times, a previous alarm occurredwhile the system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor, and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor, andintrusion sensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound an alarmif the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set off thealarm if it senses movement of thevehicle, such as when a tire isremoved. Make sure the vehicle'salarm is not armed prior to anyjacking.



The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle's interior. Do not allowpassengers or pets to remain in thevehicle when the intrusion sensor isactivated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:. Make sure all doors and windowsare completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such as sunglasses.

. Make sure there are no obstructionsblocking the sensors in the frontoverhead console.

. Close DVD screens before leavingthe vehicle.

Inclination and Intrusion SensorDisable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensor be deactivatedif pets are left in the vehicle or thevehicle is being transported. With thevehicle turned off, presso in thefront overhead console. The indicatorlight will come on momentarily,indicating that these sensors havebeen disabled for the next alarmsystem arming cycle.

Steering Column LockIf equipped, the steering column lockis a theft-deterrent device. Thisfeature locks the steering columnwhen the vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened, or when thedriver door is opened and then thevehicle is turned off. The steeringcolumn unlocks when the vehicle isturned on.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)may display one of these messages:. A message to service the steeringcolumn lock indicates that an issuehas been detected with the columnlock feature and the vehicle shouldbe serviced.

. A message that the steering columnis locked indicates that the engineis running, but the steering columnis still locked. It is normal for thecolumn to be locked during aremote start, but the column shouldunlock after the brake pedal ispressed and the vehicle is started.No message will display during aremote start.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 25. A message that the steering wheelmust be turned and the vehiclemust be started again indicates thatthe column lock mechanism isbound, the column locking devicewas unable to unlock the steeringcolumn, and the vehicle did notstart. If this happens, immediatelyturn the steering wheel from side toside to unbind the column lock.If this does not unlock the steeringcolumn, turn the vehicle off andopen the driver door to reset thesystem. Then turn the vehicle onand immediately turn the steeringwheel side to side for about15 seconds. In some cases, it maytake significant force to unbind thecolumn.

To keep the steering column frombinding, straighten the front wheelsbefore turning off the vehicle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 439.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition is turnedon or to ACC/ACCESSORY and a validremote key is present in the vehicle.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming thetheft-deterrent system.

The system has one or more remotekeys matched to an immobilizercontrol unit in the vehicle. Only acorrectly matched remote key willstart the vehicle. If the remote key isever damaged, you may not be able tostart your vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light may come on briefly.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off), andthe remote key appears to beundamaged, try another remote key.Or, you may try placing the remotekey in the backup location. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7.

If the ignition modes will not changewith the other remote key or in thebackup location, the vehicle needsservice. If the ignition does changemodes, the first remote key may befaulty. See your dealer.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementremote keys. Up to eight remote keyscan be programmed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional remote keys, see“Programming Remote Keys to theVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 7.

Do not leave the remote key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WarningA convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on the right.Check the inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changinglanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen from thedriver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press j or | to select the driveror passenger side mirror. Theindicator light will illuminate.

2. Press the arrows on the control padto move the mirror in the desireddirection.

3. Adjust each outside mirror so thata little of the vehicle and the areabehind it can be seen.

4. Press j or | again to deselect themirror.

Memory Mirrors

The vehicle may have memorymirrors. See Memory Seats 0 40.

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)

The vehicle may have SBZA. See SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 310.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)

The vehicle may have LCA. See LaneChange Alert (LCA) 0 310.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to prevent damagewhen going through an automatic carwash. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.



Power Folding Mirrors

If equipped, pressg to power fold themirrors. Pressg again to unfold.

The outside mirrors mayautomatically unfold when the vehicleis driven above 20 km/h (12 mph), butmay be folded with the power foldingmirror switch. If the vehicle speed isdriven above 40 km/h (25 mph), theymay automatically unfold and maynot be refolded with the power foldingmirror switch.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

. The mirrors do not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position. A noisemay be heard during the resetting ofthe power folding mirrors. This soundis normal after a manual foldingoperation.

Remote Mirror Folding

If equipped with power foldingmirrors, and the mirrors have beenfolded with the power folding mirrorswitch, they may not be automaticallyunfolded by the Remote MirrorFolding feature.

If equipped with power foldingmirrors, and the mirrors have notbeen folded with the power foldingmirror switch and the vehicle is inP (Park), they may be automaticallyfolded/unfolded as follows:

1. If doors are locked by pressing Hon the remote key, the mirrors willfold. If doors are unlocked bypressing I on the remote key, themirrors will unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7.

2. If doors are locked by pressing thedoor handle button, the mirrorswill fold. If doors are unlocked bypressing the door handle button,the mirrors will unfold. See“Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door” in Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 7.

3. If passive locking is enabled anddoors are locked by that feature,the mirrors will fold. See “PassiveLocking” in Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation 0 7.



Heated MirrorsIf equipped with heated mirrors:

K : The rear window defogger alsoheats the outside mirrors.

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 209.

Automatic Dimming MirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with reverse tilt mirrorsand memory seats, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the curb to beseen when parallel parking. Themirror(s) may move from their tiltedposition when:. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven in R (Reverse)above a set speed.

Turn this feature on or off throughvehicle personalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror. Use a soft towel dampenedwith water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started.

Rear Camera MirrorIf equipped, this automatic dimmingmirror provides a wide angle cameraview of the area behind the vehicle.

Pull the tab to turn on the display.Push the tab to turn it off. When offthe mirror is automatic dimming.Adjust the mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle while thedisplay is off.



Press V to scroll through theadjustment options.

Press t and u to adjust the settingsusing the indicators on the mirror.The indicators will remain visible forfive seconds after the last buttonactivation, and the settings willremain saved.

The adjustment options are:

. Brightness

. Zoom

. Tilt



{ WarningThe Rear Camera Mirror (RCM) hasa limited view. Portions of the road,vehicles, and other objects may notbe seen. Do not drive or park thevehicle using only this camera.Objects may appear closer thanthey are. Check the outside mirrorsor glance over your shoulder whenmaking lane changes or merging.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

Troubleshooting

See your dealer for service if a bluescreen and3 are displayed in themirror, and the display shuts off. Also,push the tab as indicated to return tothe automatic dimming mode.

The Rear Camera Mirror may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. There is glare from the sun orheadlamps. This may obstructobjects from view. If needed, pushthe tab to turn off the display.

. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocksthe camera lens. Clean the lens witha soft damp cloth.

. The camera’s mounting on thevehicle has been damaged, and/orthe position or the mounting angleof the camera has changed.

Windows

{ WarningNever leave a child, a helpless adult,or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closedin warm or hot weather. They canbe overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce the sound,open either a front window or thesunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ WarningChildren could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Never leave theremote key in a vehicle withchildren. When there are children inthe rear seat, use the windowlockout switch to prevent operationof the windows. See Keys 0 6.

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 243.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

With Folding Mirrors, Without FoldingMirrors Similar

This feature stops the rear passengerwindow switches from working.

. Press2 to engage the rear windowlockout feature. The indicator lightis on when engaged.

. Press2 again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Press theswitch down fully and quickly releaseto express open the window.



If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release to expressclose the window. Briefly press or pullthe window switch in the samedirection to stop that window’sexpress movement.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature will reversewindow movement if it comes incontact with an object. Extreme coldor ice could cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will operatenormally after the object or conditionis removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ WarningIf automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Beforeusing automatic reversal system

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

override, make sure that all peopleand obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary if thevehicle battery has been disconnectedor discharged. If the window is unableto express-up, program eachexpress-close window:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switch brieflyafter the window has fully closed.

4. Open the window and continue topress the switch briefly after thewindow has fully opened.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature allows all thewindows to be opened remotely. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7. To enable the feature,see Vehicle Personalization 0 126.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to block glare.Detach the sun visor from the centermount to pivot to the side windowand, if equipped, extend along the rod.

Roof

SunroofIf equipped, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must be active



to operate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions 0 238 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 243.

While operating in express, movementcan be stopped by pressing the switchagain.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has an electricalfailure.

1. SLIDE Switch2. Power Sunshade Switch3. TILT Switch

Sunroof Operation:

. Press and releaseD (1) toexpress-open to the fully openposition.

. Pull and releaseD (1) toexpress-close.

. Press or pullD (1) again to stop atthe desired location.

Sunshade Operation:

. Press and release C (2) toexpress-open.

. Pull and release C (2) toexpress-close.

. Press or pull C (2) again to stop atthe desired location.

Sunroof Vent Operation:

. Press and releaseE (3) to vent thesunroof.

. Pull and releaseE (3) to close thesunroof vent.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof and power sunshade,if equipped, have an automaticreversal system that is only activewhen the sunroof and power sunshadeare operated in express-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress-closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof or power sunshadeslightly.

If this condition occurs, attempt toremove the object, then pull andrelease the switch to express close.If the reversal occurs multiple times,the DIC message OPEN THEN CLOSESUNROOF will display, and express isdisabled. To operate sunroof whileexpress is disabled, the switch mustbe either pressed or pulled and held.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loose debris.Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealingarea using a clean cloth, mild soap,and water. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 35

Seats and RestraintsHead RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 37Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . 38Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Buckle To Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Replacing Seat Belt System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 57When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . 59How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . 59What Will You See after an AirbagInflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 61Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . 65

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Infants and Young Children . . . . . . 68Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 70Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . 72Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . . 73

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82


36 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Head RestraintsIf equipped with base seats, thevehicle’s front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

If equipped with high performanceseats, the vehicle’s front seats havehead restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

{ WarningWith head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.

If equipped with base seats, adjust thehead restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as thetop of the occupant's head. Thisposition reduces the chance of a neckinjury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button located on the side ofthe head restraint, and pull up orpush the head restraint down andrelease the button. Pull and push onthe head restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it is lockedin place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.



The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it is lockedin place.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton, located on the top of theseatback, and push the head restraintdown. Try to move the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The rear seat outboard head restraintsare not intended to be removed.If removal is required see your dealerfor assistance with removal.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ WarningYou can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a driver seatwhile the vehicle is moving. Adjustthe driver seat only when thevehicle is not moving.

{ WarningThe power seats will work with theignition off. Children could operatethe power seats and be injured.Never leave children alone in thevehicle.

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

. If equipped, raise or lower the frontpart of the seat cushion by movingthe front of the control up or down.

For vehicles not equipped with frontcushion tilt, the front part of thecontrol will raise and lower the seat.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), seattravel may be limited. Release andpress the seat switch again tocontinue movement.



To adjust the seatback, see RecliningSeatbacks 0 38.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 39.

Some vehicles are equipped with aSafety Alert Seat. This featureactivates a vibrating pulse alert in thedriver seat to help the driver avoidcrashes.

Obstructions

If something has blocked the seatduring movement, the movement maystop. Remove the obstruction and trythe adjustment again. If movement isstill not available, see your dealer.

Thigh Support Adjustment

If equipped, pull up on the lever. Thenpull or push on the support tolengthen or shorten. Release the leverto lock in place.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WarningSitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckled up,the seat belts cannot do their job.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit well backin the seat and wear the seat beltproperly.



Do not have a seatback reclined if thevehicle is moving.

To adjust the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the control rearwardto recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

Lumbar Adjustment

1. To adjust lumbar support,if equipped:. If equipped, press Up (1) to

move lumbar support upward.. Press Rearward (2) to move

lumbar support rearward.. If equipped, press Down (3) to

move lumbar support down.. Press Forward (4) to move

lumbar support forward.

Uplevel Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust uplevel lumbar support,if equipped:. Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to lumbarsupport on the infotainment display.

. Press Forward (5) or Rearward (3) toadjust lumbar forward or rearward.

. Press Up (2) or Down (4) to adjustlumbar up or down.



Bolster Support Adjustment

High Performance Seat Shown,Others Similar

Back Bolster Support

To adjust back bolster support,if equipped:

Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolster supporton the infotainment display. PressForward (3) or Rearward (2) to adjustback bolster support inward oroutward.

Cushion Bolster Support

To adjust cushion bolster support,if equipped:

Press and release or hold FeatureSelect (1) to scroll to bolster supporton the infotainment display. PressForward (3) or Rearward (2) to adjustcushion bolster support inward oroutward.

Massage

If equipped, the vehicle must be on touse the massage feature.

To activate and adjust massage, turnthe feature select knob to viewavailable massage options on theinfotainment display and make aselection of massage intensity.

The massage recall button willactivate the most recent massagesetting.

When the massage feature is turnedoff, it will complete the massage cyclebefore returning to the previousposition.

Memory Seats

Overview

If equipped, the memory seat featureallows drivers to save their uniquedriving positions and a shared exitposition. See “Saving SeatingPositions” later in this section. Thesaved positions can be recalled



manually by all drivers. See “ManuallyRecalling Seating Positions” later inthis section. Drivers with remote key1 and 2 can also recall themautomatically. See “Auto Seat EntryMemory Recall” or “Auto Seat ExitMemory Recall” later in this section.To enable automatic recalls, turn onSeat Entry Memory and/or Seat ExitMemory. See “Enable AutomaticRecalls” under “VehiclePersonalization Settings” later in thissection. The memory recalls may becancelled at any time during therecall. See “Cancel Memory SeatingRecalls” later in this section.

Identifying Driver Number

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver by their remote key number 1–8. The current remote key numbermay be identified by DriverInformation Center (DIC) welcomemessage, “You are driver x for memoryrecalls.” This message is displayed thefirst few times the vehicle is turned onwhen a different remote key is used.For Seat Entry Memory to workproperly, save positions to the 1 or2 memory button matching the driver

number of this welcome message. Toaid in identifying remote key IDs, it isrecommended to only carry oneremote key when entering the vehicle.Perform the following if the welcomemessage is not displayed:

1. Move all remote keys away fromthe vehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with anotherremote key. A DIC welcomemessage should display indicatingthe driver number of the otherremote key. Turn the vehicle offand remove the other remote keyfrom the vehicle.

3. Start the vehicle with the initialremote key. The DIC welcomemessage should display the drivernumber of the initial remote key.

Saving Seating Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions to1 and 2:

1. Turn the vehicle on or to ACC/ACCESSORY. A DIC welcomemessage may indicate the driver

number of the current remote key.See “Identifying Driver Number”previously in this section.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beep willsound.

4. Immediately upon releasing SET,press and hold memory button 1 or2 matching the current Driver’sremote key number until two beepssound. If too much time passesbetween releasing SET and pressing1 or 2, the two beeps will notsound indicating memory positionwere not saved. Repeat Steps 3 and4 to try again.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for the otherremote key 1 or 2 using the other 1or 2 memory button.

It is recommended to save thepreferred driving positions to both1 and 2 if you are the only driver.

To save the common exit seatingposition toB that is used by alldrivers for Manually Recalling Seating



Positions and Auto Seat Exit MemoryRecall features, repeat Steps 1–4 usingB, the exit button.

Manually Recalling SeatingPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB button untilthe recall is complete, to recall thepositions previously saved to thatbutton.

Manual Memory recall movement for1, 2 orB buttons may be initiatedand will complete to the savedmemory position if the vehicle is in orout of P (Park).

If manual transmission equipped,Manual Memory recall movement for1, 2, orB buttons may be initiatedand will complete to the savedmemory position if the vehicle parkingbrake is set or released.

Enable Automatic Recalls underVehicle Personalization Settings. For Seat Entry Memory that beginsmovement to the preferred drivingposition of the 1 or 2 button whenthe vehicle is turned on, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle, then

Seating Position, then Seat EntryMemory, and then Select ON orOFF. See “Auto Seat Entry MemoryRecall” later in this section.

. For Seat Exit Memory that beginsmovement to the preferred exitposition of theB button when thevehicle is turned off and the driverdoor is open or opened, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle, thenSeating Position, then Seat ExitMemory, and then Select ON orOFF. See “Auto Seat Exit MemoryRecall” later in this section.

. See Vehicle Personalization 0 126 foradditional setting information.

Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall

Seat Entry Memory will automaticallybegin movement to the seatingpositions of the 1 or 2 buttoncorresponding to the driver’s remotekey number 1 or 2 detected by thevehicle when:. The vehicle is turned ON.. Seating positions have beenpreviously saved to the same 1 or 2button. See “Saving SeatingPositions” previously in this section.

. Seat Entry Memory is enabled. See“Enable Automatic Recalls” under“Vehicle Personalization Settings”previously in this section.

. The shift lever is in P (Park).

Seat Entry Memory Recall willcontinue if the vehicle is shifted outof P (Park) prior to reaching the savedmemory position.

If manual transmission equipped, SeatEntry Memory Recall will continue ifthe parking brake is released prior toreaching the saved memory position.

If the saved memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall, verifythe recall is enabled. See “EnableAutomatic Recalls” under “VehiclePersonalization Settings” previously inthis section.

If the memory seat recalls to thewrong position, the driver’s remotekey number 1 or 2 may not match thememory button number positionsthey were saved to. Try the otherremote key or try saving the positionsto the other 1 or 2 memory button.See “Saving Seating Positions”previously in this section.



Automatic Seat Entry Memory recallsare only available for driver’s remotekey numbers 1 and 2. Remote keys 3–8 will not provide Seat Entry Memoryrecalls.

Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall

Seat Exit Memory will beginmovement to the seating position oftheB button when:. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is open or openedwithin a short time.

. A seating position has beenpreviously been saved to theBmemory button. See “Saving SeatingPositions” previously in this section.

. Seat Exit Memory is enabled. See“Enable Automatic Recalls” under“Vehicle Personalization Settings”previously in this section.

. The shift lever is in P (Park).

. If manual transmission equipped,the parking brake must be set.

Seat Exit Memory recall will continueif the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)prior to reaching the saved memoryposition.

If manual transmission equipped, SeatExit Memory will continue if theparking brake is released prior toreaching the save memory position.

Seat Exit Memory is not linked to thedriver’s remote key. The seatingposition saved toB is used for alldrivers.

Cancel Memory Seating Recalls. During any memory recall:

Press a power seat control

Press SET memory button. During Manual memory recall:

Release 1, 2, orB memory button. During Auto Seat Entry MemoryRecall:

Turn vehicle off

Press SET, 1, 2, orB memorybuttons

. During Auto Seat Exit MemoryRecall:

Press SET, 1, 2, orB memorybuttons

Obstructions

If something has blocked the seatwhile recalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WarningIf temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. To reducethe risk of burns, use care whenusing the seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket,cushion, cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seat heatermay cause a burn or may damagethe seat.



If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

Press C or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights next to thebuttons indicate three for the highestsetting and one for the lowest. If the

front heated seats are on high, thelevel may automatically be loweredafter approximately 30 minutes.

When this feature is off, the heatedand ventilated seat symbols on thebuttons are white. A ventilated seathas a fan that pulls air through theseat. The air is not cooled. When aheated seat is turned on, the symbolturns red. When a ventilated seat isturned on, the symbol turns blue.

The passenger seat may take longer toheat up.

Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats

If the vehicle is equipped with autoheated or ventilated seats, and theengine is running, this feature willautomatically activate the heated orventilated seats at the level requiredby the vehicle's interior temperature.

The active high, medium, low, or offheated or ventilated seat level will beindicated by the manual heated andventilated seat buttons on the centerstack. Use the manual heated andventilated seat buttons on the centerstack to turn auto heated or ventilatedseats off. If the passenger seat is

unoccupied, the auto heated orventilated seats feature will notactivate that seat. The auto heatedand ventilated seats feature can beprogrammed to always be enabledwhen the vehicle is on. If equippedwith a heated steering wheel, the autoheated steering wheel activation willfollow the heated seat auto activationand the heated wheel indicator willfollow the state of the steeringwheel heat.

Remote Start Heated and VentilatedSeats

If equipped, the heated seats will turnon automatically during a remotestart if it is cold outside and theventilated seats will turn onautomatically if it is hot outside.If equipped, the heated steering wheelwill turn on automatically during aremote start if it is cold outside. Theheated and ventilated seat indicatorsand heated steering wheel indicatormay come on during this operation.



The heated and ventilated seats andheated steering wheel may cancelwhen the vehicle is started. Thesefeatures can be manually selectedafter the ignition is turned on.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced. Thisis normal.

The remote start heated or ventilatedseats can be enabled or disabled inthe vehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 13 andVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REAR SEATREMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEATdisplays under certain conditionsindicating there may be an item orpassenger in the rear seat. Checkbefore exiting the vehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened while thevehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on. Therewill be an alert when the vehicle is

turned off. The alert does not directlydetect objects in the rear seat; instead,under certain conditions, it detectswhen a rear door is opened andclosed, indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rear seat;for example, if a child entered thevehicle through the rear door and leftthe vehicle without the vehicle beingshut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 126.

Folding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded for more cargo space. Fold aseatback only when the vehicle is notmoving.

CautionFolding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:

1. Disconnect the rear seat beltmini-latch using a key in the sloton the mini-buckle, and let the beltretract.



2. Pull the lever on top of theseatback toward you to unlock theseatback.

A red tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

3. Fold the seatback forward.

Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold theother seatback, if desired.

Raising the Seatback

{ WarningIf either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WarningA seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are nottwisted.

To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up. Make sure thecenter seat belt and latch do notget trapped behind the seat. Pushthe seatback rearward to lock it inplace.

A red tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is locked intoposition.

3. Reconnect the center seat beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle. Donot let the belt twist.

4. Pull on the center seat belt to makesure the mini-latch is secure.

5. Repeat the steps to raise the otherseatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, it shouldbe kept in the upright, locked position.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to use seatbelts properly, and some things notto do.



{ WarningDo not let anyone ride where a seatbelt cannot be worn properly. In acrash, if you or your passenger(s)are not wearing seat belts, injuriescan be much worse than if you arewearing seat belts. You can beseriously injured or killed by hittingthings inside the vehicle harder orby being ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a collision, passengersriding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Donot allow passengers to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, and checkthat all passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts. SeeSeat Belt Reminders 0 104.

Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travel asfast as the vehicle does. If the vehiclestops suddenly, you keep going untilsomething stops you. It could be thewindshield, the instrument panel,or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together. Thereis more time to stop because you stopover a longer distance and, when wornproperly, your strongest bones take

the forces from the seat belts. That iswhy wearing seat belts makes suchgood sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being conscious duringand after a crash, so you canunbuckle and get out, is muchgreater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seat belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systemsonly. They work with seat belts—not instead of them. Whether ornot an airbag is provided, alloccupants still have to buckle up toget the most protection.

Also, in nearly all states and in allCanadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.



Buckle To DriveIf equipped, this feature prevents thevehicle from shifting out of P (Park)when the driver seat belt is notbuckled. The Buckle to Drive featuremust be turned ON in theinfotainment system to work. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 126 and ifequipped, Teen Driver 0 196. If theengine is running, the driver seat beltis not buckled, and the brake pedal ispressed with the vehicle in P (Park), amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Buckle thedriver seat belt to shift out of P (Park).Shifting from P (Park) will beprevented once for each ignition cycle.

For some fleet vehicles, the feature isalways ON and it cannot be turnedOFF in the infotainment system.Shifting from P (Park) will beprevented each time the aboveconditions exist.

On some models, Buckle to Drive mayalso prevent shifting out of P (Park) ifa front passenger is unbuckled undersimilar conditions. A message displaysin the DIC. Buckle the front passengerseat belt to shift out of P (Park). This

feature may not allow the vehicle toshift out of P (Park) if an object, suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device, ison the front passenger seat. If thishappens, remove the object from theseat or buckle the seat belt to shiftout of P (Park).

If the driver, or on some vehicles, thepresent front passenger remainsunbuckled, the DIC message will turnoff after several seconds and thevehicle can be shifted out of P (Park).See “Seat Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

If the driver seat belt or the frontpassenger seat belt is unbuckled whendriving, the seat belt reminder chimeand light(s) will come on. See Seat BeltReminders 0 104. This feature may notfunction properly if the airbagreadiness light is on. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children and infants.If a child will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children 0 67 orInfants and Young Children 0 68.Review and follow the rules forchildren in addition to the followingrules.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearingseat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 49. Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you (ifpossible).

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crash, this appliesforce to the strong pelvic bones andyou would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid underit, the belt would apply force onyour abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

{ WarningYou can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearing yourseat belt properly.

Never allow the lap or shoulder belt tobecome loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.



Always use the correct buckle for yourseating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.

{ WarningThe seat belt can be pinched if it isrouted under plastic trim on theseat, such as trim around the rearseatback folding handle or sideairbag. In a crash, pinched seatbelts might not provide adequateprotection. Never allow seat belts tobe routed under plastic trim pieces.

{ WarningYou can be seriously injured orkilled if the shoulder belt is wornbehind your back, under your legs,or wrapped around your neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround you. You may have to cutthe seat belt if it is locked andtightened around you.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seating positionwith a detachable seat belt and theseat belt is not attached, see RearSeats 0 45 for instructions onreconnecting the seat belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. If the seat has a seat belt guide, theseat belt must be routed throughthe guide to properly position theshoulder belt. If the seat belt is notrouted through the guide, slide theedge of the belt webbing throughthe opening on the guide. Be surethe belt is not twisted.

2. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats” inthe Index.



3. Pick up the latch plate and pull thebelt across you. Do not let it gettwisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Thenpull the belt across you moreslowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out all theway, the child restraint lockingfeature may be engaged. See ChildRestraint Systems 0 70. If thisoccurs, let the belt go back all theway and start again. If the lockingfeature stays engaged after letting

the belt go back to stowed positionon the seat, move the seat rearwardor recline the seat until theshoulder belt retractor lockreleases.

Engaging the child restraint lockingfeature in the front outboardseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 61.

If the shoulder portion of the driverbelt is pulled out all the way, theshoulder belt retractor lock featuremay be engaged. If this happens,let the belt go back all the way andstart again. If the locking featurestays engaged after letting the beltgo back to stowed position on theseat, move the seat rearward orrecline the seat until the shoulderbelt retractor lock releases.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckleuntil it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure. If the belt is notlong enough, see Seat Belt Extender0 54.

Position the release button on thebuckle so that the seat belt couldbe quickly unbuckled if necessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.



6. To make the lap part tight, pull upon the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pull thewebbing firmly, through theadjustable stop, or move theadjustable stop along the webbingtoward the outboard floor anchor,to fully tighten the lap belt acrossthe lap.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position.

Slide the adjustable stop along thewebbing toward the guide loop whenthe seat belt is not in use to preventthe latch plate from rattling againstthe interior trim.

Always stow the seat belt slowly. If theseat belt webbing returns quickly tothe stowed position, the retractor maylock and cannot be pulled out. If thishappens, pull the seat belt straight outfirmly to unlock the webbing, andthen release it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a seat belt, damagecan occur to both the seat belt andthe vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but not contacting,the neck. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the seat belt in acrash. See How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly 0 48.



Press the release button and move theheight adjuster to the desired position.The adjuster can be moved up bypushing the slide/trim up. After theadjuster is set to the desired position,try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it haslocked into position.

Automatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem

The vehicle may have the AutomaticSeat Belt Tightening System.

Each time the vehicle is started withthe front seat belts buckled, thesystem activates once to tighten the

seat belts when the forward vehiclespeed exceeds the threshold foractivation.

The system also activates duringemergency braking and/or suddendriving maneuvers and releases whendriving conditions return to normal.

The system will not activate if theTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl system is not functioningproperly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 257.If there is a problem with theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem, a message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). If asystem unavailable message displaysrepeatedly or if a service messagedisplays, see your dealer. Other seatbelt functions are not affected by theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they arepart of the seat belt assembly. They

can help tighten the seat belts duringthe early stages of a moderate tosevere frontal, near frontal, or rearcrash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. Seatbelt pretensioners can also helptighten the seat belts in a side crashor a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably otherparts of the vehicle's seat belt systemwill need to be replaced. See ReplacingSeat Belt System Parts after a Crash0 55.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicle orat any time while sitting in the seat.Sitting on the seat belt can damagethe webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the shoulderbelt away from the neck and head.



Comfort guides are available throughyour dealer for the rear outboardseating positions. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearseat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the mother. When a seat beltis worn properly, it is more likely thatthe fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making seat belts effectiveis wearing them properly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you an extender.Only a GM dealer issued extendershould be used. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will be longenough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for the seatit is made to fit. The extender hasbeen designed for adults. Never use itfor securing child restraints. For moreinformation on the proper use and fit

of seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes with theextender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder belt heightadjusters (if equipped), and seat beltanchorages to make sure they are allin working order. Look for any otherloose or damaged seat belt systemparts that might keep a seat beltsystem from performing properly. Seeyour dealer to have it repaired. Torn,frayed, or twisted seat belts may notprotect you in a crash. Torn or frayedseat belts can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed, haveit replaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible to untwistby reversing the latch plate on thewebbing. If the twist cannot becorrected, ask your dealer to fix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminder lightis working. See Seat Belt Reminders0 104.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. See SeatBelt Care 0 55.



Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly cared forand maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be kept dryand free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfaces andseat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dust ordebris in the mechanism. If dust ordebris exists in the system please seethe dealer. Parts may need to bereplaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

{ WarningDo not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after a Crash

{ WarningA crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help make surethe seat belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary. Butthe seat belt assemblies that wereused during any crash may have beenstressed or damaged. See your dealerto have the seat belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat belt systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A knee airbag for the driver.

. A knee airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the front outboard passenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver andthe passenger seated directly behindthe driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directly behind thefront outboard passenger



All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a label nearthe deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the center of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrumentpanel for the front outboardpassenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG ison the lower part of the instrumentpanel.

For seat-mounted side impact airbags,the word AIRBAG is on the side of theseatback or side of the seat closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seat belts.Even though today's airbags are alsodesigned to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflatingbag, all airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things toknow about the airbag system:

{ WarningYou can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are not designedto inflate in every crash. In somecrashes seat belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 58.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to theseat belts. Everyone in the vehicleshould wear a seat belt properly,whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

{ WarningBecause airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink of aneye, anyone who is up against,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you would beif sitting on the edge of the seat orleaning forward. Seat belts helpkeep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear a seatbelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts and thefront outboard passenger airbagsare most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat with both feet on the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.



{ WarningChildren who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 67 orInfants and Young Children 0 68.

There is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument cluster, which showsthe airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passenger frontalairbag is in the passenger sideinstrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.



Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted side impactairbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WarningIf something is between anoccupant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or itmight force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear. Do not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

put anything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attach orput anything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roof ofa vehicle with roof-rail airbags byrouting a rope or tie‐down throughany door or window opening. If youdo, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with airbags.See Airbag System 0 55. Airbags aredesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds the specific airbag system'sdeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and help



restrain the occupants. The vehiclehas electronic sensors that help theairbag system determine the severityof the impact. Deployment thresholdscan vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries, mainly tothe driver's or front outboardpassenger's head and chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed or moving,rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, in rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle has advancedtechnology frontal airbags. Advancedtechnology frontal airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Knee airbags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal impacts. Knee airbags are notdesigned to inflate during vehiclerollovers, in rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending on thelocation of the impact. Seat-mountedside impact airbags are not designedto inflate in frontal impacts, nearfrontal impacts, rollovers, or rearimpacts. A seat-mounted side impactairbag is designed to inflate on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location ofthe impact. In addition, these roof-railairbags are designed to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Roof-rail airbags are notdesigned to inflate in rear impacts.Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when

either side of the vehicle is struck,if the sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the vehicledamage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break out ofthe cover. The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of theairbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 57.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. In



moderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contact theinside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts by distributingthe force of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help contain the head andchest of occupants in the outboardseating positions in the first andsecond rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to helpreduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant's motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 58.

Airbags should never be regarded asanything more than a supplement toseat belts.

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?After frontal, knee, and seat-mountedside impact airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags maystill be at least partially inflated forsome time after they inflate. Somecomponents of the airbag module maybe hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbags, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 57.

The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{ WarningWhen an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the fuelsystem after the airbags inflate. Thefeature may also activate, withoutairbag inflation, after an event thatexceeds a predetermined threshold.After turning the ignition off and thenon again, the fuel system will returnto normal operation; the doors can be



locked, the interior lamps can beturned off, and the hazard warningflashers can be turned off using thecontrols for those features. If any ofthese systems are damaged in thecrash they may not operate as normal.

{ WarningA crash severe enough to inflate theairbags may have also damagedimportant functions in the vehicle,such as the fuel system, brake andsteering systems, etc. Even if thevehicle appears to be drivable aftera moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that could makeit difficult to safely operate thevehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflate onlyonce. After an airbag inflates, youwill need some new parts for theairbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not bethere to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for thevehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which recordsinformation after a crash. SeeVehicle Data Recording and Privacy0 441 andEvent Data Recorders 0 441.

. Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag system. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the front outboardpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will light onthe overhead console when the vehicleis started.

The words ON and OFF, and thesymbols for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, and the symbol foron or off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator 0 105.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbag isaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing system workswith sensors that are part of the frontoutboard passenger seat and seat belt.The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag should be allowed toinflate or not.



According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag inflates.

{ WarningA child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure childrestraints in the rear seat. Considerusing another vehicle to transportthe child when a rear seat is notavailable.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger seatis unoccupied.

. The system determines an infant ispresent in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag, the OFF indicator will light andstay lit as a reminder that the airbagsare off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 105.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag, anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensing systemhas allowed the airbag to be enabled,the ON indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areactive.

For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the front



outboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should weara seat belt properly— whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

{ WarningIf the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag, if the system determinesthat an infant is present in a childrestraint. If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the ON indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional items fromthe seat such as blankets, cushions,seat covers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand refer to Securing ChildRestraints (With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat) 0 80 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 82.

Make sure the seat belt retractor islocked by pulling the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractorwhen installing the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a seat belt lock off.When the retractor lock is set, thebelt can be tightened but notpulled out of the retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting the vehicle,the ON indicator is still lit, turn thevehicle off. Then slightly recline thevehicle seatback and adjust theseat cushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehiclehead restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See HeadRestraints 0 36.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the airbags for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rearseat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even if theON indicator is not lit.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat, butthe OFF indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion,with legs comfortably extended.

5. If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensing systemto turn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, let thebelt go back all the way, and thenbuckle the belt again withoutpulling the belt out all the way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the ONindicator is lit.

{ WarningIf the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboard passengerseat, if the passenger airbag OFFindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passenger inposition on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status.See “Seat Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat



massagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seatcovers or other aftermarket equipmentexcept when approved by GM for yourspecific vehicle. See Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 65 formore information about modificationsthat can affect how the systemoperates.

The ON indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or other electronicdevice, is put on an unoccupied seat.If this is not desired, remove theobject from the seat.

{ WarningStowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of theairbag system in several places aroundthe vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Publication OrderingInformation 0 439.

{ WarningFor up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system.Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure theperson performing work for you isqualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheet metalmay keep the airbag system fromworking properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, or airbag wiring

. Front seats, including stitching,seams or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrument panel,overhead console, ceiling trim,or pillar garnish trim

. Inner door seals, including speakers

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the location ofthe airbag modules and sensors,



sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part of thepassenger seat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properly ifthe original seat trim is replaced withnon-GM covers, upholstery, or trim; orwith GM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on top ofthe seat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of the passengersensing system. This could eitherprevent proper deployment of thepassenger airbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem 0 61.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tires andWheels 0 384 for additional importantinformation.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability and havequestions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicle ismodified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. See CustomerAssistance Offices 0 432.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 105.

CautionIf an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag maynot work properly. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings. If thereare any opened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbag coveringand/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? 0 57. Seeyour dealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WarningA crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle. A damagedairbag system may not properlyprotect you and your passenger(s)in a crash, resulting in seriousinjury or even death. To help makesure the airbag systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. See yourdealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear the vehicle’sseat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat. Dothe knees bend at the seat edge? Ifyes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Doesthe shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no, tryusing the rear seat belt comfortguide, if available. See “Rear SeatBelt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt 0 50. If a comfortguide is not available, or if theshoulder belt still does not rest onthe shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs? Ifyes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wearseat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies belt

force to the child's pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 50.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children needto use seat belts properly.

{ WarningNever allow more than one child towear the same seat belt. The seatbelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, they canbe crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A seat belt must be used byonly one person at a time.



{ WarningNever allow a child to wear the seatbelt shoulder belt under both armsor behind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head andneck injury. The child might alsoslide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied righton the abdomen. That could cause

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

serious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, foreveryone, to use safety restraints. Infact, the law in every state in the

United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{ WarningChildren can be seriously injured orkilled if the shoulder belt is wornbehind their back, under their legs,or wrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround the child. Never leavechildren unattended in a vehicleand never allow children toimproperly wear, or play with, theseat belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints. Neither the vehicle'sseat belt system nor its airbag systemis designed for them.



Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WarningNever hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate childrestraint.

{ WarningChildren who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat.Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better tosecure a forward-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. If you mustsecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimes calledchild seats or car seats.

There are three basic types of childrestraints:. Forward-facing child restraints. Rear-facing child restraints. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.



For each types of child restraints,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle and iscertified to comply with US Federal orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. If it is, the child restraintwill have a label saying that it meetsfederal motor vehicle safety standards.The NHTSA website includes a list ofregistered car seat manufacturers(https://www.nhtsa.gov) and links totheir registration pages for consumers.Registration helps manufacturersidentify purchasers for recall notices.

The instruction manual that isprovided with the child restraintstates the weight and heightlimitations for that particular childrestraint. In addition, there are manykinds of child restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ WarningTo reduce the risk of neck and headinjury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ WarningA young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle seat beltmay not remain low on the hipbones, as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the belt wouldapply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious orfatal injuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children should alwaysbe secured in an appropriate childrestraint.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.



Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child's bodywith the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat is usedfor children who have outgrown theirforward-facing child restraint.Boosters are designed to improve thefit of the vehicle's seat belt systemuntil the child is large enough for thevehicle seat belts to fit properlywithout a booster seat. See the seatbelt fit test in Older Children 0 67.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WarningA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraints must besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 73 for moreinformation. Never use a seat beltextender when installing a childrestraint. Use only seats and relatedequipment that are certified to complywith US Federal or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standards to secure a



child restraint. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the following:

1. Instruction labels provided on thechild restraint

2. Instruction manual provided withthe child restraint

3. This vehicle owner's manual

The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are not available,obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs)are available to inspect anddemonstrate how to correctly use andinstall child restraints. In the U.S.,refer to the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA)website to locate the nearest childsafety seat inspection station. ForCPST availability in Canada, checkwith Transport Canada or theProvincial Ministry of Transportationoffice.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WarningA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front. This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great ifthe airbag deploys.

{ WarningA child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no systemis fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facing

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

child restraint in the front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 61for additional information.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seats varyconsiderably in size, and some may fitin certain seating positions betterthan others. Do not install a childrestraint in any rear seating positionwhere it cannot be installed securely.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able toaccess adjacent seat belts or LATCHanchors for additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of theseat belt.

The seat in front of an installed childrestraint should be adjusted to ensureproper installation according to thechild restraint manual.

Wherever a child restraint is installed,be sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andsecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in the vehicle.The LATCH system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installed usingeither the LATCH anchors or thevehicle’s seat belts. Do not use boththe seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.



Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seat besecured with the LATCH system, thiscan be done as long as the boosterseat can be positioned properly andthere is no interference with theproper positioning of the lap-shoulderbelt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the seat belts toproperly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tether.

For a forward-facing 5-pt harnesschild restraint where the combinedweight of the child and restraint areup to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either thelower LATCH anchorages with the toptether anchorage, or the seat belt withthe top tether anchorage. Where thecombined weight of the child andrestraint are greater than29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt withthe top tether anchorage only.



Recommended Methods for Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weightof the Child +Child Restraint

Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Shown with an X

LATCH – LowerAnchors Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH – LowerAnchors and TopTether Anchor

Seat Belt and TopTether Anchor

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

Up to29.5 kg (65 lb)

X X

Rear-Facing ChildRestraint

Greater than29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Up to29.5 kg (65 lb)

X X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Greater than29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

See Securing Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 80 orSecuring Child Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Front Seat) 0 82.

Child restraints built after March 2014will be labeled with the specific childweight up to which the LATCH systemcan be used to install the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions havelower anchors. In this case, the seatbelt must be used (with top tetherwhere available) to secure the childrestraint. See Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 80 orSecuring Child Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Front Seat) 0 82.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal bars builtinto the vehicle. There are two loweranchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate achild restraint with lowerattachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3,4) is used to secure thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have a singletether (3) or a dual tether (4). Eitherwill have a single attachment hook (2)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethersare designed for use with or withoutthe top tether being attached. Othersrequire the top tether always to beattached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraintshave a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I : Seating positions with top tetheranchors.



H : Seating positions with two loweranchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, near thecrease between the seatback and theseat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchor symbolis on the cover.

The lower anchors are located underthe labeled covers on the seat cushionnear the crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

The top tether anchors are behind therear seat, on the filler panel. Open thecovers to access the anchors. Be sureto use an anchor located directlybehind the seating position where thechild restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 72 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ WarningA child could be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attached to

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the vehicle using either the LATCHanchors or the vehicle seat belt.Follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ WarningTo reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, do notattach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during acrash. A child or others could beinjured.

{ WarningChildren can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten but

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock, andtighten the belt behind the childrestraint after the child restrainthas been installed.

{ WarningThe power seats will work with theignition off. Children could operatethe power seats and be injured.Never leave children alone in thevehicle.

CautionDo not let the LATCH attachmentsrub against the vehicle’s seat belts.This may damage these parts.If necessary, move buckled seatbelts to avoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 72.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the lower anchors.If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe seat belt. Refer to the child



restraint manufacturer instructionsand the instructions in thismanual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for thedesired seating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tether beattached, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Open the top tether anchorcover to expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten thetop tether according to yourchild restraint instructions andthe following instructions:

. If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

. If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraint

and you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

. If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and you areusing a single tether, raisethe head restraint androute the tether under thehead restraint and inbetween the head restraintposts.



. If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, raisethe head restraint androute the tether under thehead restraint and inbetween the head restraintposts.

3. Before placing a child in the childrestraint, make sure it is securelyheld in place. To check, grasp thechild restraint at the LATCH pathand attempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WarningA crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure theLATCH system is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer tohave the system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 73 forhow and where to install the childrestraint using LATCH. If a childrestraint is secured in the vehicleusing a seat belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 73 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seat beltto secure the child restraint. Be sureto follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint.

If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, be sureto read Where to Put the Restraint 0 72.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

If the head restraint interferes withthe proper installation of the childrestraint, see your dealer forassistance.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder portions of thevehicle seat belt through or aroundthe child restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button on thebuckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

The push button used to releasethe latch plate must be visible andnot obscured by the child restraint.There must not be direct contact ofthe child restraint to the pushbutton.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.When the retractor lock is set, thebelt can be tightened but notpulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push down onthe child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure the retractoris locked. If the retractor is notlocked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions

regarding the use of the top tether.See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 73.

7. Before placing a child in the childrestraint, make sure it is securelyheld in place. To check, grasp thechild restraint at the seat belt pathand attempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed, thereshould be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat isa safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 72.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the front

outboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag under certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System 0 61 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 105for more information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WarningA child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag(s)are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 61for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 73 for toptether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires that

the top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing theforward-facing child restraint. Movethe seat upward or the seatback toan upright position, if needed, toget a tight installation of the childrestraint.

The push button used to releasethe latch plate must be visible andnot obscured by the child restraint.There must not be direct contact ofthe child restraint to the pushbutton.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag

and knee airbag, the OFF indicatoron the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 105.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder portions of thevehicle seat belt through or aroundthe child restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




Position the release button on thebuckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.When the retractor lock is set, thebelt can be tightened but notpulled out of the retractor.

It may be necessary to slide theadjustable stop along the webbingtoward the outboard anchor tofully tighten the seat belt aroundthe child restraint. While a childrestraint is installed, the adjustablestop should be positioned on the

portion of the webbing that doesnot interact with the childrestraint.

6. To tighten the belt, push down onthe child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint asyou tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure the retractoris locked. If the retractor is notlocked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in the childrestraint, make sure it is securelyheld in place. To check, grasp thechild restraint at the seat belt pathand attempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed, thereshould be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the OFFindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on and stayon when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 61.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position.


STORAGE 85

StorageStorage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Storage Compartments

{ WarningDo not store heavy or sharp objectsin storage compartments. In acrash, these objects may cause thecover to open and could result ininjury.

Glove Box

Pull the handle from the side to openthe glove box. Close until it latches.Use the vehicle key to lock or unlock.

CupholdersCupholders in the center console havea retractable cover. Do not place itemson the cover.

Press the button to open the cover.


86 STORAGE

Rear Seat Cupholders

If equipped, pull down the rear seatarmrest to use the cupholders.

Center Console StorageIf equipped, the SD card is used fornavigation. Do not remove the cardfrom the holder.

Automatic Transmission Shown,Manual Transmission Similar

Press the button and lift to access thestorage area. There is an accessorypower outlet, two USB ports, and anSD card slot inside. See Power Outlets0 92 orUSB Port 0 154.

If equipped, there is a removablephone holder to store a phone and thecord while charging.

Umbrella Storage

Slide a compact umbrella no largerthan 6 cm (2.36 in) in diameter intothe opening on the driver orpassenger door.


STORAGE 87

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

The cargo tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads inside the trunk.


88 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments andControlsControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . 89Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . 89Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . 90Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Instrument Cluster (BaseLevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) . . . . . 98Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge (Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . 105Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 106Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Brake System Warning Light . . . . 108Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . 108Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Performance Shifting Light . . . . . . 109Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH)Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . 110Automatic Emergency Braking(AEB) Disabled Light . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . 110Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 111Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . 112

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . 114Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 114Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Information DisplaysDriver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Driver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . 122

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . 126Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . 126

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . 126

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . . . . . 132Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 89

Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Power Tilt and Telescoping Wheel

If equipped, the control is on the leftside of the steering column.. Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

. Push the control forward orrearward to move the steering wheeltoward the front or rear of thevehicle.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

To set the power tilt wheel memoryposition, see Memory Seats 0 40.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See Steering Wheel Controls0 146.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped, press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off. Anindicator light next to the buttondisplays when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to be fully heated.



If equipped with a remote start heatedsteering wheel, the heated steeringwheel and indicator will turn onautomatically.

If equipped with auto heated seats,the heated steering wheel will turn onalong with the heated seats when it iscold outside. The heated steeringwheel indicator light may not comeon. See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 43.

HornPressa on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the windshieldwiper lever to select the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

INT : Use this setting for intermittentwipes or for Rainsense wipes, whenRainsense is enabled. For intermittentwipes, move the lever up to INT, thenturn thex INT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If Rainsense isenabled, see “Rainsense” later in thissection.

If the windshield wipers are in use fora while when driving, the exteriorlamps come on automatically if theexterior lamp control is in AUTO. See“Wiper-Activated Headlamps” later inthis section.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL : Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thewindshield wiper lever is released,additional wipes may occur dependingon how long the windshield washerhad been activated. See Washer Fluid0 348 for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

{ WarningIn freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washer fluidcan form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

{ WarningBefore driving the vehicle, alwaysclear snow and ice from the hood,windshield, washer nozzles, roof,and rear of the vehicle, including all

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

lamps and windows. Reducedvisibility from snow and ice buildupcould lead to a crash.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should be replaced.See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 355.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they willimmediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driver door isopened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsensewipes, the wipers continue to rununtil they reach the base of thewindshield.

Rainsense

There is a sensor near the top centerof the windshield detects the amountof water on the windshield andcontrols the frequency of thewindshield wiper. To turn this featureon or off, see “Rain Sense Wipers”under Vehicle Personalization 0 126.

Keep this area of the windshield clearof debris to allow for best systemperformance.

AUTO : When enabled, move thewindshield wiper lever to AUTO. Turnthex AUTO band on the wiperlever to adjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiper lever outof the AUTO position to deactivateRainsense.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

If equipped with wiper arm assemblyprotection, when using an automaticcar wash, move the windshield wiperlever to OFF. This disables theautomatic Rainsense windshieldwipers.

With Rainsense, if the transmission isin N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Wiper-Activated Headlamps

This feature activates the headlampsand parking lamps after thewindshield wipers have been in usefor a while. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based on thewiper speed. For this feature to work,the exterior lamp control must bein AUTO.



The wiper-activated headlampsimmediately turn off when theignition is turned to off, or thewindshield wiper control is turned off.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receives itsheading and other information fromthe Global Positioning System (GPS)antenna, StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC), and vehiclespeed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number of milesor degrees of turn before needing asignal from the GPS satellites. Whenthe compass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive a GPSsignal. The compass system willautomatically determine when a GPSsignal is restored and provide aheading again.

ClockSet the time and date using theinfotainment system. See "Time /Date" under Settings 0 189.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has two accessory poweroutlets:. Inside the center consolestorage area.

. On the rear of the center floorconsole.

Lift the cover to access the accessorypower outlet.

Certain electrical accessories may notbe compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overload avehicle circuit breaker or adapter fuse.If overloaded, the circuit breaker willreset after all devices are disconnectedor if Retained Accessory Power (RAP)is turned off and then back on. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 243.Wait one minute to allow the circuit

breaker to reset before reconnectingdevices or turning RAP back on. If theproblem continues, the issue could bewithin your device. Try anotherknown good device to make sure thecircuit breaker is operating properly.If this does not resolve your problem,see your dealer.

It is possible to replace the factorypower outlet with a cigar lighterreceptacle, if desired. This requires thefactory installed circuit breaker to bereplaced with a standard minifuse bythe dealer. A minifuse will not resetand will have to be replace if blown.

CautionFailure to replace the circuitbreaker with the minifuse couldoverheat the cigar lighter anddamage the vehicle.

When adding electrical equipment, besure to follow the proper installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 326.



CautionHanging heavy equipment from thepower outlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, such ascell phone charge cords.

Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug inequipment that exceeds the maximum15 amps rating.

Wireless ChargingIf equipped, the vehicle has wirelesscharging in the bin below the climatecontrol system. The system operatesat 145 kHz and wirelessly charges oneQi compatible smartphone. The poweroutput of the system is capable ofcharging at a rate up to 3 amp (15 W),as requested by the compatiblesmartphone. See Radio FrequencyStatement 0 439.

{ WarningWireless charging may affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medical devices.If you have one, it is recommendedto consult with your doctor beforeusing the wireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active. Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP, during a Bluetoothphone call, or when phone projection(e.g. Apple CarPlay / Android Auto) isactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 243.

The operating temperature is −40 °C(−40 °F) to 85 °C (185 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the phone. A chargingstopped alert may be displayed on theinfotainment screen, if the wirelesscharger or smartphone are outside ofnormal operating temperature.

Charging will automatically resumewhen a normal operating temperatureis reached.

{ WarningRemove all objects from the chargerbefore charging your compatiblesmartphone. Objects, such as coins,keys, rings, paper clips, or cards,between the smartphone andcharger may become very hot.

On the rare occasion that thecharging system does not detect anobject, and the object gets wedgedbetween the smartphone andcharger, remove the smartphoneand allow the object to cool beforeremoving it from the charger, toprevent burns.



To charge a compatible smartphone:

1. Confirm the smartphone is capableof wireless charging.

2. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system may notcharge if there are any objectsbetween the smartphone andcharger.

3. Place the smartphone face upagainst the rear of the charger.

To maximize the charge rate,ensure the smartphone is fullyseated and centered in the holderwith nothing under it.

A thick smartphone case mayprevent the charger from working,or reduce the chargingperformance. See your dealer foradditional information.

4. A green ] will appear on theinfotainment display, next to thephone icon. This indicates that thesmartphone is detected.

5. If a smartphone is placed on thecharger and ] turns off or turnsyellow, remove the smartphone andany objects from the pad. Turn thesmartphone 180 degrees and wait afew seconds before placing/aligningit on the pad again.

6. If a smartphone is placed on thecharger and ] turns red, thecharger and/or the smartphone isoverheated. Remove thesmartphone and any objects fromthe charger in order to cool thesystem.

The smartphone may become warmduring charging. This is normal. Inwarmer temperatures, the speed ofcharging may be reduced.

For vehicles with wireless phoneprojection, the smartphone mayoverheat during wireless charging. Thesmartphone may slow down, stopcharging, or shut down to protect thebattery. The phone may need to beremoved from its case to preventoverheating. The ] may flash whilethe phone is cooling down enough forwireless charging to automaticallyresume. This is normal. Individualphone performance may vary.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer to theindicated open source licenses (as areincluded following this notice) for theterms and conditions of their use.

OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, please visithttp://opensource.lge.com. In additionto the source code, all referred licenseterms, warranty disclaimers andcopyright notices are available fordownload. LG Electronics will also



provide open source code to you onCD-ROM for a charge covering thecost of performing such distribution(such as the cost of media, shipping,and handling) upon email request [email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from the dateon which you purchased the product.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

Redistribution and use in source andbinary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted providedthat the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditions andthe following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentationand/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the copyrightholder nor the names of itscontributors may be used toendorse or promote productsderived from this software withoutspecific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS ANDCONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANYDIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSEDAND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IFADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGE.

Warning Lights, Gauges,and IndicatorsWarning lights and gauges can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gauges could prevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started to indicatethey are working. When one of thewarning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of thegauges shows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster (Base Level)

English Base Level Cluster Shown, Metric Similar

1. Tachometer 0 1022. Driver Information Center (DIC)

(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119

3. Speedometer 0 101

4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge(Uplevel) 0 104 orEngine Coolant Temperature Gauge(Base Level) 0 103

5. Fuel Gauge 0 102

Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display area inthe center of the instrument cluster.

Use the right steering wheel control toopen and scroll through the differentitems and displays.

Press S or T to access the clusterapplications. Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the list of availablefeatures within the applications. Notall applications or features will beavailable on all vehicles.


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 97. Info App. This is where the selectedDriver Information Center (DIC)displays can be viewed. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Base Level)0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

. Audio

. Navigation

. Phone

. Options

Audio

Browse for music, select fromfavorites, or change the audio source.Use the thumbwheel to change thestation or go to the next or previoustrack.

Navigation

If there is an active route, press thethumbwheel to cancel or resume routeguidance, or turn the voice promptson or off.

Phone

View recent calls or scroll throughcontacts when you are not on anactive call. Mute the phone or switchto handset operation if you are on anactive call.

Options

Use the thumbwheel to scroll throughitems in the Options menu.

Head-up Display (HUD) : If equipped,this feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image and changingor turning off the Speed Limit Sign.

HUD Rotation (Uplevel): Press thethumbwheel while Adjust Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.Scroll to adjust the angle of the HUDdisplay. Press the thumbwheel toconfirm and save the setting. Thisfeature may only be available inP (Park).

Speed Sign: If equipped, press thethumbwheel while Speed Sign ishighlighted to turn it on or off.

Units : Choose US or metric units bypressing the thumbwheel while thedesired item is highlighted.

Info Page Options : Press thethumbwheel to select the items to bedisplayed in the Info app. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Base Level)0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

Display : Press the thumbwheel toenter the Display menu. Select to turnon or off the speedometer, time, fuelrange, or, if equipped, compass orspeed sign.

Speed Warning : The Speed Warningdisplay allows the driver to set awarning at a speed that they do notwant to exceed. To set the SpeedWarning press the thumbwheel whenSpeed Warning is displayed. Use thethumbwheel to adjust the value andpress to set the speed.

Once the speed is set, this feature canbe turned off by pressing thethumbwheel while viewing this page.If the selected speed limit is exceeded,a pop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Software Information : Displays opensource software information.



Instrument Cluster (Uplevel)

Tour Mode Shown, Other Modes Similar

1. Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119

2. Fuel Gauge 0 1023. Speedometer 0 1014. Tachometer 0 102

Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display area inthe center of the instrument cluster.

Use the right steering wheel control toopen and scroll through the differentitems and displays.

Press S or T to access the clusterapplications. Use the thumbwheel toscroll y or z through the list ofavailable features. Press thethumbwheel to select. Not allapplications will be available on allvehicles.. Info Tiles Selection/Trip Computer/Maintenance/Driver Assistance: Theselected Driver Information Center(DIC) displays can be viewed. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

. Performance (If Equipped)


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 99. Audio. Phone. Navigation. Options. Simplify

Performance

If equipped, press the thumbwheel toenter the Performance menu. Scrollthrough the available items.

Friction Bubble : A four quadrantvisual display, indicative of the fourcorners of the car, with a “bubble”showing where the most inertia isbeing exerted on the vehicle.

Performance Timer : Press thethumbwheel to enter the setup menu.Use the thumbwheel to scroll to selectthe desired speed segment, then pressthe thumbwheel to enter thesubmenu. Use the thumbwheel toconfirm the speed segment selectionor to reset the best time for thatsegment. On the next acceleration, theperformance timer will record thetime. Pressing the thumbwheel whilethe timer is running will cancel thetimer if done before reaching the endof the segment.

Lap Timer (without PDR) : Press thethumbwheel when Lap Timer isdisplayed to start, stop, or reset thelap timer. Press the thumbwheel whilethe Lap Timer page is active to startthe timer. If the lap timer is active,pressing the thumbwheel will stop thecurrent lap timer and start a new lap.Pressing the thumbwheel within10 seconds after completing the lastlap (Stop Lap Timer option isdisplayed), the Lap Timer will stop.Press the thumbwheel after the laptimer is stopped to reset the timer,or to view the lap history. A maximumof 16 laps can be stored.

Lap Timer (with PDR) : The laptimes recorded with the PDR systemwill automatically be displayed in thiswindow. This only happens if a trackhas been selected in the PDR systemand a video recording is started. SeePerformance Data Recorder (PDR)0 177.

Launch Control : If equipped, theLaunch Control display allows thedriver to adjust the parameters of the

Launch Control System. See TrackEvents and Competitive Driving (V-Seriesand V-Series Blackwing) 0 220.

Audio

Browse for music, select fromfavorites, or change the audio source.Use the thumbwheel to change thestation or go to the next or previoustrack.

Phone

View recent calls or scroll throughcontacts when you are not on anactive call. Mute the phone or switchto handset operation if you are on anactive call.

Navigation

If there is an active route, press thethumbwheel to cancel or resume routeguidance, or turn the voice promptson or off.

Options

Use the thumbwheel to scroll throughitems in the Options menu.



Display Theme

Press the thumbwheel to enter theDisplay menu. There are fourinstrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from. Sport,Tour, Stealth, and Track (if equipped).The style of the cluster will changedepending on the theme selected.

Default is linked to Driver Mode.Other display themes can be set.

If in My Mode then those displaysplus HUD (if equipped) can be set. MyMode is only selectable when in Linkto Driver mode.

Stealth Mode is enabled when theInstrument Panel Illumination Controlis set to the minimum level. SeeInstrument Panel Illumination Control0 139.. Sport: Displays CoolantTemperature, Fuel Gauge, FuelRange, Compass, Drive ModeIndicator, Odometer, Speed,Tachometer, ElectronicTransmission Range, Current Gear,Speed Limit, Info Area, andInteraction Area, and Cruise Control(if engaged).

. Tour: Displays Fuel Gauge, FuelRange, Compass, Drive ModeIndicator, Odometer, Speed,Tachometer, ElectronicTransmission Range, Current Gear,Peak Performance, Speed Limit, InfoArea, and Interaction Area, andCruise Control (if engaged).

. Stealth: Displays Fuel Gauge, DigitalSpeed, and Tachometer.

. Track: If equipped, displays CoolantTemperature, Fuel Gauge, DriveMode Indicator, Speed, Tachometer,Electronic Transmission Range,Current Gear, Info Area, andInteractive Area.

Preset info tiles shown on each layout:

Sport : Time and Temperature, OilTemperature, Tire Status, Oil Pressure

Track : Oil Pressure, TransmissionFluid Temperature, Tire Status, OilTemperature

Tour : Time and Temperature

Stealth : None

Speed Warning

The Speed Warning display allows thedriver to set a speed that they do notwant to exceed. To set the SpeedWarning, press the thumbwheel whenSpeed Warning is displayed, or pressthe thumbwheel on the main view toset the speed value. Scroll to adjustthe value. Press the thumbwheel to setthe speed. Once the speed is set, thisfeature can be turned off by pressingthe thumbwheel while viewing thispage. If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed with a chime.

Speed Sign

Shows sign information, which comesfrom a roadway database in theonboard navigation, if equipped.

Units

Press the thumbwheel while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose US or metric units by pressingthe thumbwheel while the desireditem is highlighted. A selected markwill be displayed next to theselected item.



Tachometer

If equipped, the Tachometer allowsthe driver to choose between thetraditional tachometer (linear gauge)or the numerical tachometer (shiftlights with numerical TachometerRPM) when Track theme is selected.

Tire Pressure

If the tire pressure readings need to berecalibrated at any time, this optioninitiates the Tire Pressure Relearnfunction. The selection of relearnopens a pop-up when the thumbwheelis pressed for five seconds.

Head-Up Display (HUD) Rotation

Press the thumbwheel while AdjustRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Scroll to adjust the angle of theHUD display. Press the thumbwheel toconfirm and save the setting. SeeHead-Up Display (HUD) 0 122.

Traction & Stability

Displays the status of the Traction(TSC) and Stability (ESC) controlsystems. To turn the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on or off, chooseTraction. If equipped, to turn

StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on or off, choose Stability. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 257.

Update Fuel Range

Allows you to manually update thefuel range value shown next to thefuel gauge.

Software Licenses

Press the thumbwheel while SoftwareLicenses is highlighted to display opensource software information.

Reset To Defaults

Allows the driver to reset to defaultsettings.

Simplify

Press the thumbwheel to enter theSimplify menu. Simplify Mode allowscertain features of the instrumentcluster to be hidden. These featuresinclude info tiles and interactive areas.

Using the thumbwheel S or T, exceptto acknowledge an alert, will exitSimplify Mode.

The selected features will stay hiddeneven after starting and restarting thevehicle, unless Simplify Mode ismanually canceled.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle'sspeed in either kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven since the tripodometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.



TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

For vehicles with the Stop/Startsystem, when the ignition is on, thetachometer indicates the vehiclestatus. When pointing to AUTO STOP(Base Level) or the cluster displaysAUTO STOP text (Uplevel), the engineis off but the vehicle is on and canmove. The engine could auto start atany time. When the indicator pointsto OFF, the vehicle is off.

The tachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm, during Auto Stop mode,when the engine is shutting off andrestarting.

Uplevel

The redline of the tachometer adjustsdynamically based on enginetemperature. The redline displays alower indication when the vehiclesodometer value is less than805 kilometers (500 miles).

If equipped, the shift indicators aredisplayed on instrument cluster andHead-Up Display (HUD). The shiftindicators are only operational whenthe automatic transmission is inManual mode, or the vehicle has amanual transmission. See ManualMode 0 250. When the vehicle engineis less than 70° (158 F) and thevehicle odometer value is less than805 kilometers (500 miles) the shiftindications are not displayed.

A strong visual indicator is displayedas the vehicle approaches the red line.Tour and Sport themes feature shiftrings while the Track theme featuresshift lights accompanied by anumerical tachometer display.

Fuel Gauge

Base Level

Uplevel Sport Mode Shown, OtherModes Similar

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates the approximateamount of fuel left in the tank.



There is an arrow near the fuel gaugepointing to the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe refueled soon.

The fuel gauge may:. Take a little more, or less fuel to fillup than it indicates. For example,the gauge may have indicated thetank is half full, but it actually takesa little more, or less than half thetank's capacity to fill the tank.

. Move a little while turning a corner,speeding up, or braking.

. Take a few seconds to stabilize afterthe ignition is turned on and goesback to empty when the ignition isturned off.

These are normal conditions, none ofwhich indicate a problem with the fuelgauge.

Fuel Range

The uplevel instrument cluster has aestimated fuel range located at thebottom center of the display. The fuel

range is displayed with theapproximate distance the vehicle canbe driven without refueling. The fuelrange estimate is based on an averageof the vehicle’s fuel economy overrecent driving history and the amountof fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

When the estimated fuel range is low,the range shows LOW and a messagemay also display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge (BaseLevel)

Metric

English

This gauge measures the temperatureof the vehicle's engine.

While driving under normal operatingconditions, if the red LED isilluminated, the engine is too hot. Pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge(Uplevel)

Sport Mode Shown, Track ModeSimilar

This gauge shows the engine coolanttemperature.

If the gauge pointer moves into thered zone, the engine is too hot.

This reading indicates the same thingas the warning light. It means that theengine coolant has overheated. If thevehicle has been operating undernormal driving conditions, pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn off theengine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating 0 347 for moreinformation.

Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind the driver to fasten theirseat belt.

Then the light stays on solid until thebelt is buckled. This cycle maycontinue several times if the driverremains or becomes unbuckled whilethe vehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Front Passenger Seat BeltReminder Light

The vehicle may have a frontpassenger seat belt reminder lightnear the passenger airbag statusindicator. See Passenger SensingSystem 0 61.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind passengers to fasten theirseat belt.

Then the light stays on solid until thebelt is buckled. This cycle continuesseveral times if the front passengerremains or becomes unbuckled whilethe vehicle is moving.

If the front passenger seat belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger seat belt reminderlight and chime may come on if anobject is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device. Toturn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the seat belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. It is located in the instrumentcluster. The system check includes theairbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners, theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System 0 55.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when the vehicle isstarted. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed immediately.

{ WarningIf the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags in thevehicle might not inflate in a crash,or they could even inflate without acrash. To help avoid injury, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing System0 61 for important safety information.The overhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF, and the symbols foron and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will lighteither ON or OFF, and either thesymbol for on or off, to let you knowthe status of the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag.

If the word ON, and the on symbol, islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF, and the off symbol, islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the passengersensing system has turned off thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.



If, after several seconds, all of thesymbols remain lit, or if no symbolsare lit, or if the airbag readiness lightis on, there may be a problem withthe lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer for serviceright away.

{ WarningIf the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 105 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be a problemwith the electrical charging system.Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays a message.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner. Find a safe place tostop the vehicle.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-board diagnosticsystem. If this light is on while theengine is running, a malfunction hasbeen detected and the vehicle may

require service. The light should comeon to show that it is working whenthe ignition is in Service Mode. SeeIgnition Positions 0 238.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly when itcomes on may prevent damage.

CautionIf the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may not runsmoothly. This could lead to costlyrepairs that might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.



CautionModifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do not meetthe original tire specifications, cancause this light to come on. Thiscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also affect the vehicle’sability to pass an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 328.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon aspossible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicle offand wait at least 10 seconds beforerestarting the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previousguidelines and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:. If fuel has been added to the vehicleusing the capless fuel funneladapter, make sure that it has beenremoved. See “Filling the Tank witha Portable Gas Can” under Filling theTank 0 317. The diagnostic systemcan detect if the adapter has beenleft installed in the vehicle, allowingfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe adapter removed may turn offthe light.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmed up.If this occurs, change the fuel

brand. It may require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off. See Recommended Fuel(LSY 2.0L L4 Engine) 0 316 orRecommended Fuel (LGY 3.0L V6 andLT4 6.2L V8 Engines) 0 316.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, the testequipment will likely connect to thevehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.Connecting devices that are not usedto perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service the



vehicle may affect vehicle operation.See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 326.See your dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The light is on when the engine isrunning.

. The light does not come on whenthe ignition is in Service Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen if the12-volt battery has recently beenreplaced or run down, or if thevehicle has been recently serviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle will notpass or cannot be made ready forthe test.

Brake System WarningLight

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the vehicle is turned on. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

If the light comes on and stays on atstart up, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedright away.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The brake system has electric brakeboost. Vehicle speed may be limitedwhen the brake system warning lightcomes on. The brake pedal might beharder to push, or the brake pedalmay go closer to the floor. It could

take longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing the Vehicle 0 396.

{ WarningThe brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the light isstill on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is a



problem with the Electric ParkingBrake system. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

This light may come on briefly whenthe vehicle is turned on. If it does notcome on, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.

If this light stays on or comes onwhile driving, there is a problem withthe Electric Parking Brake (EPB). Takethe vehicle to a dealer as soon aspossible. In addition to the parkingbrake, other safety functions thatutilize the EPB may also be degraded.

A message may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 255.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light should come onbriefly when the vehicle is turned on.If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,safely stop as soon as it is possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then turn onthe vehicle again to reset the system.

If the ABS warning light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light stays on.

If the ABS warning light is the onlylight on, the vehicle has regularbrakes, but ABS is not functioning.

If both the ABS warning light and thebrake system warning light are on,ABS is not functioning and there is aproblem with the regular brakes. Seeyour dealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light 0 108.

Performance Shifting Light

If equipped, this light may displaygreen when Sport Mode is activatedand certain driving conditions aremet. Sport Mode detects when thevehicle is being driven in acompetitive manner, and adjusts theshifting of the gears accordingly. SeeDriver Mode Control 0 259.



Automatic Vehicle Hold(AVH) Light

This light comes on when AVH isactively holding the vehicle. SeeAutomatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) 0 257.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

Base Level Uplevel

If equipped, this light is white if LKAis turned on, but not ready to assist.This light is green if LKA is turned onand is ready to assist.

LKA may assist by gently turning thesteering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane marking.The LKA light is amber whenassisting.

This light flashes amber as a LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) alert, toindicate that the lane marking hasbeen unintentionally crossed. If thesystem detects that the vehicle hasbeen steered intentionally across alane marker, the LDW may not begiven. Do not expect the LDW tooccur when intentionally crossing thelane marker.

LKA will not assist or alert if the turnsignal is active in the direction of lanedeparture, or if LKA detects that youare accelerating, braking, or activelysteering.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 312.

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) DisabledLight

This indicator will display whenAutomatic Emergency Braking orFront Pedestrian Braking has beenturned off or is currently unavailabledue to malfunction.

See Automatic Emergency Braking(AEB) 0 306.

See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System 0 308.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator



If equipped, this indicator will displaygreen when a vehicle is detectedahead and amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 304.

Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will displayamber when a nearby pedestrian isdetected in front of the vehicle.


Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off. If StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) isturned off, TCS is also turned off. Toturn TCS and ESC off and on, seeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 257.

If TCS is off, wheel spin is not limitedunless necessary to help protect thedriveline from damage. Adjust drivingaccordingly.

StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on. If the light doesnot come on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer. If the system isworking normally, the indicator lightthen turns off.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is turned off.If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off. Toturn ESC off and on, see TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 257.

If ESC and TCS are off, the systems donot assist in controlling the vehicle.Adjust driving accordingly.



Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when thevehicle is turned on.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system are not fully operationaland may not assist in maintainingcontrol. Adjust driving accordingly.If the condition persists, see yourdealer as soon as possible. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagemay display.

The light flashes when the TCS and/orthe StabiliTrak/ESC system is activelyworking.

See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 257.

Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light

On some vehicles this light comes onbriefly while starting the vehicle. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced bythe dealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light goes off.For vehicles with the reconfigurablecluster, this light may not come onwhen starting the vehicle.

CautionThe engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Driving withthis light on can damage the engineand it may not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating 0 347.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating 0 347.

Driver Mode Control Light

This light comes on when Sport Modeis selected.

This light comes on when Snow/IceMode is selected.



This light comes on when Track Modeis selected. See Driver Mode Control0 259.

This light comes on when V Mode isselected. See Driver Mode Control0 259.

This light comes on when My Mode isselected. See Driver Mode Control0 259.

Performance TractionManagement Light

If equipped, when PerformanceTraction Management (PTM) isactivated, one of the following lightsdisplay to show the current PTMmode. See Competitive Driving Mode0 265.

This light comes on when Wet Modeis selected.

This light comes on when Dry Mode isselected.

This light comes on when Sport Modeis selected.

This light comes on when Race 1Mode is selected.

This light comes on when Race 2Mode is selected.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the vehicle isstarted. It provides information abouttire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of thetires are significantly underinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC) tirepressure message may also display.Stop as soon as possible, and inflatethe tires to the pressure value shownon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure 0 374.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If the

problem is not corrected, the light willcome on at every ignition cycle. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 377.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

CautionLack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Check theoil level as soon as possible. Add oilif required, but if the oil level iswithin the operating range and theoil pressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle couldbe low on oil and might have someother system problem. See your dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

A Low Fuel Warning Light near thefuel gauge comes on briefly when theignition is turned on as a check toshow it is working.

It also comes on when the fuel gaugeindicator nears empty. The light turnsoff when fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If the systemis working normally, the indicatorlight turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 25.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer0 137.

IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 135.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when the exteriorlamps are in use, except when onlythe Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 135.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is white whenthe cruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise control isset and active.

See Cruise Control 0 267.

Adaptive Cruise Control Light

Base Level Uplevel

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is onand ready, and turns green when theACC is set and active.



Curve Speed Control Light

If equipped, this light may illuminategreen when ACC is actively controllingthe vehicle speed and detects a sharpcurve on the road ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown while navigating the curve andmay increase speed out of the curve,but will not exceed the set speed.

See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced)0 270.

Super Cruise Light

This light comes on to show thestatus of Super Cruise. See SuperCruise 0 279.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base Level)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows the statusof many vehicle systems.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

y or z : Use the thumbwheel toscroll to the previous or nextselection.

V : Press the thumbwheel to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.



Info Page Options

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press T to scroll to the Optionsmenu. Use the thumbwheel toscroll to Info Pages and press thethumbwheel to select.

2. Scroll y or z to move throughthe list of possible info displays.

3. Press the thumbwheel while anitem is highlighted to select ordeselect that item.

The info pages can also be turned onor off through the DIC Info PageOptions.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of all possibleDIC information displays. Some of theinformation displays may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.

While in the Info Page Options menu,the info pages can be restored to thedefault factory settings by pressingand holdingR on the left steering

wheel controls and the thumbwheelon the right steering wheel controls atthe same time.

Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph).

Trip 1 or Trip 2 and Average FuelEconomy : The Trip display shows thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset. Thetrip odometer can be reset by pressingV and selecting yes or no while thisdisplay is active.

Average Fuel Economy shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The Average Fuel Economycan be reset by pressing V andselecting yes or no while this displayis active.

Fuel Range : Shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. LOW will bedisplayed when the vehicle is low onfuel. The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low, theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. The oilshould be changed as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil 0 336. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 411.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will not resetitself. Do not reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.



It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 338.

Air Filter Life : If equipped, Shows anestimate of the engine air filter’sremaining useful life and the state ofthe system. Engine Air Filter Life 95%means 95% of the current air filter liferemains. Messages will display basedon the engine air filter life and thestate of the system. When theREPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGEmessage displays, the engine air filtershould be replaced at the time of thenext oil change. When the REPLACESOON message displays, the engine airfilter should be replaced at the earliestconvenience.

The Air Filter Life display must bereset after the engine air filterreplacement. To reset, see Engine AirFilter Life System 0 340.

Brake Pad Life : If equipped, Thisdisplays an estimate of the remaininglife of the front and rear brake pads.Messages will display based on brakepad wear and the state of the system.

Reset the Brake Pad Life display afterreplacing the brake pads. See BrakePad Life System (If Equipped) 0 351.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all four tires.Tire pressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds persquare inch (psi). If the pressure islow, the value for that tire is shown inamber. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 376 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 377.

Fuel Economy : Displays average fueleconomy, the best fuel economy overthe selected distance, and a bar graphshowing instantaneous fuel economy.

Average Speed : Displays the averagevehicle speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average is basedon the various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset. Reset the averagespeed by pressing the thumbwheelwhile this display is active to show aconfirmation window to select yesor no.

Timer : This display can be used as atimer. To start the timer, press thethumbwheel while this display is

active. The display will show theamount of time that has passed sincethe timer was last reset. To stop thetimer, press the thumbwheel brieflywhile this display is active and thetimer is running.

Press the thumbwheel while thisdisplay is active to reset the timer.

Follow Distance/Gap Setting : WhenAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is notengaged, the current follow time tothe vehicle ahead is displayed as atime value on this page. When ACChas been engaged, the displayswitches to the gap setting page. Thispage shows the current gap settingalong with the vehicle ahead telltale.

Driver Assistance : If equipped,shows information for Lane KeepAssist (LKA) and Forward CollisionAlert (FCA).

Battery Voltage : Shows the currentbattery voltage.

Coolant Temperature : Shows theengine coolant temperature in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).



Oil Temperature : Shows the engineoil temperature in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Engine Hours (Hourmeter) : Showsthe total number of hours the enginehas run. The display also shows theengine idle hours.

Engine Boost : Displays enginemanifold pressure relative to ambientair pressure. It will display boostpressure generated by theturbocharging system.

Transmission Fluid Temperature :If equipped, Shows the temperature ofthe transmission fluid in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Info Page Options : Scroll to choosewhich info pages appear on the DIC.Press the thumbwheel to select ordeselect.

Blank Page : Allows for noinformation to be displayed in thecluster info display areas.

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Uplevel)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows the statusof many vehicle systems.

DIC information is broken down intotwo main zones:

Zone 1 : Displays on the instrumentcluster to the left of the speedometer.

Zone 2 : Displays on the instrumentcluster to the right of thespeedometer.

S or T : Press to move left or rightbetween the interactive display zonesin the cluster. Press the thumbwheelto select.

y or z : Use the thumbwheel toscroll up or down in a list. Press thethumbwheel to select.

DIC Info Tiles Selection

The following is the list of all possibleDIC Info Tiles. Depending on thevehicle, some may not be available.

Zone 1

Battery Voltage : Displays the currentbattery voltage. The battery voltagecan fluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal.

Coolant Temperature : Displays thecoolant temperature in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Engine Boost : If equipped, displaysengine manifold pressure relative toambient air pressure. It will displayboost pressure generated by theturbocharging system.



Instantaneous Fuel Economy/Economy Trend : Displays the currentfuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number reflectsonly the approximate fuel economyand changes frequently as drivingconditions change. This displaycannot be reset.

When in tour mode, shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 100 km (62 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. When driving, the bars shiftto reflect the most recent distance onthe right side.

Oil Pressure : Shows the current oilpressure in either kilopascal (kPa) orin pounds per square inch (psi).

Oil Temperature : Shows the currentoil temperature in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Time & Temperature : Displays thecurrent time and the current outsideair temperature.

Tire Status : Shows individual tirepressures and overall temperature aseither Cold, Cool, Normal, Warm,

or Hot. Normal is typical for normaldriving while Warm is typical foraggressive driving. Unknown displayswhen tire temperature information isunavailable.

Transmission Fluid Temperature :If equipped, shows the temperature ofthe transmission fluid in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Lateral G-Force : If equipped,displays inertial forces being exertedon the vehicle in the lateral(side-to-side) direction as numericalvalue and as graphical depiction.

eLSD : Displays the amount of reardifferential coupling when theElectronic Limited-Slip Differential(eLSD) is active and functioningduring vehicle operation. A reading of1% is an open differential and 100% islocked. It is normal for the value tomake small or large changes due todriving conditions and driver inputs.For the V-Blackwing models, the eLSDmaintains some coupling even if thevehicle is stationary or not

accelerating. Coupling values of 3%and up are typical. See Limited-SlipDifferential 0 267.

Zone 2

Trip 1 or 2/Average Speed/AverageFuel Economy : Trip displays thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset. Thetrip odometer can be reset by pressingand holding the thumbwheel whilethis display is active.

Average Speed displays the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. Theaverage speed can be reset by pressingand holding the thumbwheel whilethis display is active.

Average Fuel Economy displays theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only the current,



approximate average fuel economyand changes as driving conditionschange. The Average Fuel Economycan be reset by pressing and holdingthe thumbwheel while this display isactive.

Fuel Economy : Displays the averagefuel economy, the best fuel economyover the selected distance, and a bargraph showing instantaneous fueleconomy. Pressing the thumbwheelopens a menu to change the selecteddistance or reset the current values.

Trip Timer/Fuel Used : This displaycan be used as a timer. To start/stopthe timer, press the thumbwheel whilethis display is active and then selectthe start/stop the timer. The displayshows the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was last reset.To reset the timer to zero, press thethumbwheel to access the menu whilethis display is active.

Fuel Used displays the approximateliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel thathave been used since last reset. Thefuel used can be reset by pressing thethumbwheel and selecting Reset FuelUsed in the menu.

Current Drive Cycle : Displaysinformation in relation to the currentdrive cycle including DistanceTraveled, Average Fuel Economy, andthe Total Time. They will reset afterthe drive cycle is completed.

Driver Assistance : If equipped,displays the status of all active safetysystems.

Oil Life : Displays an estimate of theremaining useful oil life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low, theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears on the display. The oil shouldbe changed as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil 0 336. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 411.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will not resetitself. Do not reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.

It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 338.

Air Filter Life : If equipped, shows anestimate of the engine air filter’sremaining useful life and the state ofthe system. Engine Air Filter Life 95%means 95% of the current air filter liferemains. Messages are displayed basedon the engine air filter life and thestate of the system. When theREPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGEmessage displays, the engine air filtershould be replaced at the time of thenext oil change. When the REPLACENOW message displays, the engine airfilter should be replaced as soon aspossible.

Engine Hours : Displays the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.The display also shows the engine idlehours.

Lifetime Revs : The display showstotal engine revolutions divided by10,000.

Brake Pad Life : If equipped, thisdisplays an estimate of the remaininglife of the front and rear brake pads.Messages are displayed based on



brake pad wear and the state of thesystem. Reset the Brake Pad Lifedisplay after replacing the brake pads.See Brake Pad Life System (If Equipped)0 351.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ WarningIf the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning the operationof the vehicle is projected onto thewindshield. The information isprojected through the HUD lens onthe driver side of the instrumentpanel and focused out toward thefront of the vehicle.

CautionIf you try to use the HUD image asa parking aid, you may misjudgethe distance and damage yourvehicle. Do not use the HUD imageas a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages insome vehicles. The speedometerreading and other numerical valuescan be displayed in either English ormetric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed through theinstrument cluster. See Settings 0 189and “Options” under Instrument Cluster(Base Level) 0 96 orInstrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 98.

HUD Display on the Windshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts:. Speed. Audio. Phone. Navigation. Performance. Driver Assistance Features. Vehicle Messages

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may be clearedby using the steering wheel controls.See Vehicle Messages 0 125.



The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

$ : Press or lift to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

! : Press to select the display view.Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press and hold to dim thedisplay. Continue to hold to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUD brightnesscontrol can also be adjusted asneeded.

The HUD image can temporarily lightup depending on the angle andposition of sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could make theHUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

Press the thumbwheel while AdjustRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Scroll to adjust the angle of theHUD display. Press the thumbwheel toconfirm and save the setting. Thisfeature may only be available inP (Park). See Instrument Cluster (BaseLevel) 0 96 orInstrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 98.

HUD Views

There are three views in the HUD.Track mode is available for V-Seriesonly. Some vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts may bedisplayed in any view.

Metric

English

Speed View : This displays digitalspeed in English or metric units,speed limit, vehicle ahead indicator,Lane Departure Warning/Lane KeepAssist, and Adaptive Cruise Control



and set speed. Some information onlyappears on vehicles that have thesefeatures, and when they are active.

Metric

English

Performance View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview along with rpm reading, vehicleahead indicator, Lane DepartureWarning/Lane Keep Assist, andAdaptive Cruise Control and set speed.

Metric

English

Track View : If equipped, thisdisplays digital speed, transmissionpositions, Shift Timing Light Position,gear shift indicator,

The shift timing lights at the top ofthe display will appear with increasesin engine rpm. The rows of lights getcloser together as the shift point getscloser. Shift the transmission beforethe lights come together in thedisplay. Shift immediately if the lightsare flashing. See Manual Mode 0 250.

Temporary Overlays

Infotainment: Audio, Phone, andNavigation are temporary overlayslinked to cluster layouts.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone Overlay : This displaysdigital speed for Tour/ Sport, currentgear for Track, indicators from speedview along with audio/phoneinformation, vehicle ahead indicator,Lane Departure Warning/Lane KeepAssist, and Adaptive Cruise Control



and set speed. The current radiostation, media type, and incomingcalls will be displayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the driveruses the steering wheel controls toadjust the audio settings appearing inthe instrument cluster.

Incoming phone calls appearing in theinstrument cluster, may also displayin any HUD view.

Metric

English

Navigation Overlay : This displaysdigital speed for Tour/ Sport, currentgear for Track, indicators from speedview along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information in somevehicles, vehicle ahead indicator, LaneDeparture Warning/Lane Keep Assist,and Adaptive Cruise Control and setspeed. The compass heading isdisplayed when navigation routing isnot active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity of theHUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe thelens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

If you cannot see the HUD imagewhen the ignition is on, check that:. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.

. The HUD brightness setting is nottoo dim or too bright.

. The HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarized sunglasses are not worn.

. The windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield needsreplacing, see Windshield Replacement0 355.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) indicate thestatus of the vehicle or some actionthat may be needed to correct acondition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared by pressingthe thumbwheel. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action is performed.



All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the message doesnot correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears, seeyour dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:. Service Messages. Fluid Levels. Vehicle Security. Brakes. Steering. Ride Control Systems. Driver Assistance Systems. Cruise Control. Lighting and Bulb Replacement. Wiper/Washer Systems. Doors and Windows. Seat Belts. Airbag Systems. Engine and Transmission. Tire Pressure. Battery

Engine Power Messages

REDUCED ACCELERATION DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power is reduced.A reduction in propulsion power canaffect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on, butthere is no observed reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. Under certain conditionsthe performance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven while thismessage is on, but maximumacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this message stayson, or displays repeatedly, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Under certain operating conditions,propulsion will be disabled. Tryrestarting after the ignition has beenoff for two minutes.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TO XXXKM/H (MPH)

This message shows that the vehiclespeed has been limited to the speeddisplayed. The limited speed is aprotection for various propulsion andvehicle systems, such as lubrication,thermal, brakes, suspension, TeenDriver if equipped, or tires.

Vehicle PersonalizationThe following are all possible vehiclepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

For System, Apps, and Personalfeatures and functions, see Settings0 189.

To access the vehiclepersonalization menu:

1. Touch the Settings icon on theHome Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

2. Touch Vehicle to display a list ofavailable options.



3. Touch to select the desired featuresetting.

4. Touch9 or R to turn a feature offor on.

5. Touch z to go to the top level ofthe Settings menu.

The menu may contain the following:

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and a messagewhen the rear door has been openedbefore or during operation of thevehicle.

Touch Off or On.

Buckle to Drive

This feature can prevent shifting outof Park when the driver, and ifapplicable the front passenger, seatbelt is not buckled. See Buckle To Drive0 48.

Touch Off or On.

The vehicle may need to be restartedto activate this feature.

Driver Mode Customization

Touch and the following may display:

. My Mode

. V-Mode

. Visualization

My Mode

Touch and the following may display:. Engine Sound. Steering. Suspension. Brake Feel

For information on the range ofsettings, see “Driver ModeCustomization” in Driver Mode Control0 259.

V-Mode

Touch and the following may display:. Engine Sound. Steering. Suspension. Brake Feel. Powertrain

For information on the range ofsettings, see “Driver ModeCustomization” in Driver Mode Control0 259.

Visualization

This setting shows handling andperformance settings on theinfotainment display when changingdrive modes.

Touch Off or On.

Climate and Air Quality

Touch and the following may display:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Quality Sensor. Auto Cooled Seats. Auto Heated Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog. Ionizer

Auto Fan Speed

This setting specifies the amount ofairflow when the climate control fansetting is Auto Fan.

Touch Low, Medium, or High.

Air Quality Sensor

This setting switches the system intoRecirculation Mode based on thequality of the outside air.



Touch Off, Low Sensitivity, or HighSensitivity.

Auto Cooled Seats

This setting automatically turns onand regulates the ventilated seatswhen the cabin temperature is warm.See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 43.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Heated Seats

This setting automatically turns onand regulates the heated seats whenthe cabin temperature is cool. Theauto heated seats can be turned off byusing the heated seat buttons on thecenter stack. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats 0 43.

If equipped with auto heated steeringwheel, this feature will turn on whenthe auto heated seats turn on.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Defog

This setting automatically turns thefront defogger on when the engine isstarted.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

This setting automatically turns therear defogger on when the engine isstarted.

Touch Off or On.

Ionizer

If equipped and on, this feature helpsclean the air inside the vehicle andremove contaminants such as pollen,odors, and dust. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System 0 209.

Touch Off or On.

Collision / Detection Systems

Touch and the following may display:. Alert Type. Forward Collision System. Front Pedestrian Detection. Lane Change Alert. Seat Belt Tightening. Rear Cross Traffic Alert. Rear Pedestrian Detection. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier. Super Cruise Lane Change

Alert Type

This setting specifies the type ofvehicle feedback provided, either abeep or seat vibration, when you arein danger of colliding with an object.

Touch Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This setting can alert of a potentialcrash with a detected vehicle aheadand can apply brakes to help reduce acollision’s severity.

Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Front Pedestrian Detection

This feature may help avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-end crasheswith nearby pedestrians.



Lane Change Alert

This setting specifies if an alert willdisplay on the outside mirror to helpyou avoid crashing into a vehicle inyour blind spot, or rapidly



approaching your blind spot, during alane change maneuver. See LaneChange Alert (LCA) 0 310.

Touch Off or On.

Seat Belt Tightening

This setting automatically adjustsyour seat belts to a snug fit whenbuckled. The seat belts tighten whenyou first buckle up and during roughdriving or road conditions.

Touch Off or On.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This setting specifies if an alert willdisplay when the vehicle detectsapproaching rear cross traffic when inR (Reverse). See Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA) System 0 304.

Touch Off or On.

Rear Pedestrian Detection

This setting specifies if alerts willdisplay when the vehicle detectspedestrians behind when inR (Reverse). See Rear Pedestrian Alert0 303.


Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This setting determines if an alert willappear when Adaptive Cruise Controlbrings the vehicle to a complete stopand the vehicle ahead of you startsmoving again. See Adaptive CruiseControl (Advanced) 0 270.

Touch Off or On.

Super Cruise Lane Change

When on, the vehicle can changelanes while Super Cruise is active. Thevehicle will only steer to change laneswhen traffic allows .

Touch Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience

Touch and the following may display:. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Remote Mirror Folding. Rain Sense Wipers. Hands Free Liftgate/Trunk Control

Chime Volume

This setting determines the chimevolume level.

Touch the controls on theinfotainment display to adjust thevolume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver, passenger,or both driver and passenger outsidemirrors will tilt downward when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) toimprove visibility of the ground nearthe rear wheels. They may move fromtheir tilted position when the vehicleis shifted out of R (Reverse) or turnedoff. See Reverse Tilt Mirrors 0 28.

Touch Off, On - Driver and Passenger,On - Driver, or On - Passenger.

Remote Mirror Folding

This setting adjusts the outsidemirrors when locking and unlockingthe vehicle. Press Q on the remote keyor lock button on the door handle tofold the mirrors in. Press K on theremote key or unlock button on thedoor handle to unfold the mirrors. SeeFolding Mirrors 0 26.

Touch Off or On.



Rain Sense Wipers

This setting automatically turns onthe wipers when moisture is detectedand the wiper switch is inintermittent mode.

Touch Disabled or Enabled.

Hands Free Liftgate/Trunk Control

The trunk may be operated with akicking motion under the rear bumperat the location of the projected logo.See Trunk 0 18.

Touch Off, or On-Open Only.

Lighting

Touch and the following may display:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This setting flashes the headlamps ofyour vehicle when you press K on theRemote Key.

Touch Off or On.

Exit Lighting

This setting specifies how long theheadlamps stay on after the vehicle isturned off and exited.

Touch Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Touch and the following may display:. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

This setting allows selection of whichdoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Touch Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

This setting delays the locking of thevehicle’s doors.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start

Touch and the following may display:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

. Remote Removed from Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

This setting flashes the exterior lampswhen the vehicle is unlocked with theremote key.

Touch Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This setting specifies how the vehicleresponds when the vehicle is lockedwith the remote key.

Touch Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This setting specifies whether alldoors, or just the driver door, unlockwhen pressing K on the remote key.

Touch All Doors or Driver Door.



Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

This setting automatically turns onthe ventilated seats when using theremote start function on warm days.See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 43 andRemote Vehicle Start 0 13.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

This setting automatically turns onthe heated seats when using theremote start function on cold days.See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 43 andRemote Vehicle Start 0 13.

If equipped with Auto Heated SteeringWheel, this feature will turn on whenthe Remote Start Auto Heated Seatsturn on.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature enablesremote operation of the windows withthe remote key. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 7.

Touch Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This setting specifies which doorsunlock when using the button on thedriver door handle to unlock thevehicle.

Touch All Doors or Driver Door Only.

Passive Door Lock

This setting specifies if the vehicle willautomatically lock, or lock andprovide an alert after all the doors areclosed, and you walk away from thevehicle with the remote key. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7.

Touch Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert when theremote key is left in the vehicle. Thismenu also enables Remote No Longerin Vehicle Alert.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Removed from VehicleAlert

This feature beeps the horn 3 timeswhen exiting a running vehicle withthe remote key.

Touch Off or On.

Seating Position

Touch and the following may display:. Seat Entry Memory. Seat Exit Memory

Seat Entry Memory

This feature automatically recalls thepreviously stored 1 or 2 buttonpositions when the ignition is changedfrom off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.See Memory Seats 0 40.

Touch Off or On.

Seat Exit Memory

This feature automatically recalls thepreviously stored exit button positionswhen the ignition is changed from onor ACC/ACCESSORY to off if the driverdoor is open or opened. See MemorySeats 0 40.

Touch Off or On.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under Settings 0 189.



Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainment systemand steering wheel controls. It mayalso limit access to vehicle storagelocations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Touch Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back to goback to the previous menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 439.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, and homeautomation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop and

reverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming when vehicleownership is terminated. See “ErasingUniversal Remote System Buttons”later in this section.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door opener receiver.Clear all people and objects near thegarage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

Programming involves time-sensitiveactions and may time out, requiringthe procedure to be repeated. Readthese instructions completely beforeprogramming the Universal Remote



system. It may help to have anotherperson assist with the programmingprocess.

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter was suppliedby the manufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. Press and release one of the threeUniversal Remote system buttonsto be programmed. Press and holdthe hand-held transmitter button.Do not release the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from a slowto a rapid flash or continuous light.Then release the hand-heldtransmitter button.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2 withthe procedure under “Radio Signalsfor Some Gate Operators” later inthis section.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garage doormoves when the button ispressed, then programming iscomplete. There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light does notcome on or the garage door doesnot move, a second button pressmay be required. For a secondtime, press and hold the newlyprogrammed button forfive seconds. If the indicatorlight stays on continuously orthe garage door moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete. Thereis no need to completeSteps 4–6.

. If the garage door does notmove, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3, locatethe Learn or Smart button insidegarage on the garage door openerreceiver. The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmlypress and hold the trainedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds and release. Repeatthe “press/hold/release” sequenceup to three times to complete thetraining process.



The Universal Remote system shouldnow activate the garage door. Repeatthe process for programming theremaining two buttons.

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S., Canada, or PuertoRico, international rates will apply andmay differ based on landline or mobilephone.

Radio Signals for Some GateOperators

Some gate operators andradio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds of transmission.This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the Universal Remotesystem button while pressing andreleasing the hand-held transmitterbutton every two seconds until the

signal has been successfully acceptedby the Universal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenchange to a rapid flash or continuoussolid-light. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button for atleast one-half second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote System Button

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceed withStep 1 under “Programming theUniversal Remote System.”


LIGHTING 135

LightingExterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . 135Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 137Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Automatic Headlamp System . . . 137Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . 138Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Battery Load Management . . . . . . 141Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . 141Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns the exterior lamps off anddeactivates the AUTO mode. Turn toO again to reactivate the AUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

IntelliBeam System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps on andoff according to surrounding trafficconditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enoughand there is no other traffic present.

This lightb comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.


136 LIGHTING

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,pressb on the turn signal leverwhen it is dark outside and theexterior lamp control is in AUTOor2.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

The blue high-beam on light appearson the instrument cluster when thehigh beams are on.

There is a sensor near the top centerof the windshield that automaticallycontrols the system. Keep this area ofthe windshield clear of debris to allowfor best system performance.

The high-beam headlamps remain on,under the automatic control, until oneof the following situations occurs:. The system detects an approachingvehicle's headlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is bright enoughthat high-beam headlamps are notrequired.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system is disabledby the button on the turnsignal lever. If this happens,pressb on the turn signal leverwhen the exterior lamp control is inthe AUTO or2 position toreactivate the IntelliBeam system.The instrument cluster light willcome on to indicate the IntelliBeamsystem is reactivated.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lamps becauseof any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructed fromview, or otherwise undetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/or roadspray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannot bedetected due to dense exhaust,smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist,or other airborne obstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed by somethingthat blocks the view of the lightsensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such that thefront end points upward, causingthe light sensor to aim high and notdetect headlamps and taillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beam headlampsmay need to be disabled if any of theabove conditions exist.


LIGHTING 137

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition is offand the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger3 : Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you and release, to turn the highbeams on. To return to low beams,push the lever again or pull it towardyou and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull the turnsignal lever toward you, and release.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

If equipped, the DRL will come onwhen all of the following conditionsare met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

The DRL turn off when the headlampsare turned to O or the ignition is off.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL can only be turned off when thevehicle is parked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control is setto AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

If equipped, the light sensor is on topof the instrument panel or on thewindshield near the rearview mirror.Do not cover the sensor, otherwise theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


138 LIGHTING

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If it islight outside when the vehicle leavesthe garage, there is a slight delaybefore the automatic headlampsystem turns off the headlamps.During that delay, the instrumentcluster may not be as bright as usual.Make sure the instrument panelbrightness control is in the full brightposition. See Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 139.

When it is bright enough outside, theheadlamps will turn off.

The automatic headlamp system turnsoff when the exterior lamp control isturned to O or the ignition is off. Forvehicles sold in Canada, this controlonly works when the transmission isin P (Park).

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers are activatedin daylight with the engine on, andthe exterior lamp control is in AUTO,the headlamps, parking lamps, andother exterior lamps come on. Thetransition time for the lamps coming

on varies based on wiper speed. Whenthe wipers are not operating, theselamps turn off. Move the exteriorlamp control to O or; to disablethis feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lamps flashon and off. Release the button for atleast one second and press again toturn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up or downto signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, the turnsignal flashes three times.

The turn and lane-change signal canbe turned off manually by moving thelever back to its original position.


LIGHTING 139

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal functionmay be inoperative. This vehicle maybe equipped with LED lighting. Forreplacement of any LED lighting,contact your dealer.

Cornering LampsIf equipped with cornering lamps, theyautomatically come on when all of thefollowing occur:. The low-beam headlamps are on.. The turn signals are activated or thesteering wheel is at a turning angle.

. The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h(25 mph) .

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature adjusts the brightness ofall illuminated controls.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.

The thumbwheel is functional atnight, or when the headlamps orparking lamps are ON.

The brightness of the displaysautomatically adjusts based onoutdoor lighting.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come on whenany door is opened, K on the remotekey is pressed, or when the ignition isswitched off. See Dome Lamps 0 139.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theoverhead console.

To operate, press the followingbuttons:

j OFF : Press to turn off the domelamps when any door is opened, K onthe remote key is pressed, or when theignition is switched off. An indicator


140 LIGHTING

light on the button will turn on whenthe dome lamp override is activated.Pressj OFF again to deactivatethis feature and the indicator light willturn off. The dome lamps will comeon when doors are opened, K on theremote key is pressed, or the ignitionis switched off.

+ ON/OFF : Press to turn the domelamps on and off manually.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps on the overhead console andover the rear passenger doors. Theselamps come on when any door isopened, K on the remote key ispressed, or when the vehicle isturned off.

To operate, the vehicle must be on, inAccessory mode, or using RetainedAccessory Power (RAP).

To manually turn the reading lampson or off:

Press the lamp lenses on the frontreading lamps.

Press the lamp lenses over the rearpassenger doors.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe interior lamps turn on whenpressing K on the remote key oropening any doors, and the domelamp control is in the DOOR position.

Some exterior lamps also turn onwhen pressing K on the remote key oropening any doors. Low-Beam lampswill only turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting.

All lamps will gradually fade out afterabout 30 seconds.

Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by closing all doors, pressingQ on the remote key, or starting thevehicle.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” under VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Approach Detection

If equipped, the entry lighting featurewill automatically turn on when theremote key is detected withinapproximately 2 m (6 ft) of the vehicle.


LIGHTING 141

If the vehicle has remained parked foran extended period of time with noremote key use or keyless accessoperation, approach detection will bedisabled. To reactivate, press anybutton on the remote key or open andclose all vehicle doors to re-enable theentry lighting feature on approach.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlamps turn on when the driver door isopened after the ignition is turned off.

The interior lights turn on when theignition is turned off.

The exterior and interior lampsremain on for a set amount of time,then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Battery Load ManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), which estimatesthe battery's temperature and state of

charge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life ofthe battery.

When the battery's state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gauge or a voltage displayon the Driver Information Center(DIC), you may see the voltage moveup or down. This is normal. If there isa problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idleif the electrical loads are very high.This is true for all vehicles. This isbecause the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps,rear window defogger, climate controlfan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce thepower demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in stepsor levels, without being noticeable. Inrare cases at the highest levels ofcorrective action, this action may benoticeable to the driver. If so, a DICmessage might be displayed. If abattery message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent the batteryfrom being drained, if the interiorcourtesy lamps or reading lamps areaccidentally left on. If any of theselamps are left on, they automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the


142 LIGHTING

ignition is off. The lamps will notcome back on again until one of thefollowing occurs:. The ignition is turned on.. The doors are closed and thenre-opened.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition is turnedoff, if the parking lamps or headlampshave been manually left on. Thisprotects against draining the battery.To restart the 10-minute timer, turnthe exterior lamp control to the Oposition and then back to the; or

2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be on orin ACC/ACCESSORY.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 143

Infotainment SystemIntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . 146Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149HD Radio Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Radio Data System (RDS) . . . . . . . . 152Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Audio PlayersAvoiding Untrusted MediaDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

NavigationUsing the Navigation System . . . . 158Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

If the System Needs Service . . . . . 171Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Voice RecognitionVoice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Performance DataRecorder (PDR)Performance DataRecorder (PDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Bluetooth (Pairing and Using aPhone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Apple CarPlay andAndroid Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

SettingsSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

IntroductionRead the following pages to becomefamiliar with the features.

{ WarningTaking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature can causea crash. You or others could beinjured or killed. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving. Limit yourglances at the vehicle displays andfocus your attention on driving. Usevoice commands whenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling some featureswhen driving. These features may grayout when they are unavailable. Manyinfotainment features are alsoavailable through the instrumentcluster and steering wheel controls.


144 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

Before driving:. Become familiar with the operation,center stack controls, steering wheelcontrols, and infotainment display.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting the tone,and adjusting the speakers.

. Set up phone numbers in advanceso they can be called easily bypressing a single control or by usinga single voice command.

See Distracted Driving 0 217.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces engine noisein the vehicle’s interior. ANC requiresthe factory-installed audio system,radio, speakers, amplifier (ifequipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by your dealerif related aftermarket equipment isinstalled.

Overview

Infotainment System

The infotainment system is controlledby using the infotainment display,controls on the center console,steering wheel controls, and voicerecognition.

1. O (Power and Mute) Knob

. When off, press the O knob toturn the system on.

. Turn to decrease or increasethe volume.

. Press and hold to turn thepower off.

. Press to mute/unmute thesystem when on.

. When the power is on and thesystem is not muted, a quickstatus pane will display whenthe knob is pressed. Pressingthe knob will mute the systemand trigger this pane to showa long press is required toactually power down thesystem.

2. V Knob. Turn to highlight a feature.

Press to activate thehighlighted feature.

3. { (Home Page). Press to go to the Home Page.

See “Home Page” later in thissection.

Press to exit Android Auto orApple CarPlay. To enter backinto Android Auto or AppleCarPlay, press and hold. SeeApple CarPlay and AndroidAuto 0 187.



Infotainment Controls on theConsole with Navigation Shown,Radio without Navigation Similar

1. e (Radio/AUX). Press to open the “Now

Playing” screen.2. 7 (Seek)

. Radio: Press and release to goto the previous station orchannel. Press and hold tofast seek the next strongestprevious station or channel.See AM-FM Radio 0 149.

. USB/Bluetooth: Press to seekto the beginning of thecurrent or previous track.Press and hold to quicklyreverse through a track.Release to return to playingspeed. See USB Port 0 154 orBluetooth Audio 0 157.

3. n (Power/Volume) Knob. Press to turn the power on.. Press and hold when the

system is on to turn thepower off and displaythe time.

. Press to mute/unmute thesystem when on.

. Turn to decrease or increasethe volume.

4. 6 (Seek). Radio: Press and release to go

to the next station or channel.Press and hold to fast seekthe next strongest station orchannel.

. USB/Bluetooth: Press to seekthe next track. Press and holdto fast forward through atrack. Release to return to

playing speed. See USB Port0 154 orBluetooth Audio 0 157.

5. l (Navigation) or 6 (Phone). Press l to access the

navigation menu or press 6 toaccess the phone menu.

6. Primary Knob. Turn to highlight a feature.

Press to activate thehighlighted feature.

. If equipped, move right/left orup/down to change thehighlighted area on thedisplay screen.

7. 6 (Phone) or { (Home Page)

. Press 6 to access the phonemenu or press { to accessthe Home Page. See “HomePage” later in this section.

8. 0 (Back). Press to return to the previous

display in a menu.



Home Page

The Home Page is where vehicleapplication icons are accessed. Someapplications are disabled when thevehicle is moving.

Swipe left or right across the displayto access the pages of icons.

Managing Home Page Icons

1. Touch and hold any of the HomePage icons to enter edit mode.

2. Continue holding the icon and dragit to the desired position.

3. Release your finger to drop theicon in the desired position.

4. To move an application to anotherpage, drag the icon to the edge ofthe display toward thedesired page.

5. Continue dragging and droppingapplication icons as desired.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment steering wheelcontrols can be used to control theinfotainment features displayed in theinstrument cluster.

When in Valet Mode, if equipped,access to the infotainment functionsis disabled. See “Valet Mode,” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.

g : Press to answer an incoming callor start voice recognition. SeeBluetooth (Overview) 0 182 orBluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)0 183.

c : Press to decline an incoming callor end a current call. Press to mute orunmute the infotainment systemwhen not on a call.

C or B : Press to go to the next orprevious favorite when listening to theradio. Press to go to the next orprevious track when listening to amedia source.

x + or x – : Press to increase ordecrease the volume.

Using the System

Audio

Touch the Audio icon to display theactive audio source page. Examples ofavailable sources may include AM,FM, SXM (if equipped), MyMedia,USB, and Bluetooth.

Phone

Touch the Phone icon to display thePhone main page. See Bluetooth(Overview) 0 182 orBluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)0 183.

Nav

If equipped, touch the Nav icon todisplay the navigation map. See Usingthe Navigation System 0 158.



Wi-Fi Hotspot

Touch the Wi-Fi Hotspot icon todisplay the Wi-Fi Hotspot information.See Settings 0 189.

Climate

Touch the Climate icon to display theClimate main page. See DualAutomatic Climate Control System0 209.

Users

If equipped, touch the Users icon tosign in or create a new user profile,and follow the on-screen instructions.

Only four user profiles can be active atone time in the vehicle. It may benecessary to remove a profile from themenu before creating or signing intoan existing profile. The removedprofile can be logged into at alater time.

Settings

Touch the Settings icon to display theSettings menu. See Settings 0 189.

Apple CarPlay

Touch the Apple CarPlay icon toactivate Apple CarPlay if equippedafter a supported device is connected.See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto0 187.

Android Auto

Touch the Android Auto icon toactivate Android Auto, if equipped,after a supported device is connected.See Apple CarPlay and Android Auto0 187.

Apps

If equipped, in-vehicle apps areavailable for download. Touch theApps icon on the Home Page to begin.

Downloading and using in-vehicleapps requires Internet connectivitywhich can be accessed with a dataplan through the vehicle’s built-in4G LTE Wi-Fi hotspot, if equipped,or a compatible mobile device hotspot.On most mobile devices, activation ofthe Wi-Fi hotspot is in the device’sSettings menu under Mobile NetworkSharing, Personal Hotspot, MobileHotspot, or similar.

Availability of apps and connectivityvaries by vehicle, conditions, andlocation. Data plan rates apply.Features are subject to change. Formore information, seewww.my.cadillac.com/learn.

OnStar Services

If equipped, touch the OnStar Servicesicon to display the OnStar Servicesand Account pages. See OnStarOverview 0 443.

Shortcut Tray

The shortcut menu is on the left sideof the display. It shows the Homeapplication and four otherapplications.

Infotainment Display Features

Infotainment display features show onthe display when available. When afeature is unavailable, it may gray out.When a feature is touched, it mayhighlight.



Haptic Feedback

If equipped, haptic feedback is a pulsethat occurs when an icon or option istouched on the display or whencontrols below the display are pressed.

Infotainment Gestures

Use the following finger gestures tocontrol the infotainment system.

Touch/Tap

Touch/tap is used to select an icon oroption, activate an application,or change the location inside a map.

Touch and Hold

Touch and hold can be used to startanother gesture, or to move or deletean application.

Drag

Drag is used to move applications onthe Home Page, or to pan the map. Todrag the item, it must be held andmoved along the display to the newlocation. This can be done up, down,

right, or left. This feature is onlyavailable when vehicle is parked andnot in motion.

Nudge

Nudge is used to move items a shortdistance on a list or a map. To nudge,hold and move the selected item up ordown to a new location.

Fling or Swipe



Fling or swipe is used to scrollthrough a list, pan the map, or changepage views. Do this by placing a fingeron the display then moving it rapidlyup and down or right and left.

Spread

Spread is used to zoom in on a map,certain images, or a web page. Placefinger and thumb together on thedisplay, then move them apart.

Pinch

Pinch is used to zoom out on a map,certain images, or a web page. Placefinger and thumb apart on the display,then move them together.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high gloss surfacesor vehicle displays, use a microfibercloth to wipe surfaces. Before wipingthe surface with the microfiber cloth,use a soft bristle brush to remove dirtthat could scratch the surface. Thenuse the microfiber cloth by gentlyrubbing to clean. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodically handwash the microfiber cloth separately,

using mild soap. Do not use bleach orfabric softener. Rinse thoroughly andair dry before next use.

Software Updates

Over-the-Air Software Updates

If equipped, see “Updates” underSettings 0 189 for details on softwareupdates.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

Press e on the console controls ortouch the Audio icon on the HomePage to display the active audiosource page. Choose the three mostrecently used sources listed at the leftside of the display. Choose the Moreoption to display a list of availablesources. Examples of available sourcesmay include AM, FM, SXM (ifequipped), MyMedia, USB, AUX (ifequipped), and Bluetooth.



Infotainment SystemSound Menu

From any of the audio source mainpages, touch Sound to display thefollowing:

Equalizer : Touch to adjust Bass,Midrange, Treble, and Surround (ifequipped) using the options on theinfotainment display.

Fade/Balance : Touch to adjust byusing the controls on theinfotainment display or by tapping/dragging the crosshair.

Sound Mode (If Equipped). Bose Centerpoint surround soundsystems have four sound modes:

‐ Normal: Adjusts the audio toprovide the best sound for allseating positions.

‐ Driver: Adjusts the audio toprovide the best sound for thedriver.

‐ Rear: Adjusts the audio to providethe best sound for the rear seatoccupants.

‐ Centerpoint: Turns on BoseCenterpoint surround technology.This setting creates a surroundsound from nearly any audiosource: existing stereo and MP3players. For more information onBose Centerpoint surroundtechnology, seewww.boseautomotive.com.

. AKG surround sound systems havetwo sound modes:

‐ Normal: Adjusts the audio toprovide the best sound for allseating positions.

‐ Rear: Adjusts the audio to providethe best sound for the rear seatoccupants.

Finding a Station

Seeking a Station

From the AM, FM, or SXM (ifequipped) option, press 7 or 6 onthe console controls or from the AMor FM menu, touch 7 or 6 to searchfor the previous or next strong stationor channel.

Browsing Stations

Touch the Browse option to list allavailable stations or channels.Navigate up and down through allstations and channels by scrolling thelist. Touch the station you want tolisten to. TouchH to save the stationor channel as a favorite.



If equipped, touch Update Station Listto update the active stations orchannels in your area.

Direct Tune

Access Direct Tune by touching theTune icon on the infotainment displayto bring up the keypad. Navigatethrough all frequencies using thearrows on the Direct Tune display.Directly enter a station or channelusing the keypad. When a new stationor channel is entered, the informationabout that station or channel displayson the right side. This informationwill update with each new validfrequency. TouchH to save thestation or channel as a favorite.

The keypad will gray out entries thatdo not contribute to a valid frequencyand will automatically place a decimalpoint within the frequency number.

Touch (X) to delete one number at atime. Touch and hold (X) to delete allnumbers.

A valid AM or FM station willautomatically tune to the newfrequency but not close the DirectTune display. When listening to SXM(if equipped), touch Go after enteringthe channel. Press0 on the consolecontrols, touch the Back icon on theinfotainment display, or z to exit outof Direct Tune.

The tune arrows on the right side ofthe Direct Tune display tune throughthe complete station list one stationstep at a time per touch. A touch andhold advances through stationsquickly.

If equipped, HD Radio multicaststations cannot be tuned directlythrough the Direct Tune feature. Onlythe analog or HD1 station can use

that feature. Use the arrows on theDirect Tune display to adjust to themulticast stations.

AM, FM, and SXM Categories

From the AM stations, if equippedwith HD Radio, FM, or SXM (ifequipped) display, touch Categories atthe top of the Browse menu to accessthe categories list. The list containsnames associated with the AM or FMstations, or SXM channels. Touch acategory name to display a list ofstations or channels for that category.Touching a station or channel fromthe list tunes the radio to that stationor channel.

Storing Radio Station Presets

Favorites are stored in the area at thetop of the display.

AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), and HDRadio Stations (if equipped) : Pressand hold a preset to store the currentstation as a favorite. Touch a savedfavorite to recall a favorite station.



Favorites can also be stored bytouchingH in a station or channellist. This will highlight indicating thatit is now saved as a favorite.

The number of favorites displayed isautomatically adjusted by default, butcan be manually adjusted in Settingsin the System tab under Favorites andthen Set Number of Audio Favorites.It can also be adjusted in Settings inthe Apps tab under Audio and thenSet Number of Audio Favorites.

HD Radio TechnologyIf equipped, HD Radio is a free servicewith features such as digital qualitysound, more stations available on asingle frequency such as HD2 andHD3, and display information such asartist and song title.

From the Now Playing display, touchthe HD Radio icon to turn HD onor off.

Station Access

To access HD Radio stations:

1. Tune the radio to the station. If HDRadio is turned on and the stationis broadcasting in HD Radio, the

radio will automatically tune to theHD version of the current channel(HD1) after several seconds. Theradio will also display iconsrepresenting additional channels(HD2, ...HD8), that may beavailable. When the radiosuccessfully tunes to a HD station,the HD logo will display and digitalaudio will play.

2. Touch the display arrows to tuneto the previous or next HD Radiostation.

There may be a delay before thestation starts playing.

The HD Radio station number isindicated next to the HD logo.

HD Radio stations can be saved asfavorites.

For a list of all stations, seewww.hdradio.com.

HD Radio Troubleshooting

Digital Audio Delay : Wait for thesignal to process. This can takeseveral seconds.

Volume Change, Audio Skip, Echo,Digital Audio Lost : Station signalstrength may be weak, the station isout of range, or the station may beout of alignment. Verify properreception on another station.

If the HD Radio signal weakens whilelistening to HD1, the radio willautomatically switch to the analogversion of the radio station.

If the HD Radio signal loses receptionwhile listening to stations HD2 toHD8, the radio mutes until the signalcan be recovered or until the station ischanged.

HD Radio can be disabled if driving ina weak signal area. Touch HD RadioOn/Off to toggle HD Radio receptionon and off.

Radio Data System (RDS)If equipped, RDS features are availablefor use only on FM stations thatbroadcast RDS information. With RDS,the radio can:. Group stations by Category (i.e.,Program Type) such as Rock, Jazz,Classical, etc.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 153. Display messages from radiostations.

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. It is possiblethat a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

When information is broadcast from aRDS station, the station name or callletters display on the audio screen.Radio text supporting the currentlyplaying broadcast may also appear.

Satellite Radio

SiriusXM Radio Service

If equipped, vehicles with a validSiriusXM radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, in digital-qualitysound. In the U.S., seewww.siriusxm.com or call

1-888-601-6296. In Canada, seewww.siriusxm.ca or call1-877-438-9677.

When SiriusXM is active, the channelname, number, song title, and artistappear on the display.

SiriusXM with 360L

SiriusXM with 360L interface hasenhanced in-vehicle listeningexperience for subscribers. Theexperience now offers more categoriesand system learned recommendationstoward discovering more personalizedcontent.

To use the full SiriusXM 360Lprogram, including streaming contentand listening recommendations,OnStar Connected Access is required.Connected vehicle services vary bymodel and require a complete workingelectrical system, cell reception, andGPS signal. An active connected planis required.

Reference the SiriusXM user guide foruse and subscription information.

Radio ReceptionUnplug electronic devices from theaccessory power outlets if there isinterference or static in the radio.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can also occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.



SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service

If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite RadioService provides digital radioreception. Tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges, garages,or tunnels may cause loss of theSiriusXM signal for a period of time.Some cellular services may interferewith SXM reception causing loss ofsignal.

Mobile Device Usage

Mobile device usage, such as makingor receiving calls, charging, or justhaving the mobile device on maycause static interference in the radio.Unplug the mobile device or turn itoff if this happens.

Multi-Band AntennaThe roof antenna may be used forradio, navigation, and OnStar,depending on the equipped options.Keep clear of obstructions for clear

reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof,and it is open, reception can also beaffected.

Audio Players

Avoiding Untrusted MediaDevicesWhen using media devices such as SDcards, USB devices, and mobiledevices, consider the source.Untrusted media devices couldcontain files that affect systemoperation or performance. Avoid use ifthe content or origin cannot betrusted.

USB PortAudio stored on a USB device may belistened to.

The vehicle may be equipped with twoUSB ports in the center console underthe armrest. These ports are for dataand charging. There may also be twoUSB ports for charging only at the rearof the center console.

CautionTo avoid vehicle damage, unplug allaccessories and disconnect allaccessory cables from the vehiclewhen not in use. Accessory cablesleft plugged into the vehicle,unconnected to a device, could bedamaged or cause an electricalshort if the unconnected end comesin contact with liquids or anotherpower source such as the accessorypower outlet.

Playing from a USB

A USB mass storage device can beconnected to the USB port.

Audio extensions supported by theUSB may include:. MP3. AAC. OGG. 3GP

Gracenote

When plugging in a USB device,Gracenote service builds voice tags formusic. Voice tags allow artists, albums



with hard to pronounce names, andnicknames to be used to play musicthrough voice recognition, if equipped.

While indexing, infotainment featuresmay be available.

My Media Library

MyMedia is only available when morethan one indexed device is connected.It allows access to content from allindexed media sources. MyMedia willshow as an available source in theSource page.

USB MP3 Player and USB Devices

The USB MP3 players and USB devicesconnected must comply with the USBMass Storage Class specification(USB MSC).

To play a USB device:

1. Connect the USB.

2. Touch Audio from the Home Page.

3. Touch the More option and thentouch the USB device.

Use the following when playing anactive USB source:

p : Touch to play the current mediasource.

j : Touch to pause playback of thecurrent media source.

7 :. Touch to seek the beginning of thecurrent or previous track.

. Touch and hold to reverse quicklythrough playback. Release to returnto playing speed. Elapsed timedisplays.

6 :. Touch to seek the next track.. Touch and hold to advance quicklythrough playback. Release to returnto playing speed. Elapsed timedisplays.

Shuffle : Touch the shuffle icon toplay music in random order.

USB Sound Menu

See “Infotainment System SoundMenu” under AM-FM Radio 0 149.

USB Browse Menu

When a list of songs, albums, artists,or other types of media displays, theup and down arrows and A-Z appear

on the left side. Select A-Z to view adisplay that will show all letters of thealphabet and select the letter to go to.

Touch the up and down arrows tomove the list up and down.

Touch Browse and the following maydisplay:

Playlists:1. Touch to view the playlists stored

on the USB.

2. Touch a playlist to view the list ofall songs in that playlist.

3. Touch a song from the list to beginplayback.

Supported playlist extensions are m3uand pls.

Artists:1. Touch to view the list of artists

stored on the USB.

2. Touch an artist name to view a listof all albums by the artist.

3. To select a song, touch All Songs ortouch an album and then touch asong from the list.



Songs:1. Touch to display a list of all songs

on the USB.

2. To begin playback, touch a songfrom the list.

Albums:1. Touch to view the albums on

the USB.

2. Touch the album to view a list ofall songs on the album.


Genres:1. Touch to view the genres on

the USB.

2. Touch a genre to view a list ofartists.

3. Touch an artist to view albums bythat artist.

4. Touch an album to view songs onthe album.

5. Touch a song to start playback.

Composers:1. Touch to view the composers on

the USB.

2. Touch a Composer to view a list ofalbums by that composer.

3. Touch an album or All Songs toview a list of songs.


Folders:1. Touch to view the directories on

the USB.

2. Touch a folder to view a list of allfiles.

3. Touch a file from the list to beginplayback.

Podcasts : Touch to view the podcastson the connected Apple device andget a list of podcast episodes.

Audiobooks:1. Touch to view the audiobooks

stored on the Apple device.

2. Touch an audiobook to get a list ofchapters.

3. Touch the chapter from the list tobegin playback.

File System and Naming

File systems supported by the USBmay include:

. FAT32

. NTFS

. HFS+

The songs, artists, albums, and genresare taken from the file’s songinformation and are only displayed ifpresent. The radio displays the filename as the track name if the songinformation is not available.

Supported Apple Devices

To view supported devices, seemy.cadillac.com/learn.

Storing and Recalling MediaFavorites

To store media favorites, touchBrowse to display a list of mediatypes.

Touch one of the following Browseoptions to save a favorite:

Playlists : TouchH next to anyplaylist to store the playlist as afavorite. Touch a saved favorite torecall a favorite playlist. The first songin the playlist begins to play.



Artists : TouchH next to any artistto store the artist as a favorite. Toucha saved favorite to recall a favoriteartist. The first song in the artist listbegins to play.

Songs : TouchH next to any song tostore the song as a favorite. Touch asaved favorite to recall a favorite song.

Albums : TouchH next to anyalbum to store the album as afavorite. Touch a saved favorite torecall a favorite album. The first songin the album list begins to play.

Genres : TouchH next to any genreto store the genre as a favorite. Toucha saved favorite to recall a favoritegenre. The first song of the genrebegins to play.

Podcasts : TouchH next to anypodcast to store the podcast as afavorite. Touch a saved favorite torecall a favorite podcast. The podcastbegins to play.

Audiobooks : TouchH next to anyaudiobook to store the audiobook as afavorite. Touch a saved favorite to

recall a favorite audiobook. The firstchapter in the audiobook beginsto play.

Media Playback and Mute

USB playback will be paused if thesystem is muted. If the steering wheelmute control is pressed again,playback will resume.

If the source is changed while inmute, playback resumes and audiowill unmute.

Bluetooth AudioMusic may be played from a pairedBluetooth device. See Bluetooth(Overview) 0 182 orBluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)0 183 for help pairing a device.

Volume and song selection may becontrolled by using the infotainmentcontrols or the mobile device.If Bluetooth is selected and no volumeis present, check the volume settingon both your mobile device and theinfotainment system.

Music can be launched by touchingBluetooth from the recent sources liston the left of the display or bytouching the More option and thentouching the Bluetooth device.

To play music via Bluetooth:

1. Power on the device, and pair toconnect the device.

2. Once paired, touch Audio from theHome Page, then touch Bluetoothfrom the recent sources list on theleft of the display.

Bluetooth Sound Menu

See “Infotainment System SoundMenu” under AM-FM Radio 0 149.

Manage Bluetooth Devices

From the Home Page:

1. Touch Audio.

2. Touch More.

3. Touch Bluetooth.

4. Touch Devices to add or deletedevices.



When touching Bluetooth, the radiomay not be able to launch the audioplayer on the connected device tostart playing. When the vehicle is notmoving, use the mobile device tobegin playback.

All devices launch audio differently.When selecting Bluetooth as a source,the radio may show as paused on thedisplay. Press play on the device ortouch p on the display to beginplayback.

Browse functionality will be providedwhere supported by the Bluetoothdevice. This media content will not bepart of the MyMedia source mode.

Some smartphones support sendingBluetooth music information todisplay on the radio. When the radioreceives this information, it will checkto see if any is available and display it.For more information about supportedBluetooth features, seemy.cadillac.com/learn.

Navigation

Using the NavigationSystemIf equipped, launch the Navapplication by touching the Nav iconon the Home Page or on the shortcuttray near the bottom of theinfotainment display.

When the Nav application is launchedfor the first time, a productwalkthrough is available. Use of thefeature requires the Terms andConditions and the Privacy statementto be confirmed. If available andsigned into a profile, it is alsosuggested to enable and confirmPredictive Navigation.

Predictive Navigation (If Equipped)

If Predictive Navigation is availableand confirmed, this feature learnspreferences by remembering wherethe vehicle has been. It uses thelocations and navigation history topersonalize routes and results.

Predictive Navigation may learnelements such as:

. Personalized routes based onpreferred streets.

. Search results that provide bestmatches at the top of the list.

. Predictive traffic.

. Local map content updating.

Predictive Navigation can also beenabled or disabled at a later time bytouchingA (Options). While inOptions, touch Settings, then Map andNavigation Settings, and thenPredictive Navigation. See Settings0 189.

Navigation Map View

After opening the Nav application forthe first time, the application willalways open in full map viewdisplaying the vehicle’s currentlocation. When the vehicle is stopped,



the search bar will appear along thetop of the navigation map view.Manually close the search bar bytouching z. When the vehicle ismoving, the } (Search) icon willreplace the search bar to maximizethe full map view.

Destination Card Preferences

From the Nav application, set upHome and Work addresses to enableone-touch navigation. To set up Homeand Work addresses, touchA andselect Settings, then Map andNavigation Settings, and thenDestination Card Preferences. ShowMy Places on Map should be on bydefault. Select and enter Home and/orWork address and save.

If the vehicle’s system is not signedinto a customized profile, the currentlocation icon uses a generic symbol.Once signed into a customized profile,the current location symbol will showa customized icon. See NavigationSymbols 0 161.

Map and Navigation Settings

TouchA while in the map view todisplay options. The following maydisplay:. 3D Heading Up, 2D Heading Up, 2DNorth

. Show on Map

. Traffic Events (available withOnStar Connected Navigation)

. Settings

. Edit Destination (if a route hasbeen set)

. Avoid on Route (if a route hasbeen set)

Touch Settings to view Map andNavigation Settings. The followingmay display:. Destination Card Preferences. Map Preferences. Route Preferences

. Navigation Voice Control

. Traffic Preferences

. Alert Preferences

. Fuel Grade Preferences

. Manage History

. Predictive Navigation: See“Predictive Navigation (If Equipped)”previously in this section.

. About

To exit a list, touch z in the top rightcorner to return to the mainmap view.

Make sure to set up preferences beforesetting a destination and startingactive guidance.

Map Preferences

Touch to choose between basic mapfeature configurations:

Map Colors. Auto – Touch to automaticallychange modes based on lightingconditions.

. Day (Light)

. Night (Dark)



3D Landmark (Default is On) :Touch On or Off. When turned on, thesystem will display all 3D Landmarkson the map depending on the zoomlevel.

3D Building (Default is Off) : TouchOn or Off. When turned on, thesystem will display all of the possible3D building shapes on the mapdepending on the zoom level.

Show Terrain in 3D (Default isOff) : If equipped, touch On or Off.When turned on, the system willdisplay terrain information on themap in 3D view.

Auto-Zoom (Default is On) : TouchOn or Off. When turned on, thesystem will automatically adjust thezoom level when the vehicle isapproaching a turn. After the turn iscompleted, the system automaticallybrings the zoom back to the originallyset level. If the vehicle is approachinga turn with the next turn occurringshortly after, the Auto-Zoom willremain on until both turns arecompleted.

Route Preferences

Touch to access the RoutePreferences. The choices are:. Preferred Route – Choose from twodifferent route options: Fastest orEco-Friendly.

‐ Fastest would be the route withthe shortest drive time.

‐ Eco-Friendly would be the mostfuel-efficient route.

. Avoid on Current Route – Chooseany of the road features to avoidwhile on route:

‐ Highways

‐ Unpaved Roads

‐ Ferries

‐ Carpool Lanes

‐ Toll Roads

‐ Tunnels

‐ Country Borders

Navigation Voice Control

Touch to access the voice controlsetting display.. Navigation Volume – To adjust thevolume level, touch the up anddown arrows. If the voice guidance

prompt is being heard, volume canalso be adjusted using the knob onthe center stack or the volumeswitch on the steering wheel.

. Navigation Voice Prompt Levelduring a Call. Options available are:

‐ Full Prompt (Selected by default)

‐ Tone Only

‐ None

Traffic Events (If Equipped)

This feature provides a list of eventsthat are on the route or nearby. TouchA and then select Traffic Events. AnOnStar connected Navigation serviceplan is required.

Traffic Preferences (If Equipped)

While in Map View, touchA, thenSettings and then Map and NavigationSettings to access Traffic Preferences.When Show Traffic on Map is turnedon, the feature provides an overviewof the traffic flow using differentcoded colors. The following optionsare available for rerouting:


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 161. Auto Reroute to Better Route – Thesystem will automatically reroute ifthe system detects there is a trafficissue ahead.

. Ask Before Rerouting (Default) – Ifthe system detects there is a trafficissue ahead, it will display a pop-upwith details about the issue. Chooseto reroute or cancel the alert.

. Never Search for Better Route – Thesystem will not check for a betterroute until one of the above optionsis selected.

Alert Preferences

Set alerts on or off during bothinactive and active guidance views.The following alerts may be available:. Road Safety Alerts – Touch todisplay upcoming School Zones.

. Traffic Camera Alerts

Manage History

Touch Manage History to access theHistory options:. Clear Recent Destinations – Touch\ to clear the recent destinations.

. Clear Search History – Touch\ toclear the search history.

About

Touch to display software information,such as:. Telenav Terms and Conditions. Telenav Privacy Statement. Navigation Version

MapsThe Nav application requires a mapdatabase to run. It is stored on an SDcard that is connected to theinfotainment system. If the mapdatabase is not available, a missing SDcard error message will be displayed.

SD Card Error Messages

The SD card only works for oneunique vehicle. The SD card must passauthentication verification to be usedfor that specific vehicle. Do notremove SD card while the ignitionis on.

Potential error scenarios andmessages include:. The SD card has initialized for thefirst time: “Once initialized, this SDcard can only be used for navigation

in this vehicle.” Make sure the SDcard switch is in an upwardposition.

. The SD card is not workingproperly: “SD card is not functioningproperly. (Error Code).”

. The SD card is not paired with theexisting system: “This Nav SD cardis not valid in this vehicle fornavigation. See Owner’s Manual formore detail or visit your dealer.(Error Code).”

. The SD card has been removed fromthe slot: “SD card has been removed.(Error Code).” Make sure the Nav SDcard is in the slot.

Touch Continue to resume after theinitialization error message. For theother messages, touch OK to return tothe Home Page.

If any errors continue, see your dealer.

Navigation SymbolsFollowing are the most commonsymbols that may appear in the Navapplication.



This indicates the vehicle’s currentlocation and direction on the map.

This is the vehicle’s current locationicon during inactive guidance mode.Once a user profile is created, thecurrent location icon can becustomized.

This icon indicates the vehicle’scurrent location and direction onthe map.

The destination pin marks thelocation of the final destination.Touch the pin to view the destinationaddress or to add it or remove it fromthe Favorites list. Hide theinformation by touching the pin onemore time. It will automatically timeout if no action is taken.

If equipped, smart Points of Interest(POIs) are places of interest forparking and gas stations.

The progress bar provides an overviewof the route progress and may showtraffic and incidents along the way. Asthe route proceeds, the vehicle iconmoves up the bar.

Touch the icon to zoom out on themap and view the entire route. Touchit again to return to the previous view.

View the drive time by touching theestimated time of arrival (ETA).

Current Location

When the vehicle is parked and not ina Navigation session, the user icon iscentered on the map view,highlighting the current location.



DestinationReceiving Destination Directionsfrom Different Sources

Destinations can be received ortransferred from different sources tothe Nav application for routeguidance. If equipped, some of thesesources may include:. Navigation from search results.. OnStar Advisor destinationdownload.

. An address from the Contacts list.

. An application on the smartphonethat can send destinations to thevehicle.

. An application downloaded to thevehicle such as OnStar Services thatcan send destinations to thenavigation system.

Waypoints

Add up to five waypoints, which areadditional destinations, along theroute. To add an additional stop orwaypoint:

1. From active guidance, touch }.

2. Search for the destination usingOne-Box, Voice search, or the QuickCategory icons.

3. Choose search results Along Route,Nearby, or Near Destination.

4. Choose the desired waypoint andtouch Add to Trip or replace thecurrent destination by touchingNew Destination.

Route options are not available forwaypoints.

Arriving at a Waypoint

When approaching a waypoint, thesystem will display a DestinationArrival view. To continue on to thenext destination touch the Drive tomessage on the infotainment display.

If the vehicle passes the waypoint orgets out of the current route, thesystem will automatically reroute backto this waypoint. At the same time, itwill show a Drive to icon along withthe next waypoint address so thecurrent waypoint can be skipped andguidance can resume to the nextwaypoint or destination.

Editing a Waypoint

When waypoints are added duringactive guidance, the system allows astop to be deleted or the order to bechanged. To edit a waypoint:

1. TouchA.

2. Touch Edit Destinations.. Modify destination order by

touching and holding the arrowuntil it is highlighted. Drag tomove the waypoint up or downthe list.

. Delete a waypoint by touchingY. A pop-up will appear toconfirm waypoint removal. Oncethe request is confirmed, thesystem will remove the addressfrom the destinations list. Touchz on the top right corner so thesystem can recalculate theroute.

If there is only one address inthe destinations list, the systemwill disable the move and deletefunctions. The system will notallow the final destination to bedeleted.



Map Information

Road network attributes are containedin the map database for mapinformation. Attributes includeinformation such as street names,street addresses, and turn restrictions.A detailed area includes all majorhighways, service roads, andresidential roads. The detailed areasinclude Places of Interest (POIs) suchas restaurants, airports, banks,hospitals, police stations, gas stations,tourist attractions, and historicalmonuments.

If the vehicle does not have anapplicable service plan, the mapdatabase may not include data fornewly constructed areas or mapdatabase corrections that arecompleted after production. Thenavigation system provides full routeguidance in the detailed map areas.

Zoom Control

The zoom control display is shown onthe map view. A few ways to zoom inor out are:. Touch + or – to zoom in or out onthe map.

. Double tap with one finger to zoomin or single tap with two fingers tozoom out on the map.

. Use the index finger and thumb tozoom out by pinching and thenzoom in by spreading those twofingers on the map.

Map Gestures and Map Scale

Use the following gestures on theinfotainment display to adjust themap scale and display options.. Pinch to zoom in or out.. Pan the map.. Use two fingers to tilt down andchange from 2D to 3D. Tilt up tochange back to 2D.

. Rotate the map.

See Using the System 0 146.

Mute

When in active guidance, the audioprompts while using navigation can bemuted. Touch the speaker icon on theright side of the upper bar. A slashwill appear on the speaker to indicatevoice guidance is muted.

Active Guidance View

When a destination is chosen and anavigation session is active, thenavigation system enters into anActive Guidance View (AGV).

Map Orientation

TouchA on the map to access maporientation settings. Map orientationis 3D Heading Up by default.

Available settings are:. 3D Heading Up (Default): 3D mapwith the vehicle pointing up. In thismode, the current location icon willalways head up and the map willrotate around it.

. 2D Heading Up: 2D map with thevehicle pointing up. In this mode,the current location icon will alwayshead up and the map will rotatearound it.

. 2D North Up: 2D map with Northpointing up. In this mode, thecurrent location icon will shift asthe vehicle turns left and right.

Touch the icon to change the maptype. The icon and label will alsoupdate accordingly.



Depending on the zoom level of the2D Heading Up and 3D Heading Upmaps, the system may automaticallyswitch to the 2D North Up map.

When in AGV, the entire route can beviewed in 2D North Up by touchingthe traffic bar. The map will zoom outand readjust to display the full route.When in 2D North Up Route View, theRecenter icon will appear in themiddle of the display. Touch either theRecenter icon or the traffic bar againto return to the previous view, either2D or 3D.

Lane Guidance

The map will display the laneinformation for the upcomingmaneuver if it is available.

Junction View

When a vehicle is on the highway andapproaching the exit, an imagedisplays the lane that the vehicle muststay in to complete the nextmaneuver.

Quick-Turn View

When the vehicle is approaching aturn with the next turn following inquick succession, a quick-turn listappears below the primary turnindicator. An audio prompt willannounce the quick turn.

Auto-Zoom

When approaching a maneuver, themap will automatically zoom in toshow both the vehicle icon and theupcoming maneuver to give a betterview of the maneuver. Once themaneuver is complete, the system willzoom back to the previous zoom level.TouchA on the map to accessSettings, then touch Map Preferencesto access Auto-Zoom. This feature canbe enabled or disabled.

Directions

Touch the menu option next to thenext turn street name to displayDirections.

Directions displays the turns anddirections from the current location tothe final destination.

Editing Directions

Directions can be edited by choosingy, which expands the list to fill thedisplay and enters the Edit Mode.While in Edit Mode, an unwantedroute segment can be removed fromthe route by touching Y next to thesegment. A pop-up appears to confirmsegment removal.

When the route segment has beenremoved, all segments are replaced byan activity indicator while the newroute is recalculated. When therecalculation is complete, the activityindicator is replaced with the newroute segments.



Highway Exits List

TouchC to open the Exit list. Thisicon displays next to the currentstreet name near the bottom of thedisplay. The icon only appears whenon a highway with defined exits.

While traveling on roads withdesignated exits, an Exit list may beavailable. The Exit list displays theexit number, distance to the exit fromthe current vehicle position, andconvenience stops that may beavailable, such as gas, coffee, food,and lodging.

Next Maneuver Menu

When in Active Guidance, the NextManeuver Turn Arrow, Street Name,and Maneuver Distance are shown inthe Next Maneuver at the top of the

display overlaying the map. ETA,Distance to Destination, and TrafficIndicator are displayed in a panelpinned on the right of the display.

Navigation Next Turn ManeuverAlert

If the Navigation application is notopen when a near maneuver prompt isgiven, it is shown as an alert. Touchthe alert to go to the main navigationview or touch z to dismiss the alert.

Repeat Voice Guidance

This symbol indicates the nextguidance maneuver. Touch it to repeatthe last spoken guidance instruction.

Incident Alert (If Equipped)

During active guidance, if the systemdetermines that there is an incidentahead but there is not a better route,

the system will play a tone and showa Quick Notice. This will only showonce per incident.

Incident Reports (If Equipped)

Incident report icons, along withtraffic flow data, display on the mapduring both active and inactiveguidance.

End Route

Touch Cancel at the top right cornerto end active guidance and return toinactive guidance. If active guidance iscanceled before the destination hasbeen reached, a pop-up option toResume Trip will appear.

Resume Trip

The trip can be resumed if it wascanceled by touching the Resume Trippop-up option.

If the system has determined that thedestination has been reached, eitherbecause the arrival view displayed orthe destination has been passed, theResume Trip option will not appear.



Favorites

The navigation favorites can havecontacts, addresses, or POIs that havebeen saved through the favorite iconon the details view.

Accessing Favorites

In the Nav application, view theFavorites list by touchingH in thesearch bar along the top of the Navmap view. If the search bar is closed,touch } and selectH.

Saving Favorites

Favorites can be added from a numberof the system’s applications. Touchthe favorites icon to save content as afavorite.

Renaming Navigation Favorites

1. Touch the Settings icon on theHome Page and touch theSystem tab.

2. Touch Favorites to access theManage Favorites option.

3. Touch a saved Navigation favoriteto access the edit icon. Touch theedit icon to rename the favorite.

4. Touch Save to store the renamedfavorite.

Recents

Touch H to access a list of recentdestinations.

Recenter Position Icon

Touch the Recenter Position arrow inthe middle of the map view to resetthe map to the current location.

Last Parked Location

The Last Parked Location is the lastlocation the vehicle engine was turnedoff. That location is displayed in thefirst row of the Recents list. Touchingthe last Parked Location shows theAddress Details view to either save theaddress or drive to it. The Last ParkedLocation can be deleted by enteringthe Edit display. Once the Last ParkedLocation is deleted, it no longerappears in the Recents list, unless thevehicle is started at that locationagain.

Show POI Icons

To see the POI categories, touchOptions, then touch Show on Map. Upto eight categories of icons can beselected.

Smart POI Icons on Map (IfEquipped)

The smart POI icons such as fuelstations and parking may appearbased on time, location, driver searchbehavior, driving conditions, andvehicle conditions.

Touch a smart POI icon to open thecorresponding details:. Left side: Name and address ofthe POI.

. Right side:E + ETE (EstimatedTime Enroute.)



Smart Fuel Station Icons

Fuel station prices are shown ifavailable for nearby stations when thevehicle is low on fuel.

Smart Parking Icons

When reaching a densely populateddestination and the systemdetermines that parking may belimited, the system will attempt todisplay nearby parking destinationswith pricing information, if available.

Report an Issue Using POI Details (IfEquipped)

In the POI details page, a POI issuecan be reported if the data is notaccurate or the address is incorrect.Touch Report an Issue near thebottom of the display to access theissue selection page. Touch one of thepredefined issues on the selectionpage, then touch Send. The systemwill send the information for analysis.

Search

Touch Search on the infotainmentdisplay to open the search display.It has a search field entry box, quickcategory icon shortcuts, recents icon,favorites icon, and keyboard.

Auto Complete

Enter a partial location in the fieldentry box on the search display. Autocomplete will attempt to complete thedestination based on what is beingentered. Touch the suggested item tosearch.

Search While in Motion with NoFront Seat Passenger Present

The search display will not allowchanges or text input with thekeyboard when the vehicle is inmotion. As a result, a display showingthree rows of the most commonlyused categories appears. Touching thesearch box will activate speechrecognition.

Search While in Motion with FrontSeat Passenger Present

If the system detects that the frontseat passenger is present with bothdriver and passenger seat beltsbuckled, touching the search icon willdisplay an alert message that allowsthe passenger to search for adestination as if the vehicle werestopped.

Connected Navigation

Connected Navigation is asubscription service that enablescertain capabilities within thenavigation system, such as Traffic,Smart Search/Routing, and PredictiveNavigation capabilities. The systemwill show an alert when thesubscription is expiring and will ask torenew the plan.

OnStar SystemWith a connected plan, an OnStarAdvisor can download a destination tothe vehicle or into the built-innavigation system.



Touch OnStar Services on the HomePage to access the OnStar menu.Touch Turn-by-Turn Directions iconwhile on the Services tab of theOnStar menu.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

If equipped, after touching theTurn-by-Turn Directions icon, selectdestinations from Recents orFavorites. Recents or Favorites will beempty if this is the first use. To find

new locations, touch OnStar Advisor,Home Directions, Place Voice Search,or Address Voice Search.

Lane Guidance

When available, the system will showthe best lane(s) to be in for the nextmaneuver.

Cancel a Route

If a route is in progress using eitherthe vehicle navigation system or theTurn-by-Turn route, and a new routeis requested, the current route inprogress will be canceled.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS)If equipped, the position of the vehicleis determined by using satellitesignals, various vehicle signals, andmap data.

At times, other interference such asthe satellite condition, roadconfiguration, condition of the vehicle,and/or other circumstances can affectthe navigation system's ability todetermine the accurate position of thevehicle.

The GPS shows the current position ofthe vehicle using signals sent by GPSsatellites. When the vehicle is notreceiving signals from the satellites, asymbol appears in the status bar.

This system might not be available orinterference can occur if any of thefollowing are true:. Signals are obstructed by tallbuildings, trees, large trucks, or atunnel.

. Satellites are being repaired orimproved.



For more information if the GPS is notfunctioning properly, see Problemswith Route Guidance 0 170 andIf the System Needs Service 0 171.

Vehicle PositioningAt times, the position of the vehicleon the map could be inaccurate due toone or more of the following reasons:. The road system has changed.. The vehicle is driving on slipperyroad surfaces such as sand, gravel,or snow.

. The vehicle is traveling on windingroads or long, straight roads.

. The vehicle is approaching a tallbuilding or a large vehicle.

. The surface streets run parallel to afreeway.

. The vehicle has been transferred bya vehicle carrier or a ferry.

. The current position calibration isset incorrectly.

. The vehicle is traveling at highspeed.

. The vehicle changes directions morethan once, or the vehicle is turningon a turn table in a parking lot.

. The vehicle is entering and/orexiting a parking lot, garage, or a lotwith a roof.

. The GPS signal is not received.

. A roof carrier is installed on thevehicle.

. Tire chains are installed on thevehicle.

. The tires are replaced or worn.

. The tire pressure for the tires isincorrect.

. This is the first navigation use afterthe map data is updated.

. The 12-volt battery has beendisconnected for several days.

. The vehicle is driving in heavytraffic where driving is at lowspeeds, and the vehicle is stoppedand started repeatedly.

Problems with RouteGuidanceInappropriate route guidance canoccur under one or more of thefollowing conditions:. The turn was not made on the roadindicated.

. Route guidance might not beavailable when using automaticrerouting for the next right orleft turn.

. The route might not be changedwhen using automatic rerouting.

. There is no route guidance whenturning at an intersection.

. Plural names of places might beannounced occasionally.

. It could take a long time to operateautomatic rerouting duringhigh-speed driving.

. Automatic rerouting might display aroute returning to the set waypointif heading for a destination withoutpassing through a set waypoint.

. The route prohibits the entry of avehicle due to a regulation by timeor season or any other regulationwhich may be given.

. Some routes might not be searched.

. The route to the destination mightnot be shown if there are new roads,if roads have recently changed, or ifcertain roads are not listed in themap data. See Maps 0 161.



To recalibrate the vehicle's position onthe map, park with the vehiclerunning for two to five minutes, untilthe vehicle position updates. Makesure the vehicle is parked in a locationthat is safe and has a clear view of thesky and away from large obstructions.

If the System NeedsServiceIf the navigation system needs service,see your dealer.

Map Data UpdatesThe map data in the vehicle is themost up-to-date information availablewhen the vehicle was produced.

See www.gmnavdisc.com for details onordering, purchasing, and installing anew or replacement SD card. Featuresare subject to change. For moreinformation on this feature, seemy.cadillac.com/learn.

Database CoverageExplanationsCoverage areas vary with respect tothe level of map detail available forany given area. Some areas featuregreater levels of detail than others.If this happens, it does not meanthere is a problem with the system. Asthe map data is updated, more detailcan become available for areas thatpreviously had limited detail. See MapData Updates 0 171.

Voice RecognitionIf equipped, voice recognition allowsfor hands-free operation within thenavigation, audio, phone, and weatherapplications. This feature can bestarted by pressing g on the steeringwheel or touching g on theinfotainment display.

However, not all features within theseareas are supported by voicecommands. Generally, only complextasks that require multiple manualinteractions to complete aresupported by voice commands.

For example, tasks that take morethan one or two touches, such as asong or artist to play from a mediadevice, would be supported by voicecommands. Other tasks, like adjustingthe volume or seeking up or down, areaudio features that are easilyperformed by touching one or twooptions, and are not supported byvoice commands.

In general there are flexible ways tospeak commands for completing thetasks.

If your language supports it, trystating a one-shot command, such as“Directions to address <number, street,city, state/province>.” Do not includethe ZIP code while stating the addressduring the command. Anotherexample of a one-shot DestinationEntry command is, “Directions toPlace of Interest at <hotel>.” If thesecommands do not work, try saying,“Take me to Place of Interest” or “Findaddress” and the system will walk youthrough by asking additionalquestions.



Hybrid Speech Recognition

If equipped, this feature helpsdistinguish words by usingInternet-based information along withthe system’s voice recognitiondatabase. This allows you to speakmore naturally when using voicerecognition.

Using Voice Recognition

Voice recognition becomes availableonce the system has been initialized.This begins when the ignition isturned on. Initialization may take afew moments.

1. Press g on the steering wheelcontrols to activate voicerecognition.

2. The audio system mutes and thesystem plays a prompt.

3. Clearly speak one of the commandsdescribed in this section.

A voice recognition system promptcan be interrupted while it isplaying by pressing g again.

Once voice recognition is started, boththe infotainment display andinstrument cluster show the selections

and visual dialog content. Thesedisplays can be turned on or off in theTutorial Mode under Settings 0 189.

There are three voice prompt modessupported:. Informative verbal prompts: Thistype of prompt will provide moreinformation regarding the supportedactions.

. Short prompts: This type of promptwill provide simple instructionsabout what can be stated.

. Auto informative prompts: This typeof prompt plays during the first fewspeech sessions, then automaticallyswitches to the short prompt aftersome experience has been gainedthrough using the system.

If a command is not spoken, the voicerecognition system says a helpprompt.

Prompts and Infotainment Displays

While a voice recognition session isactive, there may be correspondingoptions showing on the displays.A selection can be made by manuallytouching the option, or by speakingthe number for the option to select.

Manual interaction in the voicerecognition session is permitted.Interaction during a voice session maybe completed entirely using voicecommands while some manualcommands may expedite a task. If aselection is made using a manualcontrol, the voice recognition dialogwill progress in the same way as if theselection were made using a voicecommand. Once the system completesthe task, or the session is terminated,the voice recognition dialog stops.

An example of this type of manualintervention is touching an entry of adisplayed number list instead ofspeaking the number associated withthe entry desired.

Canceling Voice Recognition. Touch or say “Cancel” or “Exit” toterminate the voice recognitionsession and show the display wherevoice recognition was initiated.

. Pressi on the steering wheelcontrols to terminate the voicerecognition session and show thedisplay where voice recognition wasinitiated.



Natural Language Commands

Most languages do not supportnatural language commands insentence form. For those languages,use direct commands like theexamples shown on the display.

Helpful Hints for SpeakingCommands

Voice recognition can understandcommands that are naturally stated insentence form or direct commandsthat state the application andthe task.

For best results:. Listen for the prompt before sayinga command or reply.

. Speak the command naturally, nottoo fast, not too slow.

. Use direct commands without a lotof extra words. For example, “Call<name> at work,” “Play” followed bythe artist or song name, or “Tune”followed by the radio stationnumber.

. Navigation destinations can bemade in a single command usingkeywords. A few examples are: “I

want directions to an address,” “Ineed to find a place of interest or(POI),” or “Find contact.”

The system responds by requestingmore details. For other POIs, say thename of a category like“Restaurants,” “Shopping Malls,” or“Hospitals.”

. Navigating to a destination outsideof the current country takes morethan one command. The firstcommand is to tell the systemwhere the navigation will take place,such as an Address, Intersection,POI, or Contact. If Address orIntersection is selected, the secondcommand is to say, “ChangeCountry.” Once the system responds,say the country before saying therest of the address and/orintersection.

If POI is asked for, say “ChangeLocation,” then “Change Country.”

Direct commands might be moreclearly understood by the system. Anexample of a direct command wouldbe “Call <number>.” Examples of thesedirect commands are displayed onmost of the screens while a voice

session is active. If “Phone” or “PhoneCommands,” is spoken, the systemunderstands that a phone call isrequested and will respond withquestions until enough details aregathered to make a call.

If a cell phone number has been savedwith a name and a place, the directcommand should include both, forexample “Call <name> at work.”

Using Voice Recognition for ListOptions

When a list is displayed, a voiceprompt will ask to confirm or selectan option from that list.

When a display contains a list, theremay be options that are available butnot displayed. The list on a voicerecognition screen functions the sameas a list on other displays. Scrolling orflinging can be used to help displayother entries from the list.

Manually scrolling or paging the liston a display during a voicerecognition session suspends thecurrent voice recognition event and



plays the prompt “Please selectmanually or touch the Back icon onthe infotainment display to try again.”

If manual selection takes more than15 seconds, the session terminatesand prompts that it has timed out.The display returns to the displaywhere voice recognition was initiated.

The Back Command

Say “Back” or touch the Back icon onthe infotainment display to go to theprevious menu.

If in voice recognition, and “Back” isspoken all the way back to thestarting display, and then “Back” isspoken one more time, the voicerecognition session will cancel.

Help

Say “Help” on any voice recognitiondisplay and the help prompt for thedisplay is played.

Voice Recognition for the Radio

If browsing the audio sources whenvoice is touched, the voice recognitioncommands for AM, FM, and SiriusXM(if equipped) are available.

“Switch to AM” : Switch bands to AMand tune to the last AM radio station.

“Switch to FM” : Switch bands to FMand tune to the last FM radio station.

“Switch to SXM” : Switch bands toSiriusXM and tune to the lastSiriusXM channel.

“Tune to <AM frequency> AM” :Tune to the radio station whosefrequency is identified in thecommand (like “nine fifty”).

“Tune to <FM frequency> FM” : Tuneto the radio station whose frequencyis identified in the command (like“one oh one point one”).

“Tune to <AM frequency> AM HD” :Tune to the HD Radio station (ifequipped) whose frequency isidentified in the command.

“Tune to <FM frequency> FM HD” :Tune to the HD Radio station (ifequipped) whose frequency isidentified in the command.

“Tune to <FM frequency> FM HD<HD channel number>” : Tune to theHD Radio station (if equipped) whosefrequency and HD channel areidentified in the command.

“Tune to SXM <SXM channelnumber>” : Tune to the SiriusXMradio station whose channel numberis identified in the command.

“Tune to SXM <SXM channelname>” : Tune to the SiriusXM radiostation whose channel name isidentified in the command.

Voice Recognition for AudioMyMedia

The available voice recognitioncommands for [browsing]MyMedia are:

“Play Artist” : Begin a dialog to entera specific artist name.

“Play Artist <artist name>” : Beginplayback of a specific artist.

“Play Album” : Begin a dialog toenter a specific album name.

“Play Album <album name>” : Beginplayback of a specific album.



“Play Song” : Begin a dialog to enter aspecific song name.

“Play Song <song name>” : Beginplayback of a specific song,if available.

“Play Genre” : Begin a dialog to entera specific genre.

“Play Genre <genre name>” : Beginplayback of a specific genre.

“Play Playlist” : Begin a dialog toenter a specific playlist name.

“Play Playlist <playlist name>” :Begin playback of a specific playlist.

“Play <device name>” : Play musicfrom a specific device identified byname. The device name is the namedisplayed on the display when thedevice is first selected as an audiosource.

“Play Chapter” : Begin a dialog toenter a specific name.

“Play Chapter <chapter name>” :Begin playback of a specific chapter.

“Play Audiobook” : Begin a dialog toenter a specific audiobook.

“Play Audiobook <audiobookname>” : Begin playback of a specificaudiobook.

“Play Episode” : Begin a dialog toenter a specific name.

“Play Episode <episode name>” :Begin playback of a specific episode.

“Play Podcast” : Begin a dialog toenter a specific podcast.

“Play Podcast <podcast name>” :Begin playback of a specific podcast.

“My Media” : Begin a dialog to enterthe desired media content.

Handling Large Amounts of MediaContent

It is expected that large amounts ofmedia content will be brought into thevehicle. It may be necessary to handlelarge amounts of media content in adifferent way than smaller amounts ofmedia. The system may limit theoptions of voice recognition by notallowing selection of files by voice atthe highest level if the number of filesexceeds the maximum limit.

Changes to voice commands due tomedia content limits are:

. Files including other individual filesof all media types such as songs,audiobook chapters, podcastepisodes, and videos.

. Album type folders including typessuch as albums and audiobooks.

There are no restrictions if thenumber of files and albums is fewerthan 12,000. When the number of filesconnected to the system is between12,000 and 24,000, the content cannotbe accessed directly with onecommand like “Play <song name>.”

The restriction is that the command“Play Song” must be spoken first; thesystem will then ask for the songname. The reply command would beto say the name of the song to play.

Similar limits exist for album content.If there are more than 12,000 albums,but fewer than 24,000, the contentcannot be accessed directly with onecommand like, “Play <album name>.”The command “Play Album” must firstbe spoken; the system will then askfor the album name. The reply wouldbe to say the name of the albumto play.



Once the number of files has exceededapproximately 24,000, there is nosupport for accessing the songsdirectly through voice commands.There will still be access to the mediacontent by using commands forplaylists, artists, and genres.

The access commands for playlists,artists, and genres are prohibited afterthe number of this type of mediaexceeds 12,000.

The system will provide feedback thefirst time voice recognition is initiatedif it has become apparent that any ofthese limits are reached during adevice initializing process.

Voice recognition performance willdegrade to some extent based onmany factors when adding largeamounts of data to recognize. If this isthe case, perhaps accessing songsthrough playlists or artist name wouldwork better.

Voice Recognition forNavigation (If Equipped)

“Navigation” : Begin a dialog to enterspecific destination information.

“Navigation Commands” : Begin adialog to enter specific destinationinformation.

“Address” : Begin a dialog to enter aspecific destination address, whichincludes the entire address consistingof the house number, street name,city, state/province, and country. Donot include the ZIP code.

“Place of Interest” : Begin a dialog toenter a destination Place of Interestcategory or major brand name.

The name must be precisely spoken.Nicknames or short names for thebusinesses will not likely be found.Lesser known businesses might haveto be located by category, such as fastfood, hotels, or banks.

“Navigate to Contact” : Begin adialog to enter a specific destinationcontact name.

“Cancel Route” : End route guidance.

“Take Me Home” : Create a route to astored home location.

Voice Recognition for the Phone

“Call <contact name>” : Initiate a callto a stored contact. The commandmay include location if the contacthas location numbers stored.

“Call <contact> At Home,” “AtWork,” “On Mobile,” or “OnOther” : Initiate a call to a storedcontact and location at home, at work,on mobile device, or on anotherphone.

“Call <cell phone number>” : Initiatea call to a cell phone number of sevendigits, 10 digits, or three digitemergency numbers.

“Pair Phone” : Begin the Bluetoothpairing process. Follow theinstructions on the infotainmentdisplay.

“Redial” : Initiate a call to the lastdialed number.

“Switch Phone” : Select a differentconnected cell phone for outgoingcalls.

“Voice Keypad” : Begin a dialog toenter special numbers likeinternational numbers. The numbers



can be entered in groups of digits witheach group of digits being repeatedback by the system. If the group ofdigits is not correct, the command“Delete” will remove the last group ofdigits and allow them to be re-entered.Once the entire number has beenentered, the command “Call” will startdialing the number.

Phone Assistant VoiceRecognition

Press and hold g on the steeringwheel controls to pass through andlaunch Google phone assistant or Siri.

For the low radio, whether connectedby Bluetooth or phone projection, theonly available voice recognition iseither Siri (iPhone) or the GoogleAssistant (Android).

Performance DataRecorder (PDR)If equipped, the PDR icon displays onthe Home Page.

Important Information

Use of the PDR may be prohibited orlegally restricted in certain countriesand situations. Ensure compliancewith applicable laws and regulations,including, but not limited to: privacylaws, laws related to camerasurveillance and recordings, roadtraffic and security laws, and laws onthe protection of publicity andpersonality rights.. Do not use the PDR if it causesdistraction.

. Do not rely on camera footage tosteer the vehicle.

. Comply with any notice andconsent requirements beforecapturing and/or recording thevoices or images of other persons orbefore collecting otherpersonal data.

. Notify other drivers of your vehicleof the above rules and require themto comply.

. General Motors does not accept anyresponsibility or liability inconnection with use that is notpermitted.

. Law enforcement authorities mayhave the right to seize videorecordings and use them asevidence of criminal/drivingoffenses against you or thirdparties.

The PDR records video, audio, andvehicle data. This data is stored on aremovable SD card in the glove box.

The recorded data is not storedanywhere else and is only accessiblefrom the SD card.

To optimize PDR performance, it isrecommended that the SD card isformatted on a regular basis. Back upall recordings on the SD card prior toformatting. Formatting the SD cardwill delete all saved recordings.

If a system error code is seen on thedisplay, such as "System Error Code####", please check the health of theSD card. It may need to bereformatted or replaced. If the issuepersists, please see your dealer.

To begin, insert a FAT32 formatted SDcard, Class 10 required, 8, 16, or 32 GBrecommended, into the glove box SDcard reader.



Touch the PDR icon to access the PDRmenu. The options displayed are:

Start Recording

If the system is unable to beginrecording, the Start Recording buttonis grayed out.

Touch Start Recording to beginrecording. After recording begins, thisbutton changes to Stop Recording.Touch to stop the recording session.

The recording must be stopped andthe file closed before removing the SDcard, or the recording cannot bereviewed.

The elapsed time will show whenrecording.

The following errors or warnings maybe displayed while recording:. Storage Full. No Storage Available. System Error. SD Card Error. SD Card Speed Insufficient. GPS Accuracy Warning. SD Card Write Protected

Video Overlay

Touch Video Overlay to display themenu screen.

Touching preview provides a livepreview of the overlay selected.

Select one:. None. Sport. Track. Timing

None:

No vehicle data displays on top of therecorded video. Vehicle data is stillavailable with the video whenaccessed in the toolbox software. Seewww.cadillac.com to downloadToolbox Software.



Sport:

Displays these vehicle metrics:. Vehicle Speed: Up to three digits aredisplayed in km/h or MPHdepending on vehicle settings.

. Engine Revolutions Per Minute(rpm): The vertical line and triangleshow current rpm’s. As the rpm’sincrease, the backfill follows.

. Transmission State (Current Gear):Transmissions display 1, 2, etc.

. Lateral G-Force Graphic: Left andRight G-Forces are displayed. Thegraphic fills to the left or the rightdepending on the measure value.The measured G-Force displays as anumber at the top of the graphic.

. Event Odometer: This displays thedistance driven since the recordingbegan.

Track:

Displays these vehicle metrics:. Vehicle Speed: Same as Sport.. GPS Tracking Map: Shows thevehicle’s current position relative toa known route.

. Engine Revolutions Per Minute(rpm): The vertical line and triangleshow current rpm’s. As the rpm’sincrease, the backfill follows.

. Transmission State (Current Gear):Same as Sport.

. Friction Bubble Graphic: Lateral andlongitudinal G-Forces are displayedas a dot within a bubble. A red dotdisplays when the vehicle starts

braking and turns green when thevehicle accelerates. The dot is whitewhen the vehicle is not moving.A white dot is the default.

. Brake and Throttle Graphic:Displays the percentage value ofbrake and throttle pedal positionfrom 0–100%.

. Steering Angle: The graphic fillsfrom the center to the left or rightdepending on the direction ofsteering. The numerical steeringangle displays below the graphic.

. Active Handling Active Indicator:The graphic only displays if theactive handling systems areactivated.

. Performance Traction Management(PTM) Mode: Displays the currentPTM mode. The options are Wet,Dry, Sport 1, Sport 2, or Race.

. Current Lap Time: Displays theelapsed lap time if the finish line isdefined and the vehicle has crossedthe defined finish line at least once.

. Event Odometer: This displays thedistance driven since the recordingbegan.


180 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM. Drive Mode: Displays the vehicle’scurrent drive mode.

Timing:

Displays these vehicle metrics:. Vehicle Speed: Same as Sport.. Engine Revolutions Per Minute(rpm): Same as Sport.

. Transmission State (Current Gear):Same as Sport.

. 0–100 km/h (0–60 mph), 0–200 km/h (0–100 mph), 400 m (1/4th mi), and 0–200–0 km/h (0–100–0 mph): The timer starts recordingas soon as the vehicle accelerates.As the vehicle passes each speedand distance milestone, it isdisplayed on the overlay.

. Throttle Position: Displaysthe percentage of throttle appliedfrom 0–100%.

. Active Handling Active Indicator:The graphic only displays if theactive handling systems areactivated.

Lap Timing

Touch Lap Timing on the PDR tab todisplay the track selection screen.. Select Custom Track, then Learn tocreate a new custom track for laptiming.

. Select Custom Track, then Relearn ifa custom track has already beendefined and is available on thestorage device.

. Only one track can be learnedduring each recording session. Tolearn a new track, end the currentrecording and start a new one.

Custom Track Learning - Circuit

. Select Circuit, when at the startingline, as the track type. The startingline is located at the current vehicleposition.

. Circuit track learning will completeautomatically when the vehiclecrosses the start/finish line.

. Touching X in the upper rightcorner will exit the track learningprocess.



Custom Track Learning - Autocross

. Select Autocross, when at thestarting line, as the track type. Thestarting line is located at thecurrent vehicle position.

. Drive along the course and pressFinish when the vehicle has reachedthe Finish Line.

. Touching X in the upper rightcorner will exit the track learningprocess.

Lap Timing - Saved Tracks. Saved tracks will be named by thePDR as custom.gpx.

. Saved tracks can be renamed byplacing the SD card in a computerand overwriting the time/date name

to a user-friendly name. Do notchange or delete the fileextension (.gpx).

To begin timing an existing track,scroll to the desired track and selectOK. The PDR tab will be displayed.

Recordings

Touch the Recordings tab. Therecordings will be displayed with themost recent on top. Select therecording to start playback.

Recordings may be deleted byselecting the trash can. Select yes todelete or no to cancel.

Video Playback is not allowed whilethe vehicle is moving.

Tap on the screen while the video isplaying to display the video playbackcontrols.

Video Scrubber : Changes theposition and playback. The length ofthe bar corresponds to the time of thevideo. Advance or rewind the video bydragging along the bar.



Settings

Touch the Settings tab to view theSettings menu.. Audio Recording - Select on or offto record audio with the recordedvideo.

. Automatic Recording - When on,the PDR will automatically beginrecording whenever the vehicle is inthe Run Power Mode.Configurations include:

‐ Automatic Recording VideoQuality

‐ While in Valet Mode only

‐ Whether to allow recordingoverwrite when the storage is full

. Video Quality - Low (480p), or High(1080p). Higher quality will result inlarger recording files.

. Software Information - DisplaysPDR Software Information andVersion numbers.

. SD Card Information - Size,Remaining Memory, Format, andSpeed.

Toolbox

See www.cadillac.com to downloadToolbox Software.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)The Bluetooth-capable system caninteract with many mobile devices,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in ahands-free mode.

. Sharing of the device’s address bookor contact list with the vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction, beforedriving, and with the vehicle parked:. Become familiar with the features ofthe mobile device. Organize thephone book and contact lists clearly

and delete duplicate or rarely usedentries. If possible, program speeddial or other shortcuts.

. Review the controls and operationof the infotainment system.

. Pair mobile device(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work with allmobile devices. See “Pairing” later inthis section.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth system canuse a Bluetooth-capable mobile devicewith a Hands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The infotainmentsystem and voice recognition are usedto control the system. The system canbe used while the ignition is on or inACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all mobile devices supportall functions and not all mobiledevices work with the Bluetoothsystem. See my.cadillac.com for moreinformation about compatible mobiledevices.

Controls

Use the controls on the center stackand the steering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.



Steering Wheel Controls

g : Press to answer incoming callsand start voice recognition on yourconnected Bluetooth mobile device.

i : Press to end a call, decline a call,or cancel an operation. Press to muteor unmute the infotainment systemwhen not on a call.

Infotainment System Controls

For information about how to navigatethe menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Using theSystem 0 146.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth mobiledevice system, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. The volume level while on amobile device call can be adjusted bypressing the steering wheel controls orthe volume control on the centerstack. The adjusted volume levelremains in memory for later calls. Thevolume cannot be lowered beyond acertain level.

Bluetooth (Pairing andUsing a Phone)

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled mobile devicemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. See themobile device manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the device.

Pairing Information. If no mobile device has beenconnected, the Phone main page onthe infotainment display will showthe Connect Phone option. Touchthis option to connect. Another wayto connect is to touch the Phonestab at the top right of the displayand then touch Add Phone.

. A Bluetooth smartphone with musiccapability can be paired to thevehicle as a smartphone and amusic player at the same time.

. Up to 10 devices can be paired tothe Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to be completedonce, unless the pairing informationon the cell phone changes or thecell phone is deleted from thesystem.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the paired cellphone that is set to First toConnect. If there is no cell phoneset to First to Connect, it will link tothe cell phone which was used last.To link to a different paired cellphone, see “Linking to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Make sure Bluetooth has beenenabled on the cell phone beforethe pairing process is started.

2. Touch the Phone icon on the HomePage or the phone icon on theshortcut tray near the bottom ofthe display.

3. Touch Phones at the top of theinfotainment display. There is alsoa Connect Phones option in themiddle of the Phone display whichwill shortcut to the PhoneList menu.



4. Touch Add Phone.

5. Select the vehicle name shown onthe infotainment display from yourcell phone’s Bluetooth Settings list.

6. Follow the instructions on the cellphone to confirm the six-digit codeshowing on the infotainmentdisplay and touch Pair. The code onthe cell phone and infotainmentdisplay will need to beacknowledged for a successful pair.

7. Start the pairing process on the cellphone to be paired to the vehicle.See the cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for information on thisprocess. Once the cell phone ispaired, it will show underConnected.

8. If the vehicle name does notappear on your cell phone, thereare a few ways to start the pairingprocess over:. Turn the cell phone off and then

back on.. Go back to the beginning of the

Phone menus on theinfotainment display and restartthe pairing process.

. Reset the cell phone, but thisstep should be done as a lasteffort.

9. If the cell phone prompts to acceptconnection or allow phone bookdownload, touch Always Acceptand Allow. The phone book maynot be available if not accepted.

10. Repeat Steps 1−8 to pair additionalcell phones.

First to Connect Paired Phones

If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the paired cellphone that is set as First to Connect.To enable a paired cell phone as theFirst to Connect phone:

1. Make sure the cell phone isturned on.

2. Touch Settings, then touch System.

3. Touch Phones to access all pairedand all connected cell phones andmobile devices.

4. Touch the information icon to theright of the cell phone to open thecell phone’s settings menu.

5. Touch the First to Connect option,to enable the setting for thatdevice.

Cell phones and mobile devices can beadded, removed, connected, anddisconnected. A sub-menu will displaywhenever a request is made to add ormanage cell phones and mobiledevices.

Secondary Phone

A cell phone can be enabled as aSecondary Phone by touching theinformation icon to the right of thepaired cell phone name to open thephone settings menu. If a cell phoneis enabled as a Secondary Phone, itcan connect simultaneously alongsideanother Bluetooth mobile device. Indoing so, the Secondary Phone will belabeled as Incoming Calls. This meansthe mobile device can only receivecalls. The Address Book of aSecondary Phone will not be availableand hands-free outgoing calls cannotbe placed using this cell phone.

If needed, touch the Secondary Phonewhile in the Phones list to swap it intothe Outgoing and Incoming role. This



role makes it possible to placeoutgoing calls from the Contacts andRecents list.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones


2. Touch Phones.

Disconnecting a Connected Phone

1. Touch the Phone icon on theHome Page.

2. Touch Phones.

3. Touch the information icon next tothe connected cell phone or mobiledevice to show the cell phone’s ormobile device’s information display.

4. Touch Disconnect.

Deleting a Paired Phone


2. Touch Phones.

3. Touch the information icon next tothe connected cell phone to displaythe cell phone’s or mobile device’sinformation display.

4. Touch Forget Device.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different cell phone, thenew cell phone must be in the vehicleand paired to the Bluetooth system.


2. Touch Phones.

3. Touch the new cell phone to link tofrom the not connected phone list.See “First to Connect PairedPhones” and “Secondary Phone”previously in this section.

Switching to Handset orHandsfree Mode

To switch between handset orhandsfree mode:. While the active call is hands-free,touch the Handset option to switchto the handset mode.

The mute icon will not be availableor functional while Handset mode isactive.

. While the active call is on thehandset, touch the Handset optionto switch to the hands-free mode.

Making a Call Using Contactsand Recent Calls

Calls can be made through theBluetooth system using personal cellphone contact information for all cellphones that support the Phone Bookfeature. Become familiar with the cellphone settings and operation. Verifythe cell phone supports this feature.

The Contacts menu accesses thephone book stored in the cell phone.

The Recents menu accesses therecents call list from your cell phone.

To make a call using theContacts menu:


2. Touch Contacts.



3. The Contacts list can be searchedby using the first character. TouchA-Z on the infotainment display toscroll through the list of names.

Touch the name to call.

4. Touch the desired contact numberto call.

To make a call using theRecents menu:

1. Touch Phone on the Home Page.

2. Touch Recents.

3. Touch the name or number to call.

Making a Call Using the Keypad

To make a call by dialing thenumbers:


2. Touch Keypad and enter a phonenumber.

3. Touch # on the infotainmentdisplay to start dialing the number.

Searching Contacts Using theKeypad

To search for contacts using thekeypad:


2. Touch Keypad and enter partialphone numbers or contact namesusing the digits on the keypad tosearch.

Results will show on the right sideof the display. Touch one to placea call.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received, theinfotainment system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

There are two ways to accept a call:

. Press g on the steering wheelcontrols.

. Touch Answer on the infotainmentdisplay.

Declining a Call

There are two ways to decline a call:

. Pressi on the steering wheelcontrols.

. Touch Ignore on the infotainmentdisplay.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported on theBluetooth cell phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Press g to answer, then touch Switchon the infotainment display.

Declining a Call

Pressi to decline, then touchIgnore on the infotainment display

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls, touch Phoneon the Home Page to display CallView. While in Call View, touch thecall information of the call on hold tochange calls.



Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must be supportedon the Bluetooth cell phone andenabled by the wireless service carrierto work.

To start a three-way call while in acurrent call:

1. In the Call View, touch Add Call toadd another call.

2. Initiate the second call by selectingfrom Recents, Contacts, or Keypad.

3. When the second call is active,touch the merge icon to conferencethe three-way call together.

Ending a Call. Pressi on the steering wheelcontrols.

. Touch # on the infotainmentdisplay, next to a call, to end onlythat call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system. Use the Keypad toenter the number.

Apple CarPlay andAndroid AutoIf equipped, Android Auto and/orApple CarPlay capability may beavailable through a compatiblesmartphone. If available, the AndroidAuto and Apple CarPlay icons willchange from gray to color on theHome Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

To use Android Auto and/or AppleCarPlay:

For Wired Phone Projection

1. Download the Android Auto app toyour smartphone from the GooglePlay store. There is no app requiredfor Apple CarPlay.

2. Connect your Android phone orApple iPhone by using thefactory-provided phone USB cable

and plugging into a USB data port.For best performance, it is highlyrecommended to use the device’sfactory-provided USB cable, whichshould be replaced after significantwear to maintain connectionquality. Aftermarket or third-partycables may not work.

3. When the phone is first connectedto activate Apple CarPlay orAndroid Auto, accept the termsand conditions on both theinfotainment system and thephone.

4. Follow the instructions on thephone.

The Android Auto and Apple CarPlayicons on the Home Page willilluminate depending on thesmartphone. Android Auto and/orApple CarPlay may automaticallylaunch upon USB connection. If not,touch the Android Auto or AppleCarPlay icon on the Home Page tolaunch.

Press { on the center stack to returnto the Home Page.



For Wireless Phone Projection

Verify your phone is wirelesscompatible by visiting the GoogleAndroid Auto or Apple CarPlaysupport page.

1. Download the Android Auto app toyour smartphone from the GooglePlay store. There is no app requiredfor Apple CarPlay.

2. For first time connection, there aretwo ways to set up wirelessprojection:. Connect your Android phone or

Apple iPhone by using thefactory-provided phone USBcable and plugging into a USBdata port. For best performance,it is highly recommended to usethe device’s factory-providedUSB cable, which should bereplaced after significant wearto maintain connection quality.Aftermarket or third-partycables may not work.

. Connecting the phone overBluetooth. See Bluetooth(Overview) 0 182 orBluetooth (Pairing and Using aPhone) 0 183.

3. Make sure WiFi is turned on thephone for wireless projectionto work.

4. When the phone is first connectedto activate Apple CarPlay orAndroid Auto, agree to the termsand conditions on both theinfotainment system and thephone.

5. Follow the instructions on thephone.

The Android Auto and Apple CarPlayicons on the Home Page willilluminate depending on thesmartphone. Android Auto and/orApple CarPlay may automaticallylaunch upon wireless connection.If not, touch the Android Auto orApple CarPlay icon on the Home Pageto launch.

Wireless CarPlay and/or WirelessAndroid Auto may experienceoccasional service disruption due tooutside Wi-Fi interference.

To disconnect the phones wirelessprojection:

1. Select Settings from theHome Page.

2. Select Phones

3. Touch 4 next to the phone to bedisconnected.

4. Turn off Apple CarPlay orAndroid Auto.

Press { on the center stack to returnto the Home Page.

Features are subject to change. Forfurther information on how to set upAndroid Auto and Apple CarPlay inthe vehicle, see my.cadillac.com.

Android Auto is provided byGoogle and is subject to Google’sterms and privacy policy. AppleCarPlay is provided by Apple and issubject to Apple’s terms and privacypolicy. Data plan rates apply. ForAndroid Auto support and to see ifyour phone is compatible, seehttps://support.google.com/androidauto. For Apple CarPlaysupport and to see if your phone iscompatible, see www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Apple or Google may changeor suspend availability at any time.Android Auto, Android, Google, Google



Play, and other marks are trademarksof Google Inc.; Apple CarPlay is atrademark of Apple Inc.

Press { on the center stack to exitAndroid Auto or Apple CarPlay. Toenter back into Android Auto or AppleCarPlay, press and hold { on thecenter stack.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto canbe disabled from the infotainmentsystem. To do this, touch Home,Settings, and then touch the Apps tabalong the top of the display. Use theOn/Off toggled to turn off AppleCarPlay or Android Auto.

SettingsCertain settings can be managed inthe Owner Center sites when anaccount is established, and may bemodified if other users have accessedthe vehicle or created accounts. Thismay result in changes to the securityor functionality of the infotainmentsystem. Some settings may also betransferred to a new vehicle,

if equipped. For instructions, in theU.S. see my.cadillac.com or in Canadasee mycadillac.ca or moncadillac.ca.

Refer to the User Terms and PrivacyStatement for important details. Toview, touch the Settings icon on theHome Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

The settings menu may be organizedinto four categories. Select the desiredcategory by touching System, Apps,Vehicle, or Personal.

To access the personalization menus:

1. Touch Settings on the Home Pageon the infotainment display.

2. Touch the desired category todisplay a list of available options.

3. Touch to select the desired featuresetting.

4. Touch the options on theinfotainment display to disable orenable a feature.

5. Touch z to go to the top level ofthe Settings menu.

System


Time / Date

Use the following features to set theclock:. Automatic Time and Date: TouchOff or On to enable or disableautomatic update of the time anddate. When this feature is on, thetime and date cannot bemanually set.

. Set Time: Touch to manually set thetime using the controls on theinfotainment display.

. Set Date: Touch to manually set thedate using the controls on theinfotainment display.

. Automatic Time Zone: If equipped,touch Off or On to disable or enableautomatic update of the time zonebased on vehicle location. Whenthis feature is on, the time zonecannot be manually set.

. Select Time Zone: Touch tomanually set the time zone. Toucha time zone from the list.


190 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM. Use 24-hour Format: Touch tospecify the clock format shown.

Touch Off or On to disable orenable.

Language

This will set the display language usedon the infotainment display. It mayalso use the selected language forvoice recognition and audio feedback.Touch Language and touch theappropriate language.

Phones

Touch to connect to a different cellphone or mobile device source,disconnect a cell phone or mediadevice, or delete a cell phone or mediadevice.

Wi-Fi Networks

This will show connected andavailable Wi-Fi networks.

If a 4G LTE data package is not activeon the vehicle, the infotainmentsystem can be connected to anexternal protected Wi-Fi network,such as a mobile device or homehotspot, to utilize connected services.

Wi-Fi Hotspot

Touch and the following may display:. Wi-Fi Services: This allows devicesto use the vehicle hotspot.

Touch the controls on theinfotainment display to disable orenable.

. Wi-Fi Name: Touch to change thevehicle Wi-Fi name.

. Wi-Fi Password: Touch to changethe vehicle Wi-Fi password.

. Connected Devices: Touch to showconnected devices.

. Share Hotspot Data: Touch On toallow devices to use the vehiclehotspot and its data, or touch Off toallow devices to only use the vehiclehotspot but not its data.

Privacy

Touch and the following may display:. Location Services: This settingenables or disables sharing ofvehicle location outside the vehicle.Emergency services will not beaffected when Off is selected.

. Data Services: If equipped, thissetting determines if data sharingcan be used by features includingWi-Fi, Hotspot, and applications.Touch Off to disable data services.Emergency services and phone calls,such as calls with OnStar Advisorsor others, will not be affected whenOff is selected.

. Voice Recognition Sharing: Thissetting determines if voicecommands can be shared with acloud-based voice recognitionsystem. Touch Off to prevent thesharing and possible recording ofyour voice commands with thissystem. This may limit the system’sability to understand your voicecommands and may disable somefeatures.

. Types: This setting lists allAndroid-defined as dangerouspermissions currently used by theinfotainment system, the number ofapplications that have requestedthis permission, and the number ofapplications that are allowed to usethis permission.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 191. Used By Applications: This settinglists all applications that arerequested or are usingAndroid-defined as dangerouspermissions. Only requested andactive permissions are shown.

Display

Touch and the following may display:. Mode: This adjusts the appearanceof the navigation map view and anydownloaded apps optimized for dayor night time conditions. Set toAuto for the display toautomatically adjust based onbright/dark conditions.

Touch Auto, Day, or Night to adjustthe display.

. Calibrate Touchscreen: Touch tocalibrate the infotainment displayand follow the prompts.

. Turn Display Off: Touch to turn thedisplay off. Touch anywhere on theinfotainment display or press anyinfotainment control on the centerstack again to turn the display on.

Sounds

Touch and the following may display:

. Maximum Startup Volume: Thisfeature adjusts the maximumvolume of the infotainment systemwhen you start the vehicle. To setthe maximum startup volume,touch the controls on theinfotainment display to increase ordecrease.

. Audio Cues: This feature determinesif sounds play when theinfotainment system starts up andshuts down. This feature can beturned off or on.

. Set Audio Cue Volume: This settingcontrols the volume of Audio Cuesplayed on startup and shutdown.Touch the controls on theinfotainment display to increase ordecrease.

Voice

Touch and the following may display:. Confirm More/Less: This settingspecifies how often the voicerecognition system confirmscommands. Touch Confirm More tohave the system check with youmore often before acting on yourcommands.

. Prompt Length: This settingspecifies the amount of detail thevoice recognition system provideswhen giving you feedback. TouchAuto to have the systemautomatically adjust to your speechhabits. Touch Informative, Short,or Auto.

. Audio Feedback Speed: Touch Slow,Medium, or Fast to adjust howquickly the voice recognition systemspeaks.

. Friendly Prompts: This settingadjusts the formality of voiceprompts. Touch Off for shorterprompts. Touch On to hear promptswith more personality. Touch Autoto have the prompt match yourcommand style.

. Tutorial Mode: Touch Off or On toprovide tutorial feedback on thedisplay.

. Allow Prompt Interruptions: Thissetting controls whether voicecommands can be spoken beforevoice prompts finish. Turn this onto speak commands without hearingthe full prompt. Speaking while theprompt is still playing willimmediately stop playing the



current prompt and recognize yourcommand. Background noise maycause accidental interruptions.Touch Off or On.

Favorites

Touch and the following may display:. Manage Favorites: Touch to displaya list of Audio, Phone, andNavigation favorites.

Favorites can be moved, renamed,or deleted.

To move, touch and hold thefavorite, and then drag up or downto rearrange the position.

. Set Number of Audio Favorites:Touch to select how many favoritespages can be viewed from the audioapplication. The Auto setting willautomatically adjust this numberbased on the number of favoritesyou have saved. Touch Auto, 5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40.

Updates

If equipped, the vehicle can downloadand install select software updatesover a wireless connection. Thesystem will prompt for certain

updates to be downloaded andinstalled. There is also an option tocheck for updates manually.

To manually check for updates, touchSettings on the Home Page and selectthe System tab. Go to the VehicleSoftware section and touch Updates.Follow the on-screen prompts. Thesteps to check for, download, andinstall updates may vary by vehicle.

The vehicle can be used normallyduring the software download. Oncethe download is complete, there maybe a prompt to accept the installationof the update upon the next ignitioncycle or the next time the vehicle isshifted into P (Park). For mostupdates, the vehicle will be disabledand cannot be driven during theinstallation. The system will delivermessages indicating success or errorduring and after the download andinstallation processes.

Downloading Over-the-Air vehiclesoftware updates requires Internetconnectivity, which can be accessedthrough the vehicle’s built-in 4G LTEconnection, if equipped and active.If required, data plans are provided by

a third party. Optionally, a secureWi-Fi hotspot such as a compatiblemobile device hotspot, home hotspot,or public hotspot can be used.Applicable data rates may apply.

To connect the infotainment systemto a secured mobile device hotspot,home hotspot, or public hotspot,touch Settings on the Home Page,select the System tab, followed byWi-Fi Networks. Select the appropriateWi-Fi network, and follow theon-screen prompts. Download speedsmay vary.

On most compatible mobile devices,activation of the Wi-Fi hotspot is inthe Settings menu under MobileNetwork Sharing, Personal Hotspot,Mobile Hotspot, or similar.

Availability of Over-the-Air softwareupdates varies by vehicle and country.Features are subject to change. Formore information on this feature, seemy.cadillac.com/learn.



Preferences

Touch the controls on theinfotainment display to disable orenable the download of new updatesin the background.

About

Touch to view the infotainmentsystem software information.

Running Applications

Touch to see a complete list ofapplications that are currentlyrunning on the infotainment system.

Return to Factory Settings

Touch and the following may display:. Reset Vehicle Settings: Resets allvehicle settings for the current user.

Touch Reset or Cancel.. Erase Settings and Personal Data:Erases app data settings, userprofiles, and personal data includingnavigation and mobile device data.

Touch Erase or Cancel.

. Clear Default Applications: Resetspreferred applications that havebeen set to open when selecting afunction. No application data willbe lost.

Touch Clear or Cancel.

Apps


Android Auto

This feature allows you to interactdirectly with your mobile device onthe infotainment display. See AppleCarPlay and Android Auto 0 187.


Apple CarPlay

This feature allows you to interactdirectly with your mobile device onthe infotainment display. See AppleCarPlay and Android Auto 0 187.


Apps

Touch and the following may display:. Update Apps Automatically: Thisallows downloaded applications tobe updated automatically.


. About Apps: Touch to view theversions of the apps software.

Audio

Depending on the current audiosource, different options will beavailable.

Touch and the following may display:. Tone Settings: Touch to adjustEqualizer, Fade/Balance, or SoundMode. See “Infotainment SystemSound Menu” in AM-FM Radio0 149.

. Adaptive Volume: This featureadjusts the volume based on thevehicle speed.

Touch Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.


194 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM. Bose AudioPilot NoiseCompensation Technology (IfEquipped): This feature adjusts thevolume based on the noise in thevehicle and the speed.

Touch Off or On.. Manage Favorites: Touch to displaya list of Audio, Mobile Devices, andNavigation favorites.

Favorites can be moved, renamed,or deleted.

To move, touch and hold thefavorite, and then drag up or downto rearrange the position.

. Set Number of Audio Favorites:Touch to select how many favoritespages can be viewed from the audioapplication. The Auto setting willautomatically adjust this numberbased on the number of favoritesyou have saved. Touch Auto, 5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30, 35, or 40.

. RDS: This allows the Radio DataSystem (RDS) to be turned on or off.


. HD Radio: This allows HD Radioreception to be turned on or off.


. Explicit Content Filter: This settingallows access to explicit contentSiriusXM channels.

Touch Off or On.. Manage Phones: Select to connectto a different phone source,disconnect a phone, or delete aphone.

. Reset Music Index: This allows themusic index to be reset if you arehaving difficulty accessing all of themedia content on your device.

Touch Yes or No.

Climate

Touch and the following may display:. Auto Fan Speed: This settingspecifies the amount of airflowwhen the climate control fan settingis Auto Fan.

Touch Low, Medium, or High.

. Air Quality Sensor: This settingswitches the system intoRecirculation Mode based on thequality of the outside air.

Touch Off, Low Sensitivity, or HighSensitivity.

. Auto Cooled Seats: This settingautomatically turns on andregulates the ventilated seats whenthe cabin temperature is warm.


. Auto Heated Seats: This settingautomatically turns on andregulates the heated seats when thecabin temperature is cool. The autoheated seats can be turned off byusing the heated seat controls onthe center stack.


. Auto Defog: This settingautomatically turns the frontdefogger on when the vehicle engineis started.




. Auto Rear Defog: This settingautomatically turns the reardefogger on when the vehicle engineis started.


. Ionizer: This setting purifies the airin the interior of the vehicle..


Navigation

Touch and the following may display:. Destination Card Preferences. Map Preferences. Route Preferences. Navigation Voice Control. Traffic Preferences. Alert Preferences. Fuel Grade Preferences. Manage History. Predictive Navigation (if equipped). About

See Using the Navigation System 0 158.

Phone

Touch and the following may display:. My Number: Displays the cell phonenumber of the Bluetooth connecteddevice.

. Active Call View: Shows active calldisplay when answering a call.


. Privacy: Only show call alerts in theinstrument cluster.

Touch Off or On.. Sort Contacts: Touch to sort by firstor last name.

. Re-sync Device Contacts: Allows thedevice contacts to re-sync if you arehaving difficulty accessing all of thecontacts on your cell phone.

. Delete All Vehicle Contacts: Touchto delete all vehicle stored contacts.

. OnStar Phone TTY Mode: Thisenables OnStar cell phoneTTY mode.

Touch Disable or Enable.

SiriusXM

Touch and the following may display:. Account Information: Displays theaccount information andsubscription information.

. Listener Options: Based on thecurrent vehicle profile selected.Touch and the following maydisplay:. SiriusXM Favorites: Favorites

shown can be moved or deleted.. Listener Settings: Selections

include hide explicit language,channels and content, resetlistening history, and start songsat the beginning when tuning toa music channel.

. System Settings: Enable or disableSiriusXM location services. Alsoshows radio ID.

. Contact SiriusXM: Displays radio IDand phone number to call SiriusXMCustomer Care.

. SiriusXM Policies: Showsinformation on the CustomerAgreement and Privacy Policy.



Vehicle

This menu allows adjustment ofdifferent vehicle features. See VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

Personal

If equipped, this menu allowsadjustment of different user profilesettings. See “Users” in Using theSystem 0 146 for information onsetting up user profiles.


Name

Touch to edit your user name that willbe displayed in the vehicle.

Vehicle Account Information

Touch to view the vehicle accountinformation and to change theaccount password.

An “unverified user account” pop-upwill display until the accountinformation verification process hasbeen completed on the Internet.Check your registered e-mail accountfor an activation e-mail to completethe verification process.

Profile Picture

Touch to choose or change yourprofile picture.

Profile Identifiers

Touch to have the vehicle recognizethe identifier you choose.

Touch Vehicle Key 1 and/orVehicle Key 2.

If the remote key is lost or stolen, seeyour dealer.

Security

Touch to have your profile securedwith a Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN).

Touch No or Yes.

Vehicle Name

Touch to edit your vehicle name.

Vehicle Account

Touch to view the vehicle accountinformation and to change theaccount password.

Delete Profile

Touch to remove the profile from thevehicle.

Touch Remove or Cancel.

Teen DriverIf equipped, this allows multiple keysto be registered for beginner drivers toencourage safe driving habits. Whenthe vehicle is started with a TeenDriver key, it will automaticallyactivate certain safety systems, allowsetting of some features, and limit theuse of others. The Report Card willrecord vehicle data about drivingbehavior that can be viewed later.When the vehicle is started with aregistered key, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays a message thatTeen Driver is active.

To access:

1. Touch Settings on the Home Page,then touch Vehicle, and then TeenDriver.

2. Create a Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN) by choosing afour-digit PIN. Re-enter the PIN toconfirm. To change the PIN, touchChange PIN.

The PIN is required to:. Register or unregister keys.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 197. Change Teen Driver settings.. Change or clear the TeenDriver PIN.

. Access or delete Report Card data.

Register keys to activate TeenDriver and assign restrictions tothe key:

Any vehicle key can be registered, upto a maximum of eight keys. Label thekey to tell it apart from theother keys.

For a pushbutton start system:


2. For automatic transmissions, thevehicle must be in P (Park). Formanual transmissions, the vehiclemust be stopped with the parkingbrake set.

3. From the Settings menu, touchVehicle and then Teen Driver.

4. Enter the PIN.

5. Place the remote key you wish toregister in the rear cupholder. Thekey does not need to be the one

that started the vehicle. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7 for rear cupholderlocation.

6. From the Teen Driver menu, touchSetup Keys.. If the remote key has not

previously been registered, theoption to add the key displays.Touch Setup and a confirmationmessage displays. Teen Driverrestrictions will be appliedwhenever this key is used tooperate the vehicle.

. If the remote key has alreadybeen registered, the option toremove the key displays.If Remove is touched, thetransmitter key is no longerregistered. A confirmationmessage displays, and TeenDriver restrictions will not beapplied if this transmitter key isused to operate the vehicle.

In vehicles with a pushbutton startsystem, if a Teen Driver and anon-Teen Driver key are both presentat start up, the vehicle will recognize

the non-Teen Driver key to start thevehicle. The Teen Driver settings willnot be active.

Manage Settings

Buckle To Drive : When turned ON,Buckle to Drive prevents the driverfrom shifting out of P (Park) for aperiod of time if driver seat belt, andon some vehicles, the passenger seatbelt, is not buckled. See Buckle ToDrive 0 48 andVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Audio Volume Limit : Allows theaudio volume limit to be turned on oroff. Touch Set Audio Volume Limit tochoose the maximum allowable audiovolume level.

Set Audio Volume Limit : Allows amaximum radio volume to be set. Usethe arrows to choose the maximumallowable level for the audio volume.

Teen Driver Speed Limiter : Limitsthe maximum speed of the vehicle.When the speed limiter is turned onand the vehicle is started with a TeenDriver key, the DIC displays a messagethat the top speed is limited.



On certain vehicles, when the SpeedLimiter is turned ON, the vehicle’smaximum acceleration will be limited.The DIC will display a message thatthe acceleration is limited.

Teen Driver Speed Warning : Allowsthe speed warning to be turned on oroff. Touch Set Teen Driver SpeedWarning to set the warning speed.

Set Teen Driver Speed Warning :Displays a warning in the DIC whenexceeding a selectable speed. Choosethe desired speed warning level. Thespeed warning does not limit thespeed of the vehicle.

SiriusXM Explicit Content Filter (ifequipped) : Allows the SiriusXMExplicit Content Filter to be turnedON or OFF. When ON, the teen driverwill not be able to listen to SiriusXMstations that contain explicit content,and the Explicit Content Filterselection in the Audio Settings will beunavailable for change.

When Teen Driver is Active:. The radio will mute when thedriver, or in some vehicles, the frontpassenger seat belt, is not buckled.The audio from any device paired tothe vehicle will also be muted.

. If an object, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is on thefront passenger seat, it could causethe radio to mute. If this happens,remove the object from the seat. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 61.

. Some safety systems, such asForward Collision Alert, if equipped,cannot be turned off.

. The gap setting for the ForwardCollision Alert and Adaptive CruiseControl, if equipped, cannot bechanged.

. When trying to change a safetyfeature that is not configurable inTeen Driver, the DIC displays amessage indicating that Teen Driveris active and the action is notavailable.

. Super Cruise, if equipped, is notavailable.

. Enhanced Low Fuel Warning (ifequipped) – When the vehicle is lowon fuel, the low fuel light on theinstrument cluster flashes and theDIC low fuel warning cannot bedismissed.

. Do not tow a trailer.

Report Card

The vehicle owner must secure thedriver’s consent to record certainvehicle data when the vehicle is drivenwith a registered Teen Driver key.There is one Report Card per vehicle.Data is only recorded when aregistered Teen Driver key is used tooperate the vehicle.

The Report Card data is collected fromthe time Teen Driver is activated orthe last time the Report Card wasreset. The following items may berecorded:. Distance Driven – the total distancedriven.

. Maximum Speed – the maximumvehicle speed detected.

. Overspeed Warnings – the numberof times the speed warning settingwas exceeded.


INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 199. Wide Open Throttle – the numberof times the accelerator pedal waspressed nearly all the way down.

. Forward Collision Alerts – thenumber of times the driver wasnotified when approaching a vehicleahead too quickly and at potentialrisk for a crash.

. Forward Automatic Braking, alsocalled Automatic EmergencyBraking (if equipped) – the numberof times the vehicle detected that aforward collision was imminent andapplied the brakes.

. Reverse Automatic Braking (ifequipped) – the number of timesthe vehicle detected that a rearwardcollision was imminent and appliedthe brakes.

. Traction Control – the number oftimes the Traction Control Systemactivated to reduce wheel spin orloss of traction.

. Stability Control – the number ofevents which required the use ofelectronic stability control.

. Antilock Braking System Active –The number of Antilock BrakeSystem activations.

. Tailgating Alerts – the number oftimes the driver was alerted forfollowing a vehicle ahead tooclosely.

Report Card Data

Cumulative Data is saved for all tripsuntil the Report Card is reset or untilthe maximum count is exceeded.If the maximum count is exceeded fora Report Card line item, that item willno longer be updated in the ReportCard until it is reset. Each item willreport a maximum of 1,000 counts.The distance driven will report amaximum of 64,374 km (40,000 mi).

To delete Report Card data, do one ofthe following:. From the Report Card display, touchReset.

. Touch Clear All Teen Keys and PINfrom the Teen Driver menu. Thiswill also unregister any Teen Driverkeys and delete the PIN.

Forgotten PIN

See your dealer to reset the PIN.

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement 0 439.

"Made for iPod," and "Made foriPhone," mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod or iPhone,respectively, and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards. Apple is notresponsible for the operation of thisdevice or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please notethat the use of this accessory withiPod or iPhone may affect wirelessperformance. iPhone, iPod, iPodclassic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, andiPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.



If you decide to continue service afteryour trial, your selected subscriptionplan will automatically renewthereafter. You will be charged atthen-current rates. Fees and taxesapply. Please see the SiriusXMCustomer Agreement at siriusxm.comfor complete terms and how to cancel,which includes calling SiriusXM at1-866-635-2349. All fees andprogramming are subject to change.

Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscription feeis consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM service isonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada.

In Canada: Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extreme northernlatitudes. This is beyond the control ofSiriusXM Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice: Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for SiriusXM Satellite Radioreceivers by notifying SiriusXM:. USA Customers — Seewww.siriusxm.com or call1-888-601–6296.

. Canada Customers — Seewww.siriusxm.ca or call1-877-438-9677.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer, hack,manipulate, or otherwise makeavailable any technology or softwareincorporated in receivers compatiblewith the SiriusXM Satellite RadioSystem or that support the SiriusXMwebsite, the Online Service or any ofits content. Furthermore, the AMBERvoice compression software includedin this product is protected by

intellectual property rights includingpatent rights, copyrights, and tradesecrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement fromSiriusXM is required for anyproduct that incorporates SiriusXMTechnology and/or for use of any ofthe SiriusXM marks to bemanufactured, distributed,or marketed in the SiriusXMService Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed, and/or sold in Canada, aseparate agreement is required withCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.(operating as SiriusXM Canada).

TouchSense Technology andTouchSense System 1000 SeriesLicensed from Immersion Corporation.TouchSense System 1000 protectedunder one or more of the U.S. Patents



at the following addresswww.immersion.com/patent-marking.html and otherpatents pending.

Bose

Bose AudioPilot and Bose Centerpointsurround are registered trademarks ofBose Corporation in the U.S. and othercountries.

HD Radio Technology

HD Radio Technology manufacturedunder license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.For patents see http://dts.com/patents.HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and“ARC” logos are registered trademarksor trademarks of iBiquity DigitalCorporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.and any use of such marks by GeneralMotors is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names are thoseof their respective owners.

Java

Java is a registered trademark ofOracle and/or its affiliates.

Schedule I: Gracenote EULA

Music recognition technology andrelated data are provided byGracenote. Gracenote is the industrystandard in music recognitiontechnology and related contentdelivery. For more information seewww.gracenote.com.

Music-related data from Gracenote,Inc., copyright © 2000 to presentGracenote. Gracenote Software,

copyright © 2000 to presentGracenote. One or more patentsowned by Gracenote may apply to thisproduct and service. See theGracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB,MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Poweredby Gracenote" logo are eitherregistered trademarks or trademarksof Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

Gracenote Terms of Use

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California ("Gracenote").The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables thisapplication to do disc or fileidentification and obtainmusic-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation ("Gracenote Data") fromonline servers or embedded databases(collectively, "Gracenote Servers") andto perform other functions. You may



use Gracenote Data only by means ofthe intended End-User functions ofthis application or device.

This application or device maycontain content belonging toGracenote’s providers. If so, all of therestrictions set forth herein withrespect to Gracenote Data shall alsoapply to such content and suchcontent providers shall be entitled toall of the benefits and protections setforth herein that are available toGracenote.

You agree that you will use GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers for your ownpersonal non-commercial use only.You agree not to assign, copy, transferor transmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any third party.YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT ASEXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusivelicense to use the Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers will terminate if you violate

these restrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers,including all ownership rights. Underno circumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment to youfor any information that you provide.You agree that Gracenote may enforceits rights under this Agreementagainst you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries forstatistical purposes. The purpose of arandomly assigned numeric identifieris to allow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. For moreinformation, see the web page for theGracenote Privacy Policy for theGracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each itemof Gracenote Data are licensed to you"AS IS." Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties, expressor implied, regarding the accuracy of

any Gracenote Data. Gracenotereserves the right to delete data fromthe Gracenote Servers or to changedata categories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient. Nowarranty is made that the GracenoteSoftware or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning ofGracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated to provideyou with new enhanced or additionaldata types or categories thatGracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its servicesat any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTEDOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOURUSE OF THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTESERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY



CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOSTPROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

© 2014. Gracenote, Inc. All RightsReserved.

MPEG4–AVC (H.264)

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDERTHE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIOLICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL ANDNON-COMMERCIAL USE OF ACONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE AVCSTANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WASENCODED BY A CONSUMERENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ANDNON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEOPROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEAVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE ISGRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIEDFOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONALINFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEEHTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

VC-1

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDERTHE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIOLICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL ANDNON-COMMERCIAL USE OF ACONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR(ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WASENCODED BY A CONSUMERENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ANDNON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEOPROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEVC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE ISGRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIEDFOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONALINFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

MPEG4–Visual

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANYMANNER THAT COMPLIES WITHTHE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD ISPROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY ACONSUMER ENGAGING INPERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIALACTIVITIES.

MP3

MPEG Layer-3 audio codingtechnology licensed from FraunhoferIIS and Thomson.

WMV/WMA

This product includes technologyowned by Microsoft Corporation andunder a license from MicrosoftLicensing, GP. Use or distribution ofsuch technology outside of thisproduct is prohibited without a licensefrom Microsoft Corporation and/orMicrosoft Licensing, GP as applicable.

Map End User LicenseAgreement

END USER TERMS

The Map Data SD card (“Data”) isprovided for your personal, internaluse only and not for resale. It isprotected by copyright, and is subjectto the following terms (this “End UserLicense Agreement”) and conditionswhich are agreed to by you, on theone hand, and HERE North America,LLC (“HERE”) and its licensors(including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.



The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permissionfrom Canadian authorities, including:© Her Majesty the Queen in Right ofCanada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®.

HERE holds a nonexclusive licensefrom the United States Postal Service®

to publish and sell ZIP+4®

information.

© United States Postal Service 2013.Prices are not established, controlled,or approved by the United StatesPostal Service. The followingtrademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United StatesPostal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Personal Use Only: You agree to usethis Data for the solely personal,noncommercial purposes for whichyou were licensed, and not for servicebureau, timesharing or other similarpurposes. Except as otherwise setforth herein, you agree not tootherwise reproduce, copy, modify,decompile, disassemble or reverseengineer any portion of this Data, andmay not transfer or distribute it in any

form, for any purpose, except to theextent permitted by mandatory laws.You may transfer the Data and allaccompanying materials on apermanent basis if you retain nocopies and the recipient agrees to theterms of this End User LicenseAgreement. Multi-disc sets may onlybe transferred or sold as a completeset as provided to you and not as asubset thereof.

Restrictions

Except where you have beenspecifically licensed to do so by HEREand without limiting the precedingparagraph, you may not (a) use thisData with any products, systems,or applications installed or otherwiseconnected to or in communicationwith vehicles capable of vehiclenavigation, positioning, dispatch, realtime route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications;or (b) with, or in communication with,including without limitation, cellularphones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personaldigital assistants or PDAs.

Warning

This Data may contain inaccurate orincomplete information due to thepassage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used, and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which maylead to incorrect results.

No Warranty

This Data is provided to you “as is,”and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. HERE and its licensors (and theirlicensors and suppliers) make noguarantees, representations,or warranties of any kind, express orimplied, arising by law or otherwise,including but not limited to, content,quality, accuracy, completeness,effectiveness, reliability, fitness for aparticular purpose, usefulness, use orresults to be obtained from this Data,or that the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error free.

Disclaimer of Warranty

THE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ON AN“AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTSBASIS” AND HARMAN (AND THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)



EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL OTHERWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFNON-INFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORYQUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE ANDFITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRITTENADVICE OR INFORMATIONPROVIDED BY HARMAN (OR ANY OFTHEIR LICENSORS, AGENTS,EMPLOYEES, OR THIRD PARTYPROVIDERS) SHALL CREATE AWARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOTENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCHADVICE OR INFORMATION. THISDISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS ANESSENTIAL CONDITION OF THISAGREEMENT.

Disclaimer of Liability

HERE AND ITS LICENSORS(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS ANDSUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLETO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVEOF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OFTHE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTIONALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR

DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THEUSE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA;OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT,REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS,OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANYDEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT ORBASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IFHERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVEBEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITYOF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States,Territories, and Countries do not allowcertain liability exclusions or damageslimitations, so to that extent theabove may not apply to you.

Export Control

You agree not to export fromanywhere any part of the Dataprovided to you or any direct productthereof except in compliance with,and with all licenses and approvalsrequired under, applicable export laws,

rules and regulations. EntireAgreement: These terms andconditions constitute the entireagreement between HERE (and itslicensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to thesubject matter hereof, and supersedesin their entirety any and all written ororal agreements previously existingbetween us with respect to suchsubject matter.

Governing Law

The above terms and conditions shallbe governed by the laws of the Stateof Illinois, without giving effect to (i)its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)the United Nations Convention forContracts for the International Sale ofGoods, which is explicitly excluded.You agree to submit to thejurisdiction of the State of Illinois forany and all disputes, claims, andactions arising from or in connectionwith the Data provided to youhereunder.

Government End Users

If the Data is being acquired by or onbehalf of the United Statesgovernment or any other entity



seeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by theUnited States government, this Data isa “commercial item” as that term isdefined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, islicensed in accordance with this EndUser License Agreement, and eachcopy of Data delivered or otherwisefurnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with thefollowing “Notice of Use,” and betreated in accordance with suchNotice:

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

NAME:

HERE North America, LLC

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)

ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago,IL 60606.

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subject tothe End User License Agreementunder which this Data was provided.

© 2014 HERE North America, LLC. Allrights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federalofficial refuses to use the legendprovided herein, the ContractingOfficer, federal government agency,or any federal official must notifyHERE prior to seeking additional oralternative rights in the Data.

Unicode

Copyright © 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc.All rights reserved. Distributed underthe Terms of Use inhttp://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

Free Type Project

Portions of this software are copyright© 2010 The FreeType Project(http://www.freetype.org). All rightsreserved.

Open Source SW

Further information concerning theOSS licenses is shown in theinfotainment display.

QNX

Portions of this software are copyright© 2008-2011, QNX Software Systems.All rights reserved.

Part C – EULA

Copyright © 2011, Software SystemsGmbH & Co. KG. All Rights Reserved.

The product you have purchased("Product") contains Software(Runtime Configuration No. 505962;"Software") which is distributed by oron behalf of the Product manufacturer"Manufacturer") under license fromSoftware Systems Co. ("QSSC"). Youmay only use the Software in theProduct and in compliance with thelicense terms below.



Subject to the terms and conditions ofthis License, QSSC hereby grants youa limited, non-exclusive,non-transferable license to use theSoftware in the Product for thepurpose intended by theManufacturer. If permitted by theManufacturer, or by applicable law,you may make one backup copy of theSoftware as part of the Productsoftware. QSSC and its licensorsreserve all license+C31 rights notexpressly granted herein, and retainall right, title and interest in and to allcopies of the Software, including allintellectual property rights therein.Unless required by applicable law youmay not reproduce, distribute ortransfer, or de-compile, disassemble orotherwise attempt to unbundle,reverse engineer, modify or createderivative works of, the Software. Youagree: (1) not to remove, cover or alterany proprietary notices, labels ormarks in or on the Software, and toensure that all copies bear any noticecontained on the original; and (2) notto export the Product or the Softwarein contravention of applicable exportcontrol laws.

EXCEPT TO THE EXTENTOTHERWISE REQUIRED BYAPPLICABLE LAW, QSSC AND ITSLICENSORS PROVIDE THESOFTWARE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,WITHOUT WARRANTIES ORCONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANYWARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OFTITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANYWARRANTIES OR OTHERPROVISIONS OFFERED BY THEMANUFACTURER OR ITSDISTRIBUTOR(S) THAT DIFFERFROM THIS LICENSE ARE OFFEREDBY THE MANUFACTURER OR ITSDISTRIBUTOR(S) ALONE AND NOTBY QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIRLICENSORS. YOU ASSUME ANYRISKS ASSOCIATED WITH YOUR USEOF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THISLICENSE.

EXCEPT TO THE EXTENTOTHERWISE REQUIRED BYAPPLICABLE LAW (SUCH AS IN THECASE OF DELIBERATE OR GROSSLYNEGLIGENT ACTS), IN NO EVENT

SHALL QSSC, ITS AFFILIATES ORTHEIR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TOYOU UNDER ANY LEGAL THEORY,WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OROTHERWISE, FOR DAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANYCHARACTER ARISING AS A RESULTOF THIS LICENSE OR OUT OF THEUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THEPRODUCT (INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OFGOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,PRODUCT FAILURE ORMALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALLOTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES ORLOSSES), EVEN IF QSSC, ITSAFFILIATES OR THEIR LICENSORSHAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

WMA

This product is protected by certainintellectual property rights ofMicrosoft. Use or distribution of suchtechnology outside of this product isprohibited without a license fromMicrosoft.



For more information on the Software,including any open source softwarelicense terms (and available sourcecode) as well as copyright attributionsapplicable to the RuntimeConfiguration indicated above, pleasecontact the Manufacturer or contactQSSC at 175 Terence MatthewsCrescent, Kanata, Ontario, CanadaK2M 1W8 ([email protected]).

Linotype

Helvetica is a trademark of LinotypeCorp. registered in the U.S. Patent andTrademark Office and may beregistered in certain otherjurisdictions in the name of LinotypeCorp. or its licensee Linotype GmbH.

Usage in text form of each of theLicensed Trademarks is:

The trademark attributionrequirements for the LicensedTrademarks may be viewed athttp://www.linotype.com/2061-19414/trademarks.html.

END USER NOTICE

The marks of companies displayed bythis product to indicate businesslocations are the marks of theirrespective owners. The use of suchmarks in this product does not implyany sponsorship, approval,or endorsement by such companies ofthis product.


CLIMATE CONTROLS 209

Climate ControlsClimate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe climate control buttons on the center stack and on the climate controldisplay are used to adjust the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

Center Stack Climate Controls

1. ON/OFF (Power)

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

3. Air Delivery Mode Control

4. Driver Temperature Controls

5. Fan Control

6. Passenger Temperature Controls

7. A/C (Air Conditioning)

8. Recirculation

9. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature)

10. Defrost

11. Rear Window Defogger


210 CLIMATE CONTROLS

Climate Control Display

1. Driver and Passenger TemperatureControls

2. Driver and Passenger TemperatureDisplays

3. Fan Control

4. Sync (Synchronized Temperature)

5. Recirculation

6. Air Delivery Mode Control

7. Auto (Automatic Operation)

8. A/C (Air Conditioning)

9. On/Off (Power)

The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, recirculation, and Sync

settings can be controlled by touchingCLIMATE on the infotainment HomePage or the climate button in theclimate control display applicationtray. A selection can then be made onthe front climate control pagedisplayed. See the infotainmentmanual.

Climate Control Status Display

The climate control status displayappears briefly when the center stackclimate controls are adjusted.

Climate Control Influence on FuelEconomy

The climate control system dependson other vehicle systems for heat andpower input. Certain climate controlsettings can lead to higher fuel usage.

The following climate control settingsuse more fuel:. MAX air conditioning mode. Defrost mode. Extreme temperature settings, suchas 15° C (60° F) or 32° C (90° F)

. High fan speed settings

To help reduce fuel usage:. Use the full automatic control asdescribed under “AutomaticOperation.”

. Select a temperature setting that ishigher in hot weather and lower incold weather.

. Turn off the air conditioning whenit is not needed.

. Only use defrost to clear thewindows.



Automatic Operation

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting, startwith 22 °C (72 °F) and allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature as neededfor best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and to coolthe vehicle faster, recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulates airtemperature based on sun load. See“Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

ON/OFF : Press to turn the climatecontrol system on or off. When thesystem is off, outside air will beprevented from entering the vehicle.When the system is on, a button ispressed, or knob is turned, the climatecontrol system will turn on anddeliver airflow per the current setting.

Q9 R : Press the fan controls on thecenter stack or the climate controldisplay to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Press and hold the controls toadjust speed more quickly.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Driver and Passenger TemperatureControl : The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driver andthe passenger. Press w / x toincrease or decrease the temperature.

SYNC : Press to link the passengerand rear climate temperature settings,if equipped, to the driver setting. TheSYNC indicator light will turn on.When the passenger or rear climatetemperature settings are adjusted, theSYNC indicator light is off.

The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

Air Delivery Mode Control : PressY,[, orz to change the direction ofthe airflow. An indicator light comeson in the selected mode button. Allthree buttons or any combination ofthe three buttons can be used toselect the air delivery mode.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation.

z : This mode clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield, outboard panel outlets,and side window vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and the air conditioningcompressor will run, unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing.

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.



[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets, with some to the windshield,side window outlets, outboard paneloutlets, and second row floor outlets.

0 : Press to clear the windshield offog or frost more quickly. Air isdirected to the windshield, outboardpanel outlets, and the side windowoutlets. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on, unless theoutside temperature is below freezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents 0 213.

A/C : Press to turn the airconditioning system on or off. Anindicator light comes on to show thatthe air conditioning is enabled. If thefan is turned off, the air conditionerwill not run. The A/C light will stay oneven if the outside temperatures arebelow freezing.

@ : Press to turn on recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated to quickly cool the insideof the vehicle. It can also be used tohelp reduce outside air and odors that

enter the vehicle. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on when thismode is activated.

Ionizer : If equipped with an ionizer,this feature helps to clean the airinside the vehicle and removecontaminants such as pollen, odors,and dust. If the climate controlsystem is on and the ionizer isenabled, the ionizer status indicatorwill be lit on the climate controldisplay. To turn the ionizer on or off,see “Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger only workswhen the ignition is on. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is turned tooff or ACC/ACCESSORY.

CautionUsing a razor blade or sharp objectto clear the inside rear window candamage the rear window defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not clearthe inside rear window with sharpobjects.

Heated Mirror : If equipped withheated outside mirrors, the mirrorsheat to help clear fog or frost from thesurface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed. SeeHeated Mirrors 0 28.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with remotestart, the climate control system mayrun when the vehicle is startedremotely. The rear defog may come onduring remote start based on coldambient conditions. The rear defogindicator light does not come onduring a remote start.

If equipped, the heated seats will turnon if it is cold outside or theventilated seats will turn on if it is hotoutside. The heated and ventilated



seat indicator lights may not come onduring a remote start. If equipped, theheated steering wheel will come on ina remote start if it is cold outside. Theheated steering wheel indicator lightmay not come on.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensor orthe system will not work properly.

There is also an exterior temperaturesensor behind the front grille. Thissensor reads the outside airtemperature and helps maintain the

temperature inside the vehicle. Anycover on the front of the vehicle couldcause a false reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and air delivery mode. Thesystem may also supply cooler air tothe side of the vehicle facing the sun.The recirculation mode will also beused as needed to maintain cooloutlet temperatures.

Afterblow Feature

If equipped, under certain conditions,the fan may stay on or may turn onand off several times after you turnoff and lock the vehicle. This isnormal.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in the centerand on the sides of the instrumentpanel, and on the rear of the centerconsole storage.

Move the slider knobs to change thedirection of or to close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom air inlets at the base of thewindshield that could block theflow of air into the vehicle.

. Clear snow off the hood to improvevisibility and help decrease moisturedrawn into the vehicle.

. Keep the path under the front seatsclear of objects to help circulate theair inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affect theperformance of the system. Checkwith your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of thevehicle.

. Do not attach any devices to the airvent slats. This restricts airflow andmay cause damage to the air vents.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle. Thefilter should be replaced as part ofroutine scheduled maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 411.

See your dealer regarding replacementof the filter.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trained andcertified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator should neverbe repaired or replaced by one from asalvage vehicle. It should only bereplaced by a new evaporator toensure proper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerants shouldbe reclaimed with proper equipment.Venting refrigerants directly to theatmosphere is harmful to the

environment and may also createunsafe conditions based on inhalation,combustion, frostbite, or otherhealth-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 411.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 215

Driving andOperatingDriving InformationDriving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Impaired Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Track Events and CompetitiveDriving (V-Series and V-SeriesBlackwing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . 230Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 231Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . 232Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . 244Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 246Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Active Rev Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

BrakesElectric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . 254Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . 256Automatic VehicleHold (AVH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . . . 265Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . 267

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Adaptive Cruise Control(Advanced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Super Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . 294Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . 296Surround Vision System . . . . . . . . . 297Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . 303


216 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . 310Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . 310Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . 312Surround Vision Recorder . . . . . . . 314

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Recommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Recommended Fuel (LGY 3.0LV6 and LT4 6.2LV8 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . 317Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing Information . . . . 319Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Trailer Towing (LSY 2.0L L4 andLGY 3.0L V6 Engines Only) . . . . 323

Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical Equipment . . . 326

Driving Information

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage.Here are some driving tips to get thebest fuel economy possible:. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after the engineis started, or turn them off whennot required.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weather conditionsare appropriate, use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speed limits ordrive more slowly when conditionsrequire.

. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 217. Replace the vehicle's tires with thesame TPC Spec number molded intothe tire's sidewall near the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many forms andcan take your focus from the task ofdriving. Exercise good judgment anddo not let other activities divert yourattention away from the road. Manylocal governments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keep youreyes on the road, keep your hands onthe steering wheel, and focus yourattention on driving.. Do not use a phone in demandingdriving situations. Use a hands-freemethod to place or receivenecessary phone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read, takenotes, or look up information onphones or other electronic devices.

. Designate a front seat passenger tohandle potential distractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radio stationsand adjusting climate control andseat settings. Program all tripinformation into any navigationdevice prior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parked toretrieve items that have fallen tothe floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tend tochildren.

. Keep pets in an appropriate carrieror restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversations whiledriving, whether with a passenger oron a cell phone.

{ WarningTaking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The first stepin driving defensively is to wear theseat belt. See Seat Belts 0 46.. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be careless andmake mistakes. Anticipate whatthey may do and be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver in frontof you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Impaired DrivingDeath and injury associated withimpaired driving is a global tragedy.

{ WarningDrinking alcohol or taking drugsand then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol or drugs. You can have a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

serious — or even fatal — collisionif you drive after drinking or takingdrugs.

Do not drive while under theinfluence of alcohol or drugs,or ride with a driver who has beendrinking or is impaired by drugs.Find alternate transportation home;or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will remain sober.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and accelerating areimportant factors in helping to controla vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time is aboutthree-quarters of a second. In thattime, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h

(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), whichcould be a lot of distance in anemergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between youand the vehicle in front of you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops or a brakefault occurs, the brakes may losepower assist. More effort will berequired to stop the vehicle and it cantake longer to stop.

Steering

CautionTo avoid damage to the steeringsystem, do not drive over curbs,parking barriers, or similar objectsat speeds greater than 3 km/h(1 mph). Use care when driving overother objects such as lane dividersand speed bumps. Damage causedby misuse of the vehicle is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

Variable Effort Steering

The vehicle has a steering system thatvaries the amount of effort required tosteer the vehicle in relation to thespeed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effort requiredis less at slower speeds to make thevehicle more maneuverable and easierto park. At faster speeds, the steeringeffort increases to provide a sport-likefeel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.



Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenance isnot required.

If power steering assist is lost due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered, but may require increasedeffort.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when the systemcools down.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable speed.. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steady speedthrough the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out of thecurve before accelerating gently intothe straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations whensteering around a problem may bemore effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of the steeringwheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS) allowssteering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can drop offthe edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile driving. Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerthe vehicle so that it straddles theedge of the pavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until the rightfront tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.



Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid — toomuch speed or steering in a curvecauses tires to slip and losecornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids bytaking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the acceleratorpedal and steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust your drivingaccording to weather conditions.Stopping distance can be longer andvehicle control can be affected whentraction is reduced by water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material on theroad. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice,or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have anydoubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, includingreducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any sudden changescould cause the tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help avoidonly the braking skid.

Track Events andCompetitive Driving(V-Series and V-SeriesBlackwing)Before any track event, there are threefeatures that should be turned off:

. Automatic Emergency Braking(AEB). See Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) 0 306.

. Lane Keep Assist. See Lane KeepAssist (LKA) 0 312.

. Adaptive Cruise Control. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control (Advanced)0 270.

{ DangerHigh-performance features areintended for use only on closedtracks by experienced and qualifieddrivers and should not be used onpublic roads. High-speed driving,aggressive cornering, hard braking,and other high-performance drivingcan be dangerous. Improper driverinputs for the conditions may resultin loss of control of the vehicle,which could injure or kill you orothers. Always drive safely.

Track events and competitive drivingmay affect the vehicle warranty. Seethe warranty manual before using thevehicle for competitive driving.



{ WarningSome of the adjustments andprocedures specified in this sectionmay require specialized skill,training, and equipment. Failure toperform these procedures properlycould cause malfunction,potentially resulting in death,personal injury, or damage to thevehicle or property. Do not attemptto perform these adjustments orprocedures unless properlyqualified.

{ WarningPrior to each track event and againbefore returning to public roads,tighten the wheel nuts with atorque wrench to the proper torquespecification. Wheel nuts that areimproperly or incorrectly tightenedcan cause the wheels to becomeloose or come off, resulting in acrash. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 426 for wheel nuttorque specifications.

CautionIf the vehicle is used for trackevents and competitive driving, theengine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oillevels can damage the engine.Check the oil level often andmaintain the proper level. SeeEngine Oil 0 336.

Competitive Driving Mode can beselected. See Driver Mode Control0 259.

Seat Belts

Lap-Shoulder Belt

If equipped, the driver seat belt has anAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR).This feature is useful in performancedriving scenarios where the driverwants to be held in the seat moretightly to take advantage of theaggressive bolstering of the seat.

1. Move the seat 8-10 cm (3-4 in)rearward from the normal drivingposition.

2. Pull the driver shoulder belt out asfar as it will go, until it stops, to setthe lock. While holding theshoulder belt in this position,buckle the belt.

When the shoulder belt is released,the retractor will make a ratchetsound when it retracts. When theretractor lock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out of theretractor.

3. Adjust the belt, and then move theseat forward 8-10 cm (3-4 in) tothe desired driving position. Thiswill secure the belt. The belt fitshould be tight, but notuncomfortable.

To unlatch the belt, press thebutton on the buckle. The beltshould return to its stowedposition.

Axle Fluid

Axles must have 2 400 km (1,500 mi)before being used in track driving.

The front, if equipped with AWD, andrear axle fluid temperatures may behigher than when driving in severeconditions. Drain and refill with new



fluid after the first racing orcompetitive driving event, and thenafter every 24 hours of racing orcompetitive driving. See your dealerfor the correct fluid.

CautionDuring a first time track or racingevent, high axle temperatures canoccur. Damage could be caused tothe axle and would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notdrive as long or as fast the firsttime the vehicle is driven on thetrack or raced.

. The axle lubricant should bereplaced with new lubricant.

. On vehicles without a differentialcooler, additional cooling capacity isrequired for continuous competitivedriving. The V-Series Blackwing hasa differential cooler, so noadditional cooling capacity isnecessary.

Engine Oil

CautionIf the vehicle is used for trackevents and competitive driving, theengine may use more oil than itwould with normal use. Low oillevels can damage the engine.Check the oil level often andmaintain the proper level. SeeEngine Oil 0 336.

Check the oil level often during trackevents and competitive driving, andkeep the oil level at or near the uppermark. See “Checking the Engine Oil" inEngine Oil 0 336.

Fuel

Use premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 93 at a trackevent. Unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 may beused, but performance will bedegraded. See Prohibited Fuels 0 317.

Automatic or ManualTransmission Fluid

Have the transmission fluid set to thetrack specific oil level prior to trackusage. Transmission fluid should bechanged after every 15 hours of trackusage. Any transmission level set orchange should be performed at thedealer.

Brakes

Battery Disconnect

Disconnect the battery beforeservicing the hydraulic brake system.It is critical to disconnect the batterybefore bleeding the system, replacingthe pads, or any other work. Thebattery must be disconnected toprevent the brake master cylinderfrom pressurizing the hydraulicsystem during its automated selfdiagnostic tests that may occur whena door is opened or the remote key ispresent.



{ WarningTo avoid personal injury and/orvehicle damage, always disconnectthe battery before performingservice work on the hydraulic brakesystem. Bleeding the brake systemwith the battery connected can leadto excessive pressurization of thesystem during automatic diagnostictests or diagnosis of a leak or air inthe braking system. A DiagnosticTrouble Code (DTC) may set andvehicle speed may be limited.

Brake Cooling (V-Series Blackwing)

Prior to any track event, high speeddriving event, or competitive driving,complete the following:

1. Ensure all the brake cooling partsare correctly secured and installed.

2. Inspect and replace any deflectorsthat have damage.

3. Inspect for blockage in the frontbrake cooling duct prior to everyevent.

4. Remove front tire deflector (ifequipped).

If improved brake cooling is desiredon vehicles with cast-iron brakes (RPOJGH), install the ball joint protectorfront shields, remove both upper andlower rear rotor shields, and installthe rear lower control arm coolingdeflectors, per the instructionsincluded with the brake cooling kit.These parts are for track use only.After track events, reinstall theoriginal front and rear rotor shieldsand remove the rear lower control armcooling deflectors.

Right Side Front Shown, Left SideFront Similar

1. Front Lower Control Arm Deflector

2. Remove – Front Tire Deflector

3. Front Brake Cooling Duct

Brake Pad Wear Sensors

If equipped, the brake pad wearsensors need to be removed from thebrake calipers prior to any track orracing event. The original sensors canbe reinstalled if significant brake padwear is not observed. Refer to BrakePad Life System (If Equipped) 0 351.If the sensors are not reinstalled afterthe track event, install brake pad wearsensor plugs. See your dealer.

The V-Series Blackwing is equippedwith brake pad wear sensors which aretrack capable and should not bedisabled for track and racing.



A message will display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when thebrake pads show excessive wear.

Brake Fluid

Replace existing brake fluid with aqualified DOT 4 high performancebrake fluid from a sealed container.Brake fluid with a dry boiling point>310 °C (590 °F) is qualified. If highperformance brake fluid is used,replace it with GM approved brakefluid before driving on public roads.If high performance brake fluid is inthe vehicle and the age of the brakefluid is over a month old or unknown,replace the brake fluid before trackevents and competitive driving. Donot use silicone or DOT 5 brake fluids.

It is critical to disconnect the batterybefore bleeding the system, replacingthe pads, or any other work. Thebattery must be disconnected toprevent the brake master cylinderfrom pressurizing the hydraulicsystem during its automated selfdiagnostic tests that can possiblyoccur when a door is opened or theremote key is present.

Check the fluid level before eachcompetitive driving event.

Brake System Flushing & Bleeding

The J56 brake system requires specificprocesses for bleeding and fluidflushing. These can be found in theservice manual.

Properly bleeding the brake system isrequired for proper operation of thehydraulic brake system.

Brake Leak Detection

The hydraulic braking system hasadvanced diagnostic capability to helpdetect hydraulic leaks, trapped air,and other performance issues. Thesediagnostics are active when thehydraulic system is powered. In orderto avoid inadvertently setting a leakDiagnostic Trouble Code (DTC),disconnect the battery beforeservicing the brake system.

If the vehicle sets a DTC related to abrake system leak, the Brake SystemWarning Light will come on andvehicle speed may be limited to 100kph (62 mph). Any time a leak DTC isset, the vehicle should be inspected

carefully for evidence of a leak andshould be repaired immediately. Seeyour dealer.

Brake Fade Warning Assist

The Brake Fade Warning Assistsystem monitors the performance ofthe brake system. If the systemdetects brake fade, or if the brakefluid is near the boiling point, thedriver will be alerted.

The Brake Fade Warning Assistsystem is designed for use with thefactory-installed brake pads or GMapproved replacement pads. If thebrake pads on the vehicle need to bereplaced, use GM approved brakepads. If this is not done, the brakefade warning system may not functionproperly.

Stage 1 : The DIC displays a “ReduceBraking to Avoid Overheating”message, a chime sounds and brakepedal effort and travel is increased.When the message displays, the drivershould back up braking points andreduce brake usage in order to reducebrake temperature. This will allow forcontinued lapping with no speedlimitations.



Stage 2 : The DIC displays a BrakesOverheated Service Now message, achime sounds, and brake pedal effortand travel is further increased. Thiscode indicates that the brake fluidtemperature is excessive and is aboutto boil. The system limits vehiclespeed to 100 km/h (62 mph). Thedriver should immediately start a cooldown lap if on the track. If thismessage displays, the vehicle needs tobe serviced. The brake system needsto cool down, and the brake fluidmust be immediately flushed withDOT 4 for street use, or to a qualifiedDOT 4 race fluid for track use. Boiledbrake fluid is compromised and mustbe replaced.

Brake Burnishing

New brake pads must be burnishedbefore racing or other competitivedriving.

CautionThese procedures are specific to theV-Series with performance brakelinings package. This procedureshould not be run on other modelsas damage may result.

CautionThe new vehicle break-in periodshould be completed beforeperforming the brake burnishingprocedure or damage may occur tothe powertrain/engine. See NewVehicle Break-In 0 236.

CautionBrake pedal fade will occur duringany track burnish procedure andcan cause brake pedal travel andforce to increase. This could extendstopping distance until the brakesare fully burnished.

When performed as instructed, theseprocedures will not damage thebrakes. During the burnishing

procedure, the brake pads will smokeand produce an odor. The brakingforce and pedal travel may increase.After the procedure is complete, thebrake pads may appear white at therotor contact.

Perform these procedures in a safemanner and in compliance with alllocal and state ordinances/lawsregarding motor vehicle operation.Perform the procedures only on drypavement.

As with all high performance brakesystems, some amount of brake squealis normal.

Street High Performance BrakeBurnishing Procedure

This section is for the V-SeriesBlackwing with J57 carbon ceramicbrake rotors only.

This procedure should only be run ona track or other non-public area, andonly on dry pavement.



CautionBrake fade will occur during thistrack burnish procedure and cancause brake pedal travel and forceto increase. This could extendstopping distance until the brakesare fully burnished.

1. From a stop, accelerate as rapidlyas possible without activatingtraction control to a speed of 100km/h (60 mph).

2. Using the G-Force Gauge in theHUD display, use enough pedalforce to completely stop the vehiclein four to five seconds. (~0.7g Decellevel to stop the vehicle in astraight line). If ABS activates,braking is too hard.

3. Repeat the first two steps 20consecutive times, this should takeabout five minutes.

4. After completing the 20 stops, coolthe brakes by driving for 8 km(5 mi) at 100 km/h (60 mph).

Alternative Closed Course BrakeBurnishing Procedure

This brake burnish procedure shouldonly be run on vehicles with a factoryequipped brake system.

This procedure should only be run ona track and only on dry pavement.Brake pedal fade will occur during thistrack burnish procedure and cancause brake pedal travel and force toincrease. This could extend stoppingdistance until the brakes are fullyburnished.

1. Start track lapping at lower speedsand lower braking efforts forthree minutes of driving. Allow forincreased braking distances due toreduced brake output.

2. After Step 1, increase speed andbraking effort for the next sixminutes of lapping, graduallyending up at 90% effort. Continueto allow for increased brakingdistance due to reduced brakeoutput.

3. Cool the brakes by lapping withminimal light braking for sixminutes.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment suggested specs fortrack use:

Road Course (V-Series). Front: -2.0 deg camber, 0.2 degtotal toe

. Rear: -1.7 deg camber, 0.2 degtotal toe

Road Course (V-Series Blackwing). Front: -2.5 deg camber, 0.1 degtotal toe

. Rear: -1.5 deg camber, 0.1 degtotal toe

Tire Inflation PressureGuidelines

Tire inflation pressures affect vehiclehandling and tire life, and should beadjusted for various types of tracks/courses.

Inspect the tires prior to every track/course session. Track/course drivingwill reduce the tire tread life.

To maximize tire life, drive 800 km(500 mi) prior to racetrack driving orcomplete the minimum track running



that will increase the tire pressures by35 kPa (5 psi). After this, immediatelylet the tires cool to cold pressures.

Tire Inflation Pressure High Speed

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation 0 375.

Tire Inflation Pressure for TrackDriving

For driving on a race course, if thevehicle is equipped with 275/35ZR19(100Y) and 305/30ZR19 (102Y) tires,set the cold (stationary) tire pressuresto 28 psi. During track sessions, setthe tire pressures at 35 to 38 psi forhot tires. If pressures exceed 38 psi,adjust the pressures down to 35 to38 psi. Return the tires to therecommended cold tire inflationpressure when track driving hasended.

Driving and Operating

{ WarningOperating the vehicle at high speedscan be dangerous. Improper tireinflation pressure can put

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

additional strain on the tires andcan cause a sudden failure. Makesure the tires are in excellentcondition, and use the correct coldtire inflation pressure for thevehicle load and track/course.

{ WarningTracks/courses put high loads ontires operating at high speed, whichcan lead to tire failure if notinflated properly. Always limitvehicle cargo to the driver plus onepassenger with no additional cargo.

{ WarningTrack/course loads wear tires bothon the tread and internal to thetire. When driven in track/courseconditions, even if tread is not worndown to the treadwear indicator,tires must be replaced after theequivalent of two tanks of fuel orapproximately 160 km (100 mi).

Custom Launch Control (IfEquipped)

Custom Launch Control allows thefollowing parameters for LaunchControl to be modified:. Launch RPM. Slip Target (5%–15%). Surface Type

To adjust the Launch RPM, all ofthese conditions must be met:. The vehicle must be in Track Mode.See “Track Mode” under Driver ModeControl 0 259.

. Performance Traction Management(PTM) Mode must be enabled. SeeDriver Mode Control 0 259.

. The steering wheel must be straight.

. The driver door must be closed.

. The transmission must be in D(Drive) or forward gear.

. The parking brake must not beengaged.

For more information on CompetitiveDriving Mode, see Competitive DrivingMode 0 265.



1. Using the DIC buttons on the rightside of the steering wheel, navigateto the Launch Control menu. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

2. Press SEL to select Custom.

3. Scroll down to Launch RPM.

4. Adjust the desired RPM:

2000–4000 RPM for manualtransmissions and 1000–2400 forautomatic.

Manual Transmission

5. Set Slip Target to custom desiredsetting.. Manual Trans: Apply full

throttle to activate LaunchControl and quickly release theclutch pedal to launch thevehicle.

Automatic Transmission

. Auto Trans: Firmly press andhold the brake pedal to activateLaunch Control.

6. Auto Trans Only - Quickly applyfull throttle. Release the brakepedal to launch the vehicle.



Line Lock (If Equipped)

{ WarningThe vehicle may move unexpectedlywhen using Line Lock, which couldcause injury to persons or propertylocated nearby. Only use Line Lockon a closed track where there is alarge clear area around all sides ofthe vehicle. Be ready to apply thebrakes immediately if the vehiclebegins to move. Do not use LineLock in an area that is accessible tothe public or where people orproperty are located near thevehicle.

CautionAttempting to shift when the drivewheels are spinning and do nothave traction may cause damage tothe transmission. Damage causedby misuse of the vehicle is notcovered by the vehicle warranty. Donot attempt to shift when the drivewheels do not have traction.

Line Lock allows for locking the frontbrakes independently of the rearbrakes. This allows the rear tires tospin when the throttle is applied.

To enter Line Lock, all of theseconditions must be met:. The vehicle must be in Track Mode.. Performance Traction Management(PTM) Mode must be enabled.

. The steering wheel must be straight.

. The driver door must be closed.

. The vehicle must be in D (Drive) foran automatic transmission or1 (First) gear for a manualtransmission.

. The parking brake must not beengaged.

. The vehicle must be stopped onlevel ground. The accelerator pedalmust not be applied.

1. Using the DIC buttons on the rightside of the steering wheel, navigateto the Line Lock menu withinLaunch Control. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Base Level)0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

2. Press the brake pedal firmly tomove the bar graph to 100%.

3. Release the brake pedal.



4. There are 15 seconds to completethe burnout and exit.

5. To release the brakes and roll out,press* and SEL at the same time.

If the burnout is not completed in15 seconds, torque will be reduced toidle, the parking brake will be applied,Line Lock releases, and CustomLaunch Control will be disabled.

Ensure the parking brake isdisengaged to re-enter LaunchControl.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicletraction and affect your ability to stopand accelerate. Always drive slower inthese types of driving conditions andavoid driving through large puddlesand deep-standing or flowing water.

{ WarningWet brakes can cause crashes. Theymight not work as well in a quickstop and could cause pulling to oneside. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddleof water or a car/vehicle wash,lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be verycautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

CautionDriving through deep puddles orstanding water can cause water tocome in through the engine airintake and damage the engine.If deep puddles or standing watercannot be avoided, proceed withcaution and do not exceed 8 km/h(5 mph). Do not drive throughwater that may come close to orcover the vehicle’s underbody.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water canbuild up under the vehicle's tires sothey actually ride on the water. Thiscan happen if the road is wet enoughand you are going fast enough. Whenthe vehicle is hydroplaning, it haslittle or no contact with the road.



There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping equipmentin good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires 0 367.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than driving onflat or rolling terrain. Tips include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WarningUsing the brakes to slow the vehicleon a long downhill slope can causebrake overheating, can reduce brakeperformance, and could result in aloss of braking. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear to letthe engine assist the brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{ WarningCoasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.This can cause overheating of thebrakes and loss of steering assist.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross the center line.

. Be alert on top of hills; somethingcould be in your lane (e.g., stalledcar, crash).

. Pay attention to special road signs(e.g., falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

CautionTo avoid damage to the wheels andbrake components, always clearsnow and ice from inside thewheels and underneath the vehiclebefore driving.

Snow or ice between the tires and theroad creates less traction or grip, sodrive carefully. Wet ice can occur atabout 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rainbegins to fall. Avoid driving on wet iceor in freezing rain until roads can betreated.

For slippery road driving:. Accelerate gently. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick.


232 DRIVING AND OPERATING. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 257.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakes should beapplied sooner than when on drypavement. See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 254.

See Driver Mode Control 0 259.. Allow greater following distance andwatch for slippery spots. Icy patchescan occur on otherwise clear roadsin shaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby. If possible,use Roadside Service. See RoadsideService 0 434. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

{ WarningSnow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside. Engineexhaust contains carbon monoxide(CO), which cannot be seen orsmelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base of thevehicle, especially any blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in)on the vehicle side that is awayfrom the wind, to bring infresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the air insidethe vehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems.”

For more information about CO, seeEngine Exhaust 0 245.

To save fuel, run the engine for shortperiods to warm the vehicle and thenshut the engine off and partially closethe window. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do this aslittle as possible, to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin the wheelsto free the vehicle when stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow.



If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 257.

{ WarningIf the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. The vehiclecan overheat, causing an enginecompartment fire or other damage.Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 56 km/h(35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out

Turn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. Turn off any traction system.Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a low forward gear,spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while shifting,and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in

gear. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 396.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle can carry.This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes theweight of all occupants, cargo, andall nonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label and theCertification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

rear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). This can causesystems to break and changethe way the vehicle handles.This could cause loss of controland a crash. Overloading canalso reduce stoppingperformance, damage the tires,and shorten the life of thevehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example



A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the tire size ofthe original equipment tires (3)and the recommended cold tireinflation pressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 367 andTire Pressure 0 374.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It may show the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification Label” laterin this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs." on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengersthat will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and there willbe five 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggageload capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces theavailable cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing (LSY 2.0L L4 andLGY 3.0L V6 Engines Only) 0 323for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.



Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs).

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay show the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.. Put things in the cargo areaof the vehicle. In the cargoarea, put them as far forwardas possible. Try to spread theweight evenly.

. Never stack heavier things,like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that some of themare above the tops of theseats.

. Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In

CautionFollow these recommendedguidelines during the first2 414 km (1,500 mi) of driving thisvehicle. Parts have a break-in periodand performance will be better inthe long run.

. Avoid full throttle starts andabrupt stops.

. Do not exceed 4000 engine rpm.

. Avoid driving at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow.

. Do not drive above129 km/h (80 mph).

. Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle when the enginespeed will exceed 4000 rpm.

. Do not let the engine labor.Never lug the engine in high gearat low speeds. With a manualtransmission, shift to the next

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)lower gear. This rule applies at alltimes, not just during thebreak-in period.

. Do not participate in racingevents, sport driving schools,or similar activities during thisbreak-in period.

. Check engine oil with everyrefueling and add if necessary.Oil and fuel consumption may behigher than normal during thefirst 2 414 km (1,500 mi).

. To break in new tires, drive atmoderate speeds and avoid hardcornering for the first322 km (200 mi). New tires donot have maximum traction andmay tend to slip.

. New brake linings also need abreak-in period. Avoid makinghard stops during the first322 km (200 mi). This isrecommended every time brakelinings are replaced.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued). Should the vehicle be used forracing or competitive driving(after break-in), the rear axlelubricant must be replacedbeforehand.

See Track Events and CompetitiveDriving (V-Series and V-SeriesBlackwing) 0 220.

On new vehicles, the variousmechanical and electrical systemsexperience a “break-in” period duringthe first 6,400 km (4,000 miles) ofroutine driving. As the vehicle isdriven, the mechanical systems adjustto provide optimal fuel economy andtransmission shift performance.

Electrical systems will adapt andcalibrate during the break-in period.A one-time occurrence of clicks andsimilar vehicle noises is normal duringthis process.

Normal driving charges the vehicle’sbattery to achieve the best operationof the vehicle, including fuel economy.

Composite MaterialsThis vehicle may be equipped withparts containing carbon fiber,sheet-molding compound, or othercomposite materials. Dealer-installedaccessories may also containcomposite materials.

{ WarningExposed edges of parts containingcarbon fiber and other compositematerials can be sharp. Contactwith these parts could result ininjury. Use caution to avoidcontacting these parts, includingwhen washing the vehicle. If theparts are damaged, replace theparts promptly with replacementsfrom your dealer.

{ WarningRocker extensions may break underpressure, resulting in propertydamage or injury. Do not stand onthe rocker extension or use it asa step.



{ WarningRear end spoilers may break underpressure, resulting in propertydamage or injury. Do not push thevehicle by the spoiler or use thespoiler as a handle.

Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronic keylessignition with pushbutton start.

The Remote Key must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is not working,the vehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interference to

the Keyless Access system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 7.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be on and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights) : When the vehicleis stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 243.

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, and is not in P (Park),the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display a message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willturn OFF.

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission and is stationary, theignition will turn off, and Retained

Accessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 243.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the vehicle is switchedto OFF and the driver door is opened.A sound may be heard as the lockactuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable theairbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump the brakesrepeatedly. This may deplete powerassist, requiring increased brakepedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while the vehicleis moving. After shifting toN (Neutral), firmly apply the brakesand steer the vehicle to a safelocation.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shift toP (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition off.

4. Set the parking brake. See ElectricParking Brake 0 255.

{ WarningTurning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut the vehicleoff in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOPfor longer than two seconds, or presstwice within five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber IndicatorLight) : This mode allows the use ofsome electrical accessories when theengine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to OFF after five minutesto prevent battery rundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, and thebrake pedal applied, pressing thebutton once will place the ignitionsystem in ON/RUN/START. Onceengine cranking begins, release thebutton. Engine cranking will continueuntil the engine starts. See Starting theEngine 0 239. The ignition will thenremain on.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and to verifythe proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as may berequired for emission inspection

purposes. With the vehicle off, and thebrake pedal not applied, pressing andholding ENGINE START/STOP formore than five seconds will place thevehicle in Service Mode. Theinstruments and audio systems willoperate as they do in ON/RUN, butthe vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Mode. Press the button againto turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear

CautionIf you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. SeeAdd-On Electrical Equipment 0 326.


Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the vehiclewhen it is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.



CautionDo not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged. Holdthe clutch pedal down to the floor,press the brake pedal, and start theengine.

Starting the Vehicle

1. For vehicles with an automatictransmission, press the brake pedal,then press ENGINE START/STOPon the instrument panel. For amanual transmission, place theshift lever in Neutral with theparking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal down to the floor,press the brake pedal, then pressENGINE START/STOP.

If the remote key is not in thevehicle, if there is interference, or ifthe remote key battery is low, aDriver Information Center (DIC)

message will display. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7.

CautionCranking the engine for longperiods of time, by pressingENGINE START/STOP immediatelyafter cranking has ended, canoverheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Waitat least 15 seconds between eachtry, to let the cranking motorcool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18 °C or0 °F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and hold it there, then pressENGINE START/STOP for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts, letgo of the button and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the

same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Stopping the Engine

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, move the shift lever toP (Park) and press and hold ENGINESTART/STOP on the instrument panel,until the engine shuts off. If the shiftlever is not in P (Park), the engineshuts off and the ignition goes toACC/ACCESSORY. The DIC displaysSHIFT TO PARK. Once the shift leveris moved to P (Park), the vehicleturns off.

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out of thevehicle, shift to 1 (First) or R (Reverse)and apply the parking brake. Thenturn off the ignition off by pressingENGINE START/STOP and release theclutch pedal when the engine hasstopped.



If the remote key is not detectedinside the vehicle when it is turned offthe DIC displays a message.

Stop/Start SystemIf equipped, the Stop/Start system willshut off the engine to help conservefuel. It has components designed forthe increased number of starts.

{ WarningThe automatic engine Stop/Startfeature causes the engine to shutoff while the vehicle is still on. Donot exit the vehicle before shiftingto P (Park). The vehicle may restartand move unexpectedly. Alwaysshift to P (Park), and then turn theignition off before exiting thevehicle.

Auto Engine Stop/Start

When the brakes are applied and thevehicle is at a complete stop, theengine may turn off. When stopped,the tachometer displays AUTO STOP.See Tachometer 0 102. When the brake

pedal is released or the acceleratorpedal is pressed, the engine willrestart.

To maintain vehicle performance,other conditions may cause the engineto automatically restart before thebrake pedal is released.

Auto Stops may not occur and/or AutoStarts may occur because:. The climate control settings requirethe engine to be running to cool orheat the vehicle interior.

. The vehicle battery needs to charge.

. The vehicle battery has recentlybeen disconnected.

. Minimum vehicle speed has notbeen reached since the lastAuto Stop.

. The accelerator pedal is pressed.

. The engine or transmission is not atthe required operating temperature.

. The outside temperature is not inthe required operating range.

. The vehicle is shifted out of D(Drive) to any gear other thanP (Park).

. Certain driver modes have beenselected. See Driver Mode Control0 259.

. The vehicle is on a steep hill orgrade.

. The driver door has been opened orthe driver seat belt has beenunbuckled.

. The hood has been opened.

. The Auto Stop has reached themaximum allowed time.

Auto Stop Disable Switch



If equipped, the automatic engineStop/Start feature can be disabled andenabled by pressingh. Auto Stop/Start is enabled each time you startthe vehicle.

When theh indicator is illuminated,the system is enabled.

Engine HeaterVehicles with the engine heater canuse this option in cold weatherconditions at or below −18 °C (0 °F) foreasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up. Plugin the engine heater at least fourhours before starting your vehicle. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-end ofthe cord may exist which will preventengine heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine Heater1. Turn off the engine.

Check the heater cord for damage.If it is damaged, do not use it. Seeyour dealer for a replacement.Inspect the cord for damage yearly.

2. Plug the heater cord into theconnector in the front license platebracket.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WarningImproper use of the heater cord oran extension cord can damage thecord and may result in overheatingand fire.

. Plug the cord into a three-prongelectrical utility receptacle that isprotected by a ground fault

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

detection function. Anungrounded outlet could causean electric shock.

. Use a weatherproof, heavy-duty,15 amp-rated extension cord ifneeded. Failure to use therecommended extension cord ingood operating condition,or using a damaged heater orextension cord, could make itoverheat and cause a fire,property damage, electric shock,and injury.

. Do not operate the vehicle withthe heater cord permanentlyattached to the vehicle. Possibleheater cord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicle partsor sharp edges. Never close thehood on the heater cord.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattach thecover to the plug, and securelyfasten the cord. Keep the cordaway from any moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, be sureto unplug and store the cord as itwas before to keep it away frommoving engine parts. If you do not,it could be damaged.

Contact your dealer for informationon how long to use the heater in yourparticular area.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)When the ignition is turned from onto off, the following features (ifequipped) will continue to functionfor up to 10 minutes, or until thedriver door is opened. These featureswill also work when the ignition is inRUN or ACC/ACCESSORY:. Infotainment System

. Power Windows (during RAP thisfunctionality will be lost when anydoor is opened)

. Sunroof (during RAP thisfunctionality will be lost when anydoor is opened)

. Auxiliary Power Outlet

. Audio System

. OnStar System

Shifting Into ParkTo shift into P (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down and setthe parking brake. See ElectricParking Brake 0 255.

2. Press the button on top of the shiftlever to shift into P (Park). SeeAutomatic Transmission 0 246.

3. The P indicator on the shift leverwill turn red when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WarningIt can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the vehicle is not inP (Park) with the parking brake set.The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andshift to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark 0 243. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 320.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is set before you leave it.



If you are towing a trailer and parkingon a hill, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 320.

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic transmission. The shift lockrelease button is designed to preventinadvertent shifting out of P (Park).

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Ensure the engine is running.

2. Apply the brake pedal.

3. Press and hold the shift lockrelease button on the shift lever.

4. Move the shift lever to the desiredposition. For N (Neutral) hold thelever in the N (Neutral) positionuntil the N indicatorilluminates red.

5. The P indicator will turn white andthe gear indicator will turn redwhen the vehicle is no longer inP (Park).

6. After releasing the shift lever, itwill return to the center position.

If the vehicle cannot shift fromP (Park), a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may be displayed.Check that the ignition is on, theengine is running, the brake pedal isapplied, and the shift lock releasebutton is pressed when you areattempting to shift out of P (Park).If all of these are met but the vehiclewill not shift out of P (Park), see yourdealer for service.

Parking (ManualTransmission)

{ WarningIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, never get out of thevehicle without first moving theshift lever into 1st or R (Reverse),setting the parking brake andturning the ignition off. The vehiclecan roll, which could cause seriousinjury or death.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WarningThings that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehicleand ignite. Do not park over papers,leaves, dry grass, or other thingsthat can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementThis vehicle's engine may be equippedwith Active Fuel Management, whichallows the engine to operate on eitherall of its cylinders, or in reducedcylinder operation mode, dependingon the driving conditions.

When less power is required, such ascruising at a constant vehicle speed,the system will operate in reducedcylinder operation mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fuel economy.When greater power demands arerequired, such as accelerating from astop, passing, or merging onto afreeway, the system will maintainfull-cylinder operation.



If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) for moreinformation on using this display.

Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 243 andEngine Exhaust 0 245.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the remote key outsidethe vehicle, it will continue to run forup to 15 minutes.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the remote key insidethe vehicle, it will continue to run forup to 30 minutes.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.


The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Manual Transmission

The timer will reset if vehicle speedexceeds 4 km/h (2.5 mph).

Engine Exhaust

{ WarningEngine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areas withpoor ventilation (parking garages,tunnels, deep snow that mayblock underbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells or soundsstrange or different.

. The exhaust system leaks due tocorrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust system hasbeen modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). There are holes or openings inthe vehicle body from damage oraftermarket modifications thatare not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.

Running the Vehicle WhileParkedThe vehicle should not be left runningwhile parked.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park 0 243 andEngine Exhaust 0 245.



If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 320.


The shift pattern is displayed in thetop of the shift lever. The selectedgear position will illuminate red onthe shift lever, while all others will bedisplayed in white. If the shift is notimmediate, as in very cold conditions,the indicator on the shift lever mayflash until it is fully engaged.

The shift lever always starts from acenter position, represented by an up/down arrow on the shift pattern. Afterreleasing the shift lever, it will returnto the center position.

The transmission does not operatewhen the vehicle is off.

If the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY,the transmission can be shifted intoP (Park).

If the vehicle is turned off while at arelatively high vehicle speed, thetransmission will automatically shiftto N (Neutral). Once the vehicle isstopped, P (Park) is automaticallyselected.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when starting theengine to prevent the vehicle frommoving easily.

{ WarningIt is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the transmission is not inP (Park) with the parking brake set.The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If the engine hasbeen left running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when on fairlylevel ground, always set the parkingbrake and place the transmissioninto P (Park). See Shifting Into Park0 243 andElectric Parking Brake 0 255.



This vehicle is equipped with anelectronically controlled transmission.The shift lock release button isdesigned to prevent inadvertentshifting out of P (Park) unless theignition is on, the brake pedal isapplied, and the shift lock releasebutton is pressed.

When the vehicle is stopped, pressENGINE START/STOP to turn off thevehicle. The transmission will shift toP (Park) automatically unless thevehicle is in N (Neutral), See “CarWash Mode” following.

The vehicle will not shift into P (Park)if it is moving too fast. Stop thevehicle and shift into P (Park).

To shift in and out of P (Park), seeShifting Into Park 0 243 andShifting out of Park 0 244.

Service Shift Lever Message

If the message SERVICE SHIFTER SEEOWNER’S MANUAL appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC), theshift lever needs service. Have thevehicle serviced as soon as possible.If the vehicle is automatically shiftinginto P (Park), check to see if theP (Park) button on top of the shiftlever is stuck. To operate the vehicle,hold the shift lever in the desired gear,R (Reverse) or D (Drive), until vehiclespeed exceeds 15 km/h (10 mph), thenrelease the shift lever.

R : Use this gear to back up.

If the vehicle is shifted from eitherR (Reverse) to D (Drive) or M (ManualMode), or M (Manual Mode) orD (Drive) to R (Reverse) while thespeed is too high, the vehicle will shiftto N (Neutral). Reduce the vehiclespeed and try the shift again.

To shift into R (Reverse):

1. Bring the vehicle to acomplete stop.

2. Press and hold shift lock releasebutton on the side of the shiftlever.

3. From the center position, move theshift lever forward through the firstdetent to the end of travel. R isilluminated in red.


To shift out of R (Reverse):


2. Shift to the desired gear.


At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) canbe used to rock the vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 232.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicle isalready moving, use N (Neutral) only.



{ WarningShifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

CautionShifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the engine runningat high speed may damage thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.Be sure the engine is not running athigh speed when shifting thevehicle.

The vehicle is not designed to stay inN (Neutral) for more thanfive minutes. It may automaticallyshift into P (Park). N (Neutral) is not

intended for towing. If the vehicleneeds to be towed, see Towing theVehicle 0 396.

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Move the shift lever forward to thefirst detent from the centerposition.. If the vehicle is in P (Park),

apply the brake pedal and pressthe shift lock release buttonwhile moving the shift leverforward.

. N will illuminate in red.


To shift out of N (Neutral):


2. Shift to the desired gear. If shiftingfrom N (Neutral) to R (Reverse),press the shift lock release button.


Car Wash Mode

This vehicle includes a Car WashMode that allows the vehicle toremain in N (Neutral) for use inautomatic car washes.

Car Wash Mode (Engine Off – Driverin Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine off and the vehicleoccupied:

1. Drive to the entrance of thecar wash.


3. Shift to N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and release thebrake pedal.

5. The indicator should continue toshow N. If it does not, repeatSteps 2–4.

6. The vehicle is now ready for thecar wash.

Car Wash Mode (Engine Off – Driverout of Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine off and the vehicleunoccupied:





3. Open the door.


5. Turn off the engine and release thebrake pedal.


7. Exit the vehicle and close the door.The vehicle is now ready for thecar wash.

8. The vehicle may automatically shiftto P (Park) upon re-entry.

Car Wash Mode (Engine On – Driverin Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine on and the vehicleoccupied:




4. Release the brake pedal. Thevehicle is now ready for thecar wash.

Car Wash Mode (Engine On – Driverout of Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine on and the vehicleunoccupied:



3. Open the door.

4. Shift to N (Neutral), then releasethe brake pedal.


6. Exit the vehicle and close the door.The vehicle is now ready for thecar wash.

7. The vehicle may automatically shiftto P (Park) upon re-entry.

CautionA transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normal driving.If more power is needed for passing,press the accelerator pedal down.

To shift into D (Drive):


2. From the center position, move theshift lever back.. If the vehicle is in P (Park), press

the shift lock release buttonwhile pulling the shiftlever back.

. D will illuminate in red.

. After releasing the shift lever, itwill return to the centerposition.



To shift out of D (Drive):


2. Shift to the desired gear.


Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” under Lossof Control 0 220.

CautionSpinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.

If equipped with the 2.0L L4 engine,engine speeds may be increased whiledriving at highway speeds while theengine is still warming up.

Manual Mode

Tap Shift

CautionDriving with the engine at a highrpm without upshifting while usingTap Shift, could damage the vehicle.Always upshift when necessarywhile using Tap Shift.

If equipped, vehicles with Tap Shifthave controls on the back of thesteering wheel to manually shift theautomatic transmission.

Permanent Tap Shift Mode

To enter Permanent Tap Shift Mode:

1. With the vehicle in D (Drive), pullback on the shift lever to activateM (Manual Mode). The M in theshift pattern will illuminate in red,and the D will switch to white.While in Permanent Tap ShiftMode, the M on the instrumentcluster will be highlighted and thecurrent gear shown.


3. Pull the control toward you toshift. Pull the left control todownshift, and the right control toupshift. To shift to the lowestavailable gear, pull and hold theleft control.

To exit Permanent Tap Shift Mode:

1. To exit M (Manual Mode) andreturn to D (Drive), pull back onthe shift lever. The D in the shiftpattern will illuminate in red, andthe M will switch to white.




M (Manual Mode) can be exited toreturn to D (Drive) at any speed bypulling the lever rearward from thecenter position. It is not necessary tostop the vehicle or shift to N (Neutral)or P (Park) prior to shifting back toD (Drive).

Temporary Tap Manual Shift Mode

To enter Temporary Tap Shift Mode:

1. With the transmission in D (Drive)and not in Permanent Tap ShiftMode, the Tap Shift controls willactivate a Temporary Tap ManualShift Mode, allowing thetransmission to be manuallyshifted. While in Temporary TapShift Mode, the D on theinstrument cluster will behighlighted and the current gearshown.

2. To shift to the lowest availablegear, press and hold the leftcontrol.

3. To deactivate, hold the rightcontrol briefly. Automatic shiftsreturn after no manual shifts havebeen done for seven to 10 seconds.

While using Tap Shift, the vehicle willhave firmer, quicker shifting. This canbe used for sport driving or whenclimbing or descending hills, to stay ingear longer, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allowshifting into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and engine revolutionsper minute (rpm). The transmissionwill not automatically shift to the nexthigher gear if the engine rpm is toohigh. It will only automatically shift tothe next lower gear if the engine rpmis much too low.

Manual TransmissionIf equipped, this is the shift patternfor the manual transmission.

CautionShifting the vehicle initially intoany gear other than 1 (First) orR (Reverse) can damage the clutch.Shift the manual transmission inthe proper sequence, and time thegear shifting with the accelerator toavoid revving the engine anddamaging the clutch.



CautionThe message MANUALTRANSMISSION — RELEASECLUTCH PEDAL displays and achime sounds if the manualtransmission clutch pedal ispartially applied for an extendedperiod of time while the vehicle isbeing driven. Driving with theclutch pedal applied can reduce thelife of the clutch and/or damage it.Fully release the clutch pedal aftereach gear change.

CautionThe message REDUCEDPERFORMANCE — REDUCECLUTCH USE displays and enginetorque is momentarily limited ifexcessive manual transmissionclutch slip is detected while theclutch pedal is fully released. Thiscould be caused by a hot clutch.Apply less pressure on theaccelerator pedal when acceleratingfrom a stop. Also, fully release the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)accelerator pedal during gearchanges. This will allow the clutchto cool and should prevent furtherclutch slip while the clutch pedal isfully released. If this messagedisplays repeatedly, see your dealer.Repeated clutch slip could causepermanent damage.

CautionThe message TRANSMISSION ISHOT — SLOW DOWN displays anda chime sounds if the manualtransmission fluid is hot andvehicle speed is high. Driving withthe manual transmission fluidtemperature high can damage thevehicle. Drive at a slower speed tocool the manual transmission fluid.This message clears when thevehicle has slowed sufficiently or ifthe manual transmission fluid hascooled sufficiently.

1 (First) : Press the clutch pedal andshift into 1 (First). Slowly let up onthe clutch pedal while pressing on theaccelerator pedal.

After a complete stop, if it is hard toshift into 1 (First), let up on the clutchpedal, then press it back down andshift into 1 (First).

2 (Second) : Press the clutch pedaland let up on the accelerator pedal,then shift into 2 (Second). Then,slowly let up on the clutch pedal whileaccelerating.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth) : Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame as 2 (Second).

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal. Justbefore the vehicle stops, press theclutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to Neutral.

Neutral : Use this position when youstart or idle the engine. The shift leveris in Neutral when it is centered in theshift pattern, not in any gear.



R (Reverse) : To back up, press downthe clutch pedal, completely stop thevehicle, and shift into R (Reverse). Letup on the clutch pedal slowly whilepressing the accelerator pedal.

{ WarningIf you skip a gear whendownshifting, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. You couldinjure yourself or others. Do notshift down more than one gear at atime when downshifting.

CautionShifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicle isstopped.

CautionDo not rest your hand on the shiftlever while driving. The pressurecould cause premature wear in thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

CautionWhen downshifting, if more thanone gear is skipped, or the engine isracing when the clutch pedal isreleased, the engine, clutch,driveshaft or transmission could bedamaged.

No Lift-Shift

The vehicle can be shifted up a gearwhen the accelerator pedal is pressedto the floor without being released.This allows for less power interruptionand will improve acceleration times.This feature is available in all vehiclemodes and is only active when theengine speed is greater than 5000 rpm.

Active Rev MatchVehicles equipped with a manualtransmission have Active Rev Match(ARM). ARM aids in smoother shiftingby matching the engine speed to thenext selected gear. By monitoring shiftlever and clutch operation, ARMadjusts engine speed to match acalibrated value based on gearselection. On upshifts and downshifts,engine speed will be increased anddecreased to match vehicle road speedand transmission gear position. ARMis maintained while the clutch pedal ispressed, but will deactivate if the shiftlever is left in the Neutral position.



The system is activated anddeactivated by pressing the ARMswitch on the center console. Thesystem must be activated with eachnew ignition cycle. If ARM isdeactivated, the system will stillperform rev matching for upshifts.

A gear indicator in the instrumentcluster displays the current gearselected. ARM is also shown in thePerformance View of the HUD:. When ARM is activated, the gearnumber is amber.

. When ARM is deactivated, the gearnumber is white.

. If no gear number is displayed whilethe shift lever is in gear, service isrequired. All rev matching will bedisabled, and the malfunctionindicator lamp will be on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp (CheckEngine Light) 0 106. The clutch andmanual transmission will continueto operate normally.

ARM will also:. Be active above 28 km/h (18 mph).. Match engine speed up to5400 rpm.

. Not operate when the acceleratorpedal is applied.

. Be disabled when the coolanttemperature is below 0 °C (32 °F).

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature always sendengine power to all four wheels. It isfully automatic, and adjusts itself asneeded for road conditions.

Brakes

Electric Brake BoostVehicles equipped with electric brakeboost have hydraulic brake circuitsthat are electronically controlled whenthe brake pedal is applied duringnormal operation. The systemperforms routine tests and turns offwithin a few minutes after the vehicleis turned off. Noise may be heardduring this time. If the brake pedal ispressed during the tests or when theelectric brake boost system is off, anoticeable change in pedal force andtravel may be felt. This is normal.

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)The Antilock Brake System (ABS)helps prevent a braking skid andmaintain steering while braking hard.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 109.

ABS does not change the time neededto get a foot on the brake pedal anddoes not always decrease stoppingdistance. If you get too close to thevehicle ahead, there will not beenough time to apply the brakes ifthat vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room ahead tostop, even with ABS.



Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly. Hearing andfeeling ABS operate is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows steering and braking at thesame time. In many emergencies,steering can help even more thanbraking.

Electric Parking Brake

The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) canalways be applied, even if the vehicleis off. In case of insufficient electricalpower, the EPB cannot be applied or

released. To prevent draining thebattery, avoid unnecessary repeatedcycles of the EPB.

The system has a red parking brakestatus light and an amber serviceparking brake warning light. SeeElectric Parking Brake Light 0 108 andService Electric Parking Brake Light0 109. There are also parkingbrake-related Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages.

Before leaving the vehicle, check thered parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Press the EPB switch momentarily.

The red parking brake status light willflash and then stay on once the EPB isfully applied. If the red parking brakestatus light flashes continuously, thenthe EPB is only partially applied orthere is a problem with the EPB.A DIC message will display. Release

the EPB and try to apply it again.If the light does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced. Donot drive the vehicle if the red parkingbrake status light is flashing. See yourdealer.

If the amber service parking brakewarning light is on, press the EPBswitch. Continue to hold the switchuntil the red parking brake status lightremains on. If the amber serviceparking brake warning light is on, seeyour dealer.

If the EPB is applied while the vehicleis moving, the vehicle will decelerateas long as the switch is pressed. If theswitch is pressed until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB will remainapplied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations when thevehicle is not moving. This is normal,and is done to periodically check thecorrect operation of the EPB system,or at the request of other safetyfunctions that utilize the EPB.

If the EPB fails to apply, block the rearwheels to prevent vehicle movement.



EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Press the EPB switch momentarily.

The EPB is released when the redparking brake status light is off.

If the amber service parking brakewarning light is on, release the EPB bypressing and holding the EPB switch.Continue to hold the switch until thered parking brake status light is off.If either light stays on after release isattempted, see your dealer.

CautionDriving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parkingon a hill, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 320.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made to driveaway. Avoid rapid acceleration whenthe EPB is applied, to preserve parkingbrake lining life.

Brake AssistBrake Assist detects rapid brake pedalapplications due to emergency brakingsituations and provides additionalbraking to activate the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) if the brake pedal is notpushed hard enough to activate ABSnormally. Minor noise, brake pedalpulsation, and/or pedal movementduring this time may occur. Continueto apply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates. Brake Assistdisengages when the brake pedal isreleased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

{ WarningDo not rely on the HSA feature.HSA does not replace the need topay attention and drive safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by this system.Failure to use proper care whendriving may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. See DefensiveDriving 0 217.

When the vehicle is stopped on agrade, Hill Start Assist (HSA)temporarily prevents the vehicle fromrolling in an unintended directionduring the transition from brake pedalrelease to accelerator pedal apply. Thebrakes release when the acceleratorpedal is applied or automaticallyrelease after a few seconds. The brakesmay also release under otherconditions. Do not rely on HSA tohold the vehicle.

HSA is available when the vehicle isfacing uphill in a forward gear,or when facing downhill in



R (Reverse). The vehicle must come toa complete stop on a grade for HSA toactivate.

Automatic VehicleHold (AVH)

{ WarningDo not rely on this feature. It doesnot replace the need to payattention and drive safely. You maynot hear or feel alerts or warningsprovided by this system. Failure touse proper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

When Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH)is turned on and the vehicle is brakedto a stop, AVH prevents the vehiclefrom moving during the transitionfrom brake pedal release to acceleratorpedal apply. The brakes release whenthe accelerator pedal is applied. Thebrakes may also release under otherconditions. Do not rely on AVH tohold the vehicle.

If the accelerator pedal is not appliedwithin a few minutes, the ElectricParking Brake will apply. The parkingbrake will also apply if the driver dooris opened or the driver seat belt isunfastened while AVH is holding thevehicle.

AVH can be turned on by pressingAUTO HOLD. The indicator light onthe switch will come on. The AVHlight on the instrument panel willcome on while AVH is actively holdingthe vehicle. See Automatic Vehicle Hold(AVH) Light 0 110.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/ElectronicStability ControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC).These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that any ofthe drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system brakes thespinning wheel(s) and/or reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak/ESC activates when thecomputer senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak/ESC selectively appliesbraking pressure at any one of thevehicle's brakes to help steer thevehicle in the intended direction.



If cruise control is being used and TCSor StabiliTrak/ESC begins to limitwheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when road conditionsallow.

Both systems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started and beginsto move. The systems may be heard orfelt while they are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. This isnormal and does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessary toturn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 232 and “Turningthe Systems Off and On” later in thissection.

The indicator light for both systems isin the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message may display in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on to indicatethat the system is inactive and is notassisting the driver in maintainingcontrol. The vehicle is safe to drive,but driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. if d comes on andstays on, the vehicle may need moretime to diagnose the problem. If thecondition persists, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Off and On



CautionDo not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS is off.The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster.A DIC message may display.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turn offuntil the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until thetraction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g come on and stay onin the instrument cluster. A DICmessage may display.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC onagain, press and release g. Thetraction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g in the instrumentcluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle's performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications 0 328.

Driver Mode ControlDriver Mode Control (DMC) allows thedriver to adjust the overall drivingexperience to better suit driverpreference by adjusting vehiclesystems to fit specific driving needs.Drive mode availability and affectedvehicle systems are dependent onvehicle trim level, region, and optionalfeatures.

If the vehicle is in Tour Mode or MyMode, it will stay in that modethrough future ignition cycles. If thevehicle is in any other mode, it willreturn to Tour Mode when the vehicle

is restarted. When a mode is selected,an indicator will come on in theinstrument cluster and stay on.

Mode Activation

Driver Mode Control Switch forAutomatic Transmission



Driver Mode Control Switch forManual Transmission

To activate, press the MODE switch onthe center console. Use the up anddown arrows to move throughthe menu.

V-Mode Switch (Variant 1)

V-Mode Switch (Variant 2)

Depending on trim level, the V-Modeswitch may be located on the rightside or left side of the steering wheel.To activate V-Mode, press the V-Modeswitch on the steering wheel. Todeactivate, select a different modeusing the DMC switch, or press theV-Mode switch again.

Performance Traction Management(PTM) Switch

If equipped, PTM can be activatedthrough a PTM switch on the steeringwheel by pressing up on the switch.A PTM menu will appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Press up ordown on the PTM switch to scroll



through the options and make aselection. To exit PTM, selectINACTIVE in the PTM menu.

Mode Description

Tour Mode

Use for normal city and highwaydriving to provide a smooth, soft ride.This mode provides a balance betweencomfort and handling. This is thestandard mode. See “Mode SelectionAttributes” later in this section. WhenTour Mode is selected, no indicatorwill display.

Sport Mode

Use this mode where road conditionsor personal preference demand a morecontrolled response. When this modeis selected, the vehicle immediatelydownshifts. The vehicle also monitorsdriving behaviors and automaticallyenables Performance Shift Featureswhen spirited driving is detected.These features maintain lowertransmission gears to increase

available engine braking and improveacceleration response. The vehicle willexit this feature and return to normaloperation after a short period whenspirited driving is no longer detected.The steering changes to provide moreprecise control. If the vehicle hasMagnetic Ride Control, the suspensionchanges to provide better corneringperformance.

See “Mode Selection Attributes” laterin this section.

Snow/Ice Mode

Use this mode for slippery surfaces tohelp control wheel speed. This modecan compromise the acceleration ondry asphalt.

This feature is not intended for usewhen the vehicle is stuck in sand,mud, or gravel. If the vehicle is stuck,see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 232.


Track Mode (V-Series and V-SeriesBlackwing)

When in Track Mode, the automatictransmission and steering functionsimilar to Sport Mode. The acceleratorpedal is adjusted to give maximumcontrol during the highest level ofspirited driving. The Magnetic RideControl will be set to the optimumlevel for vehicle responsiveness. PTMcan be accessed through this mode.See “Performance TractionManagement” in Competitive DrivingMode 0 265.


While driving on a track, turn offapplicable driver assistance features.For more information see AssistanceSystems for Driving 0 304.



My Mode

My Mode is used to personalizeeveryday driving. This mode isdesigned to allow the driver toconfigure vehicle systems to their ownpreference for city or normal driving.

Through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the following vehiclesystems may be available forcustomization in this mode.. Engine Sound: Stealth, Tour(Default), Sport, Track

. Steering: Tour (default), Sport,Track

. Suspension: Tour (default), Sport,Track

. Brake Response: Tour (default),Sport, Track

For information on the range ofsettings, see “Drive ModeCustomization”.

V-Mode (V-Series and V-SeriesBlackwing)

V-Mode is used to personalizedynamic driving. This mode isdesigned to allow the driver toconfigure vehicle sub-systems to theirown preference for maximumhandling. V-Mode further enhancesthe drivers experience by adding apowertrain customization. Throughthe DIC, the following vehicle systemsmay be available for customization inthis mode.. Engine Sound: Stealth, Tour, Sport(default), Track

. Steering: Tour, Sport (default),Track

. Suspension: Tour, Sport, (default),Track

. Powertrain: Tour, Sport, (default),Track, Snow/Ice

. PTM: OFF, WET, DRY, SPORT, RACE1, RACE 2

. Brake Response: Tour, Sport, Track

For information on the range ofsettings, see “Drive ModeCustomization”.



Mode Selection Attributes

Modes: TOURDefault

SPORT TRACK SNOW/ICE

Powertrain Tour Tour Track Snow/Ice

Throttle Progression Tour Tour Track Snow/Ice

Transmission Shift Mode Tour Sport Track Tour

Engine Sound Tour Sport Track Tour

Steering Tour Sport Track Tour

Suspension (if equipped with Magnetic RideControl)

Tour Sport Track Tour

Traction and Stability Control Tour Tour Track Tour

Competitive Driving Mode (if equipped) Not Available Available Not Available Not Available

Performance Traction Mode (if equipped) Not Available Not Available Available Not Available

Brake Response Tour Sport Track Tour

Throttle Progression

Adjusts throttle sensitivity byselecting how quick or slow thethrottle reacts to input.

. Snow/Ice - The accelerator pedalreduces engine torque at smallpedal inputs. This allows betterwheel control on slippery surfaces.

. Track - The accelerator pedaladjusts to give maximum controlduring the highest level of spiriteddriving.

Transmission Shift Mode

Sport or Track – DynamicPerformance Mode (DPM) allows thetransmission to hold the current gearafter a quick release of a heavilyapplied accelerator pedal. Thisprovides greater engine braking andenhanced vehicle control without



using the paddles. DPM recognizesaggressive cornering, heavy braking,and high acceleration to select andhold lower gears when not usingpaddles. The shifts are also firmer toincrease the quickness of shifting.

Engine Sound

Adjusts the volume of engine noise.

The sound level changes when thevariable exhaust valves open.

Steering (Assist Effort)

Adjusts from a lighter steering feel inTour Mode to reduced assist in Sportand Track Mode for moresteering feel.

Magnetic Ride Control (If Equipped)

Adjusts the shock dampeningfirmness from a comfort in Tour Modeto an optimized responsiveness tunein Sport and Track.

Stability Control. Competitive Mode allows lesscomputer control to permit someslide and drift and is selected withthe TCS/StabiliTrak button – onlyavailable in Sport Mode.

. StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) can be turned off bypressing and holding the TCS/StabiliTrak button for five seconds.

Brake Response

Adjusts brake pedal sensitivity byselecting how quick or slow the brakesrespond to input.

Drive Mode Customization

The following settings can be changedusing the Drive Mode CustomizationMenu. See “Settings>Vehicle>DriveMode Customization” in the centerdisplay to customize My Mode orV-Mode.

Engine Sound

Engine sound adjusts the volume ofengine noise. The settings range fromquietest to loudest volume fromStealth through Track.

–Stealth, Tour, Sport, Track

Steering

Steering adjusts the effort required toturn the steering wheel. The steeringwheel offers better feedback in theTour setting, but requires more effortin the Sport and Track settings.

–Tour, Sport, Track

Suspension

Suspension adjusts the firmness of thesuspension in the vehicle. Suspensionadjusts the stiffness of the shocks and/ or springs. The ride is morecomfortable at lower settings and isstiffer at higher settings for bettercontrol.


Powertrain

Powertrain adjusts the throttleresponse, gear shifting and engineperformance. Throttle responseincreases in the Sport, Track, andSnow/Ice settings, and gear shifting ismore aggressive.

–Tour, Sport, Track, Snow/Ice



Brake Response

Brake Response adjusts the brakepedal response. Settings range from aslower response for more comfortabledriving to the quickest response forquicker deceleration. Brake pedaltravel decreases and caliper pressureincreases in the Sport and Tracksettings.


PTM (Performance TractionManagement) (If Equipped)

PTM controls vehicle performancesystems for professional handling onrace tracks. Traction Control andStability Control are reduced whenmoving through each of the settings.Changing PTM settings may alsoautomatically change the othersubsystem settings. While driving on atrack, turn off all active safetyfeatures. While driving on a track,turn off applicable driver assistancefeatures. For more information, seeAssistance Systems for Driving 0 304.For more information on PTM, seeCompetitive Driving Mode 0 265.

–Off, Wet, Dry, Sport, Race 1, Race 2

Competitive Driving ModeTo select this optional handling mode,press g quickly two times and theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay COMPETITIVE MODE ON.While in the Competitive DrivingMode, the traction off light i andStabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g will comeon in the instrument cluster. TractionControl System (TCS) does not limitwheel spin, the Electronic Limited-SlipDifferential (eLSD) allows increasedvehicle agility, and more effort isrequired to turn the steering wheel.See “Limited-Slip Differential (V-SeriesOnly)” later in this section. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

Press g again, or turn the vehicle toAccessory Mode and restart thevehicle, to turn TCS back on. Thetraction off light i and StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g will go out.

CautionWhen traction control is turned off,or Competitive Driving Mode isactive, it is possible to lose traction.

Performance TractionManagement (PTM)

If equipped, PTM can be activatedthrough V-Mode customization or bypressing the ESC switch twice while inTrack Mode. Depending on availableoptions and trim levels, it can also beactivated through a separate PTMswitch on the steering wheel.

To activate PTM through V-Modecustomization, select the desired PTMstate in the center stack(Vehicle>Settings>Drive ModeCustomization>V-Mode). Press theV-Mode switch once to activateV-Mode. When PTM is configured, amessage will appear in the DIC“V-Mode Active – Press Again for PTMOn – ESC May be Disabled.” Toconfirm and enter PTM, press theV-Mode switch again. The PTM statecan now be modified using the MODEswitch or changing the V-Mode PTMsettings in the center stack. Both theV-Mode and PTM indicators aredisplayed. To exit PTM, press the ESCswitch. To cancel, press the centerdismiss button on the steering wheel(V-Mode remains active).



If available, PTM can also be activatedthrough a PTM switch on the steeringwheel by pressing up on the switch.From there a PTM menu will appearin the DIC. Press up or down on thePTM switch to scroll through theoptions and make a selection. To exitPTM, select INACTIVE in the PTMmenu, turn off PTM in the V-Modeconfiguration page, or press the ESCswitch once.

Selecting PTM states may modify Off,Wet, Dry, Sport, Race 1 and Race 2V-Mode customization options.

In vehicles with a PTM steering wheelswitch, Inactive, Wet, Dry Sportr,Racce 1, and Race 2 PTM states areavailable through the moding menu.

In vehicles without a PTM steeringwheel switch, Wet, Dry, Sport, Race1 and Race 2 PTM states are availablethrough the moding menu.

The following is a DIC displaydescription and the recommendedusage of each mode:

WET. Intended for all driver skill levels.

. Wet or damp conditions only — notintended for use in heavy rain orstanding water.

. StabiliTrak/ESC is on and enginepower is reduced based onconditions.

DRY. For use by less experienced driversor while learning a new track.

. Dry conditions only.

. StabiliTrak/ESC is on and enginepower is slightly reduced.

SPORT. For use by drivers who are familiarwith the track.


. Requires more driving skillthan DRY.

. StabiliTrak/ESC is on and moreengine power is available thanin DRY.

RACE 1. For use by drivers who are familiarwith the track.


. Requires more driving skill thanmodes DRY or SPORT.

. StabiliTrak/ESC is off and availableengine power is the same as SPORT.

RACE 2. For use by experienced drivers whoare familiar with the track.


. Requires more driving skill than inother modes.

. StabiliTrak/ESC is off and enginepower is available for maximumcornering speed.

In any PTM Mode, Launch Control isavailable. Use PTM Race 2 for themost consistent performance duringdrag strip use. See “Custom LaunchControl” in Track Events andCompetitive Driving (V-Series andV-Series Blackwing) 0 220.

Launch Control

If equipped, Launch Control isavailable within Competitive DrivingMode and PTM to allow high levels ofvehicle acceleration in a straight line.Launch Control is a form of tractioncontrol that manages tire spin whilelaunching the vehicle. This feature isintended for use during closed course



race events where consistent zero to60 and quarter mile times aredesirable.

Launch Control is only available whenthe following criteria are met:. Competitive Driving Mode isselected or any of the PTM modesare selected. The traction off lightcomes on in the instrument clusterand the appropriate DIC messagedisplays.

. The vehicle is not moving.

. The steering wheel is pointingstraight.

Automatic Transmissions. The brake pedal is firmly pressed tothe floor, equivalent to a panicbrake event.

. The accelerator pedal is rapidlyapplied to wide open throttle. If thevehicle rolls due to wide openthrottle, release the throttle, pressthe brake pedal more firmly, andreapply the accelerator to wide openthrottle.

Launch Control will initially limitengine speed as you rapidly apply theaccelerator pedal to wide open

throttle. Allow the engine rpm tostabilize. A smooth, quick release ofthe brake pedal, while maintaining thefully pressed accelerator pedal, willmanage wheel slip.

After the vehicle is launched, thesystem continues in CompetitiveDriving Mode or PTM.

Competitive Driving Mode, PTM, andLaunch Control are systems designedfor a closed course race track and notintended for public roads. The systemsare not intended to compensate forlack of driver experience or familiaritywith the race track.

Limited-Slip DifferentialIf equipped, the ElectronicLimited-Slip Differential (eLSD) isautomatically activated. eLSD activelymonitors vehicle sensors and driverinputs to determine the amount ofchange for the conditions. With eLSD,the vehicle has:. Enhanced high-speed control.. Improved traction through corners,allowing more acceleration.

. More precise steering.

. Increased vehicle agility.

. Integration with StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC).

For vehicles with eLSD, driven undersevere conditions, the rear axle fluidshould be changed. See CompetitiveDriving Mode 0 265 andMaintenance Schedule 0 411.

Cruise Control

{ WarningCruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely at asteady speed. Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping your foot



on the accelerator. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below about40 km/h (25 mph).

If equipped with a manualtransmission, the cruise control willremain active when the gears areshifted. The cruise is disengaged if theclutch is pressed for several seconds.

If the Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system begins to limit wheel spinwhile using cruise control, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 257. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control is disengaged.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 304. When road conditionsallow cruise control to be safely used,it can be turned back on.

Cruise control will disengage if eitherTCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

RES+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If the cruise control isalready active, use to increase vehiclespeed. To increase speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent.To increase speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press RES+ to the second detent.

SET− : Press briefly to set the speedand activate cruise control. If thecruise control is already active, use to

decrease vehicle speed. To decreasespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET−to the first detent. To decrease speedto the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark onthe speedometer, press SET− to thesecond detent.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise Control

IfJ is on when not in use, SET− orRES+ could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. KeepJ offwhen cruise is not being used.

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−. The desiredset speed briefly appears in theinstrument cluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has been setto the desired speed, a green cruisecontrol indicator appears on theinstrument cluster and a cruise setspeed message appears on theHead-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes are appliedor * is pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press RES+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:. Press and hold RES+ until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed in smallincrements, briefly press RES+ tothe first detent. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph)faster.

. To increase vehicle speed in largerincrements, briefly press RES+ tothe second detent. For each press,the vehicle speed increases to thenext 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster (BaseLevel) 0 96 orInstrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 98. Theincrement value used depends on theunits displayed.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:. Press and hold SET− until thedesired lower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press SET−to the first detent. For each press,the vehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) slower.

. To decrease the vehicle speed inlarger increments, briefly pressSET− to the second detent. For eachpress, the vehicle speed decreases tothe next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark onthe speedometer.

The cruise control system mayautomatically brake to slow thevehicle down.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increasethe vehicle speed. When you take yourfoot off the pedal, the vehicle will slowdown to the previous set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying SET−will result in cruise set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, youmight have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain your speed. Whengoing downhill, the cruise controlsystem may automatically brake toslow the vehicle down. Also, you may



have to brake or shift to a lower gearto keep your speed down. If the brakepedal is applied, cruise controldisengages.

Ending Cruise Control

There are five ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. Press the clutch pedal for severalseconds or shift to Neutral (manualtransmissions).

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory ifJ is pressed or if theignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise Control(Advanced)If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) allows the cruise control setspeed and following gap to beselected. Read this entire section

before using this system. Thefollowing gap is the following timebetween your vehicle and a vehicledetected directly ahead in your path,moving in the same direction. If novehicle is detected in your path, ACCworks like regular cruise control. ACCuses camera and radar sensors. SeeRadio Frequency Statement 0 439.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle or applylimited, moderate braking to maintainthe selected following gap. Todisengage ACC, apply the brake. If theTraction Control System (TCS) orStabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system activates while ACC isengaged, ACC may automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 257. Whenroad conditions allow ACC to be safelyused, ACC can be turned back on. ACCwill not engage if the TCS orStabiliTrak/ESC electronic stabilitycontrol system is disabled.

ACC can reduce the need for you tofrequently brake and accelerate,especially when used on expressways,freeways, and interstate highways.When used on other roads, you mayneed to take over the control ofbraking or acceleration more often.

{ WarningACC has limited braking ability andmay not have time to slow thevehicle down enough to avoid acollision with another vehicle youare following. This can occur whenvehicles suddenly slow or stopahead, or enter your lane. Also see“Alerting the Driver” in this section.Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 217.



{ WarningACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors are blocked bysnow, ice, or dirt. The systemmay not detect a vehicle ahead.Keep the entire front of thevehicle clean.

. Visibility is low, such as in fog,rain, or snow conditions. ACCperformance is limited underthese conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip.

J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

RES+ : Press briefly to resume theprevious set speed or to increasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyengaged. To increase speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent.To increase speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press RES+ to the second detent.

SET– : Press briefly to set the speedand activate ACC or to decreasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyengaged. To decrease speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press SET− to the first detent.

To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press SET− to the second detent.

* : Press to disengage ACC withouterasing the selected set speed.

[ : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.


Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

To switch between ACC and regularcruise control, press and hold *.A Driver Information Display (DIC)message displays. See Vehicle Messages0 125.



ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a green oindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster. When the regular cruisecontrol is engaged, a greenJindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster and the following gap will notdisplay.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set to thelast mode used before the vehicle wasturned off.

{ WarningAlways check the cruise controlindicator on the instrument clusterto determine which mode cruisecontrol is in before using thefeature. If ACC is not active, the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle will not automatically brakefor other vehicles, which couldcause a crash if the brakes are notapplied manually. You and otherscould be seriously injured or killed.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

Ifo is on when not in use, SET-/RES+ could be pressed by mistake andactivate ACC when not desired. Keepo off when cruise is not being used.

Select the set speed desired for ACC.This is the vehicle speed when novehicle is detected in its path.

While the vehicle is moving, ACC willnot set at a speed below a minimumspeed, although it can be resumed.If equipped with Super Cruise, thisminimum speed is 5 km/h (3 mph),otherwise, it is 25 km/h (15 mph). Theminimum allowable set speed is25 km/h (15 mph).

To set ACC while moving:

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle ahead isdetected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

ACC can also be set while the vehicleis stopped if ACC is on and the brakepedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD), if equipped. When ACCis turned on, the indicator will be litwhite. When ACC is engaged, theindicator will turn green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selecting theset speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If ACC is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, ACC isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.



To begin using ACC again, press RES+up briefly while moving more than5 kph (3 mph). The vehicle returns tothe previous set speed.

If the vehicle is stopped with thebrake pedal applied, press RES+ andrelease the brake pedal. ACC will holdthe vehicle until RES+ or theaccelerator pedal is pressed.

A green ACC indicator and the setspeed display on the instrumentcluster. The vehicle ahead indicatormay be flashing if a vehicle ahead waspresent and moved. See “Approachingand Following a Vehicle” later in thissection.

Once ACC has resumed, if there is novehicle ahead, if the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap,or if the vehicle has exited a sharpcurve, then the vehicle speed willincrease to the set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC Is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do one ofthe following:. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET– . Releasethe control and the acceleratorpedal. The vehicle will now cruise atthe higher speed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brake becauseit is overridden. The ACC indicatorwill turn blue on the instrumentpanel and heads up display,if equipped

. Press and hold RES+ until thedesired set speed is displayed, thenrelease it.

. To increase speed in smallerincrements, press RES+ to the firstdetent. For each press, the vehiclegoes 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press RES+ to thesecond detent. For each press, thevehicle speed increases to the next5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.

The set speed can also be increasedwhile the vehicle is stopped.. If stopped with the brake applied,press RES+ until the desired setspeed is displayed.

. If ACC is holding the vehicle at astop and there is another vehicledirectly ahead, pressing RES+ willincrease the set speed.

. Pressing RES+ when there is nolonger a vehicle ahead or the vehicleahead is pulling away and the brakeis not applied will cause the ACC toresume.

When it is determined there is novehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap,then the vehicle speed will increase tothe set speed.




Reducing Speed While ACC Is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do one ofthe following:. Use the brake to get to the desiredlower speed. Release the brake andpress SET−. The vehicle will nowcruise at the lower speed.

. Press and hold SET− until thedesired lower speed is displayed,then release it.

. To decrease speed in smallerincrements, press SET− to the firstdetent. For each press, the vehiclegoes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press or hold SET− tothe second detent. For each press,the vehicle speed decreases to thenext 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.

The set speed can also be decreasedwhile the vehicle is stopped.

. To decrease speed while the vehicleis stopped, press SET− until thedesired set speed is displayed.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the instrumentcluster and the HUD (if equipped).Subsequent presses cycle the gapbutton through three settings: Far,Medium, or Near. The gap setting willbe maintained until it is changed.

Since each gap setting corresponds toa following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow a vehicledetected ahead. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting the

following gap. The range of selectablegaps may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alert timingsensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) forthe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)feature. See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System 0 304.

Courtesy Gap (If Equipped withSuper Cruise)

Press and Hold[ on the steeringwheel when vehicle is moving totemporarily increase the gap with thevehicle ahead to allow for mergingtraffic.

Press and Hold[ when stopped tocancel ACC from resumingautomatically (if the stop is brief) andremain stationary. This can be used toallow traffic to merge between youand the vehicle ahead.

Press RES+ or the accelerator pedal toresume ACC. Following distance gapwill return to the original selectionafter hold.



Alerting the Driver

If ACC is engaged, driver action maybe required when ACC cannot applysufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, thecollision alert symbol will flash on thewindshield. Either eight beeps willsound from the front, or both sides ofthe Safety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. See “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 126.

See Defensive Driving 0 217.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster and HUD display,if equipped.

The vehicle ahead indicator onlydisplays when a vehicle is detected inyour vehicle’s path moving in thesame direction.

If this symbol is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake tovehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow a detected vehicle ahead at theselected follow gap. The vehicle speedincreases or decreases to follow adetected vehicle in front of yourvehicle when that vehicle is travelingslower than your vehicle set speed.It may apply limited braking,if necessary. When braking is active,

the brake lamps will come on. Theautomatic braking may feel or sounddifferent than if the brakes wereapplied manually. This is normal.

Passing a Vehicle While Using ACC

If the set speed is high enough, andthe left turn signal is used to pass avehicle ahead in the selected followinggap, ACC may assist by graduallyaccelerating the vehicle prior to thelane change.

{ WarningWhen using ACC to pass a vehicleor perform a lane change, thefollowing distance to the vehiclebeing passed may be reduced. ACCmay not apply sufficientacceleration or braking whenpassing a vehicle or performing alane change. Always be ready tomanually accelerate or brake tocomplete the pass or lane change.



Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ WarningACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for a vehicleit has never detected moving. Thiscan occur in stop-and-go traffic orwhen a vehicle suddenly appearsdue to a vehicle ahead changinglanes. Your vehicle may not stopand could cause a crash. Usecaution when using ACC. Yourcomplete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes.

Irregular Objects Affecting ACC

ACC may have difficulty detecting thefollowing objects:. Vehicles with cargo extending fromthe back end.

. Non-standard shaped vehicles, suchas vehicle transport, vehicles with aside car fitted, or horse carriages.

. Objects that are close to the front ofyour vehicle.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengage andyou will need to manually apply thebrakes to slow the vehicle when:. The sensors are blocked.. The Traction Control System (TCS)or StabiliTrak/ESC system hasactivated or been disabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar falsely reports blockagewhen driving in a desert or remotearea with no other vehicles orroadside objects.

. A DIC message may display toindicate that ACC is temporarilyunavailable.

The ACC indicator will turn whitewhen ACC is no longer active.

In some cases, when ACC will notactivate, regular Cruise Control maybe used. See “Switching Between ACCand Regular Cruise Control” previouslyin this section. Always considerdriving conditions before using eithercruise control system.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a follow gap behinda detected vehicle and slow yourvehicle to a stop behind that vehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle ahead indicatorwill flash as a reminder to checktraffic ahead before proceeding. Inaddition, the left and right sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse threetimes, or three beeps will sound. See“Alert Type” and “Adaptive Cruise GoNotifier” in “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 126.



When the vehicle ahead drives away,ACC resumes automatically if the stopwas brief. If necessary, press RES+ orthe accelerator pedal to resume ACC.If stopped for more than two minutesor if the driver door is opened and thedriver seat belt is unbuckled, the ACCautomatically applies the ElectricParking Brake (EPB) to hold thevehicle. The EPB status light will turnon. See Electric Parking Brake 0 255.To release the EPB, press theaccelerator pedal.

A DIC warning message may displayindicating to shift to P (Park) beforeexiting the vehicle.

{ WarningIf ACC has stopped the vehicle, andif ACC is disengaged, turned off,or canceled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop. The vehiclecan move. When ACC is holding thevehicle at a stop, always beprepared to manually apply thebrakes.

{ WarningLeaving the vehicle without placingit in P (Park) can be dangerous. Donot leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by ACC. Alwaysplace the vehicle in P (Park) andturn off the ignition before leavingthe vehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicator turnsblue on the instrument cluster and inthe HUD (if equipped) to indicate thatautomatic braking will not occur. ACCwill resume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not being pressed.

{ WarningThe ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ WarningOn curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following a vehicleexiting or entering exit ramps. Youcould lose control of the vehicle orcrash. Do not use ACC while drivingon an entrance or exit ramp. Alwaysbe ready to use the brakes ifnecessary.

{ WarningOn curves, ACC may respond to avehicle in another lane, or may nothave time to react to a vehicle inyour lane. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you, or lose controlof your vehicle. Give extra attentionin curves and be ready to use thebrakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving incurves.



ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce the vehiclespeed if the curve is too sharp.

If equipped, the curve speed controlindicatorn may illuminate greenwhen ACC is actively controlling thevehicle speed and detects a sharpcurve on the road ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown while navigating the curve andmay increase speed out of the curve,but will not exceed the set speed.

When following a vehicle and enteringa curve, ACC may not detect thevehicle ahead and accelerate to the setspeed. When this happens, the vehicleahead indicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is notin your lane and apply the brakes.

ACC may occasionally provide an alertand/or braking that is consideredunnecessary. It could respond tovehicles in different lanes, signs,guardrails, and other stationaryobjects when entering or exiting acurve. This is normal operation. Thevehicle does not need service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Objects Not Directly in Front of YourVehicle

The detection of objects in front ofthe vehicle may not be possible if:. The vehicle or object ahead is notwithin your lane.

. The vehicle ahead is shifted, notcentered, or is shifted to one side ofthe lane.



Driving in Narrow Lanes

Vehicles in adjacent traffic lanes orroadside objects may be incorrectlydetected when located along theroadway.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills and WhenTowing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving on steephills or when towing a trailer. ACC willnot detect a vehicle in the lane whiledriving on steep hills. If the brakes areapplied, ACC disengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The ACC set speed is erased frommemory ifJ is pressed or if theignition is turned off.

Weather Conditions Affecting ACC

System operation may be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.

Accessory Installations and VehicleModifications

Do not install or place any objectaround the front camera windshieldarea that would obstruct the frontcamera view.

Do not install objects on top of thevehicle that overhang and obstruct thefront camera, such as a canoe, kayak,or other items.

Do not modify the hood, headlamps,or fog lamps, as this may limit thecamera’s ability to detect an object.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on the windshieldbehind the rearview mirror and theradar sensors on the front of thevehicle can become blocked by snow,

ice, dirt, or mud. These areas need tobe cleaned for ACC to operateproperly.

If ACC will not operate, regular CruiseControl may be available. See“Switching Between ACC and RegularCruise Control” previously in thissection. Always consider drivingconditions before using either cruisecontrol system.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 399.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.

Super CruiseIf equipped, Super Cruise can steer tomaintain lane position under certainconditions on Super Cruise-enabledroads that are separated fromopposing traffic.

Super Cruise can also steer to performa lane change under certainconditions on Super Cruise-enabledroads.



A lane change can be initiated by thedriver using the turn signal lever. TheSuper Cruise System may initiate alane change maneuver in thefollowing scenarios:. To pass slower traffic. When the current lane is endingahead

. To return to the initial lane

See “Super Cruise Lane Change” laterin this section and Turn andLane-Change Signals 0 138.

{ WarningSuper Cruise can only assist tomaintain lane position, or steer tochange lanes, when driving oncompatible roads. You mustsupervise the driving task andmonitor the road conditions. Youmay need to respond to trafficevents by steering, braking,or accelerating. See DefensiveDriving.

Super Cruise is:

. Not a self-driving system(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Not a crash avoidance or warningsystem

. Not a substitute for propersupervision of the driving task.

Super Cruise uses the following todetect the current lane position andlane markings ahead on compatibleroads under certain conditions:. Cameras. Global Positioning System (GPS)sensing

. A high-precision map

. GPS-enhancement data downloadedthrough Connected Services

Super Cruise works with AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), which controlsacceleration and braking while SuperCruise is enabled and operating.Review and understand both thissection and the ACC section beforeusing Super Cruise. See AdaptiveCruise Control (Advanced) 0 270.

An active Connected Service plan thatincludes Super Cruise Services isrequired to use Super Cruise.

{ WarningSuper Cruise does not perform allaspects of driving, nor does it doeverything a driver can do. SuperCruise only steers to maintainvehicle position in the current laneor, under some circumstances, tochange lanes. Super Cruise can onlybe used with Adaptive CruiseControl.

Super Cruise does:

. Not prevent crashes or warn ofpossible crashes.

. Not steer to avoid stopped orslow-moving vehicles,cross-traffic, constructionbarriers or cones, motorcycles,children, pedestrians, animals,or other objects on the road.

. Not steer in response to vehiclesor objects next to your vehicle,including vehicles attempting toenter your lane.

. Not respond to traffic lights, stopsigns, or other traffic controldevices.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued). Not respond to crossing traffic.

. Not make turns.

. Not steer to merge onto or toexit highways.

. Not steer to avoid, or steerthrough construction zones.

. Not function on surface streets.

. Not respond to crossing oroncoming traffic.

. Not function in city drivingconditions.

{ WarningSome state and local laws mayrequire hands to be kept on thesteering wheel at all times. Onlyremove your hands from thesteering wheel if Super Cruise isengaged, it is safe to do so, and it ispermitted by state and local laws.

{ WarningFailure to supervise the driving taskand to respond appropriately, evenwhile Super Cruise is operating, cancause a crash. Super Cruise may notrespond as you would to all drivingsituations and may not maintainlane position under all conditions.

It is extremely important to payattention to the operation of thevehicle, even while using SuperCruise. Do not use a hand-helddevice while driving, even withSuper Cruise engaged. To preventserious injury or death:

. Always remain properly seated inthe driver seat with your seatbelt fastened.

. Never remove your hands fromthe steering wheel when SuperCruise is not operating.

. Always make sure trafficconditions are safe before usingSuper Cruise.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Always keep the entire vehicleand the sensors clean. Sensorsare on the front, sides, and rearof the vehicle.

. Always observe posted speedlimits. Only use Super Cruise ator below the posted speed limit.

Super Cruise should not be used incomplex or uncertain drivingconditions, including:

. Not in construction zones.

. Not when approaching or exitingtoll plazas.

. Not when approaching anintersection that is controlledwith a traffic light, stop sign,or other traffic control device.

. Not when lane markings are notpresent or cannot be detected.For example, there is too muchglare, weather conditions arepoor, or lanes are poorly marked.

. Not on slippery or icy roads.(Continued)



Warning (Continued). Not in adverse weatherconditions, including rain, sleet,fog, ice, or snow.

. Not on winding or hilly roads.

. Not for city driving.

. Not during heavy or emergencybraking.

. Not on surface streets.

. Not on a road shoulder, servicedrive, or under an elevatedfreeway.

. Not when towing a trailer.

. Not in a highway exit lane.

When Super Cruise is Available

Super Cruise Indicator

Super Cruise is designed to operateonly when:

. ACC is on. See Adaptive CruiseControl (Advanced) 0 270.

. Teen Driver is not active.

. The GPS detects the vehicle is on acompatible road.

. Both the camera and the radarsensors are functioning and notcovered, obstructed, or damaged.

. The Driver Attention System (DAS)detects the driver's head and eyesare directed toward the road ahead.

. The lane markings are clearly visibleand able to be detected by thesystem.

Poor Conditions

Poor Conditions

{ WarningTo prevent serious injury or death:

. Always check that Super Cruiseis available^ beforepressing].

. Only remove your hands fromthe steering wheel if the steeringwheel light bar,^, and\ aregreen. Super Cruise may notbegin steering immediately, evenwhen Super Cruise is availableand] has been pressed.



To engage:

. PressJ to turn on ACC. Make surethe white\ indicator displays inthe instrument cluster. See AdaptiveCruise Control (Advanced) 0 270.When Super Cruise is available, thewhite^ will display in theinstrument cluster.

. Press].

ACC will set the speed to thecurrent vehicle speed or resume tothe higher previously stored ACC setspeed.

When engaged and not steering thevehicle, the steering wheel light barflashes blue, and^ will be blue. Thedriver is in control of steering andSuper Cruise is not steering thevehicle.

When the vehicle is positioned in thecenter of the lane, the steering wheellight bar and^ display will turngreen, indicating Super Cruise issteering the vehicle.

When Super Cruise controls thesteering, traffic and other conditionsand laws permit, and it is safe to doso, your hands can be taken off thesteering wheel.

Always pay attention to the road andthe operation of the vehicle. Alwaysmonitor and be attentive ofsurrounding traffic, including vehiclesthat may cross the road in front ofyour vehicle.

Super Cruise steering can beoverridden with manual steering atany time. When Super Cruise isengaged, always be prepared to take

immediate action — includingsteering, accelerating, and brakingquickly, if necessary.

When Super Cruise is engaged, theForward Collision System will alertand brake.

Steering Manually and ChangingLanes

The vehicle can always be manuallysteered, even with Super Cruiseengaged; for example, when manuallychanging lanes.

When the steering wheel is movedmanually, the steering wheel light barflashes blue and^ on theinstrument cluster turns blue toindicate Super Cruise is not steeringthe vehicle.

When ready to allow Super Cruise toresume steering again, position thevehicle in the center of the lane, holdthe steering wheel until the steeringwheel light bar turns green, and thenrelease the steering wheel when it issafe to do so.



Super Cruise does not respond tovehicles in other lanes near yourvehicle.

{ WarningTo help prevent crashes beforemaking a lane change:

. Always check mirrors.

. Glance over your shoulder.

. Use the turn signals.

Super Cruise Lane Change

Super Cruise can steer to perform asingle lane change under certainconditions when requested by thedriver.

To request a lane change:

1. Verify the lane next to your vehicleis clear and conditions are safe tomake a lane change.

2. Use the turn signal lever to activatethe turn signal in the direction ofthe desired lane change.

3. Return the turn signal lever to theneutral position after the lanechange. See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals 0 138.

Super Cruise System may initiate asingle lane change when enabledthrough Vehicle Personalization 0 126under following conditions:. The Super Cruise System mayinitiate a lane change to the left topass a slower moving vehicle aheadand a subsequent lane change toright to return to your original lane.

. Super Cruise System may initiate alane change to left or right whencurrent lane is ending ahead.

. To cancel a Super Cruise lanechange, return the turn signal leverto the neutral position or move theturn signal lever.

. Super Cruise steering can beoverridden with manual steering atany time to cancel a Super Cruiselane change.

. If Super Cruise detects that traffic isclear, Super Cruise will steer thevehicle to perform the lane change.A message appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) during thelane change to provide moreinformation on the status of thelane change.

. The Super Cruise Lane Changefeature can be enabled or disabledthrough the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Super Cruise LaneChange” under VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

{ WarningSuper Cruise Lane Change may notdetect a vehicle in an adjacent lane.Always supervise the driving taskand monitor traffic conditions whenusing the Super Cruise Lane Changefeature. Only request a lane changewhen traffic conditions are safe fora lane change, and always be readyto manually steer the vehicle. See“Steering Manually and ChangingLanes” listed previously in thissection.



Take Over Alert

{ WarningSuper Cruise will not maintain thevehicle’s speed while the steeringwheel light bar is flashing red.If the steering wheel light barflashes red, immediately resumemanual steering to prevent seriousinjury or death. If you do notresume manual steering, the vehiclewill begin to slow in the same laneand eventually come to a completestop on the road.

To begin steering manually, hold thesteering wheel firmly (with bothhands) using the highlighted regionsas shown in the picture below.

Any time the steering wheel light barflashes red, resume manual steeringimmediately. The instrument clusterlight^, will also turn red and amessage will display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). In addition,beeps will sound, or the Safety AlertSeat will vibrate. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 126. After you beginsteering manually, Super Cruise willdisengage.

The red flashing steering wheel lightbar could occur under any of thefollowing conditions:. Lane markings are poor, or visibilityis limited.

. The Driver Attention System (DAS)does not detect that the driver'shead and eyes are directed towardthe road.

. ACC is canceled.

. The vehicle is on a tight curve,or the lanes are too wide, or thevehicle goes into a curve too fast.

. The compatible road ends.

. The vehicle is approaching anintersection controlled by a trafficlight, stop sign, or other trafficcontrol device.

. A Super Cruise system fault occurs.

. Super Cruise is unable to completethe lane change maneuver.



Attention to the Road

{ WarningSuper Cruise is a driver assistancesystem and cannot accuratelydetect or predict all situations.Super Cruise is not a crashavoidance system. To preventserious injury or death, you mustsupervise the driving task andmonitor the road conditions. Youmay need to respond to trafficevents by steering, braking,or accelerating. See DefensiveDriving 0 217. Super Cruise alsocannot determine whether you areawake, asleep, impaired, or properlyfocused on safe driving. The vehiclecould crash into other vehicles,drive out of the lane, or drive offthe road. Complete attention isalways required while driving, evenwhile using Super Cruise. Beprepared to take over steering orapply the brakes at any time.

{ WarningTo prevent serious injury or death,be alert and pay special attentionwhen passing highway exits,entrances, and crossings with SuperCruise, and be ready to take controlof the vehicle when necessary.Changes in lane markings aroundexits and entrances canmomentarily cause Super Cruise tonot detect the correct lane. If thisoccurs, Super Cruise may attemptsteering inputs to bring the vehicleback into the correct lane and, inrare circumstances, couldover-correct and cause the vehicleto momentarily cross into a lanenext to your vehicle unless youmanually steer to maintain yourlane position.

The Driver Attention System (DAS) onthe steering column continuallymonitors driver head and eye positionto estimate driver attention to theroad. The camera does not record orshare pictures, audio, or video.

Sunglasses, hats, or other types ofclothing that change the shape of thehead may interfere with cameraperformance. To improve cameraperformance, raise or lower thesteering wheel, or change the seatposition.

Pay close attention to the road aheadto avoid these three increasing alerts:



First Alert

. If the steering wheel light bar flashes green, the system has detected that your head and eyesmay not be directed toward the road.

. The flashing will stop when the system detects that your head and eyes appear to be directedtoward the road.

Second Alert

. If the steering wheel light bar flashes green for too long, Super Cruise will alert the driver totake control of steering immediately by flashing the light bar red. Also, either beeps will soundor the Safety Alert Seat will vibrate. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

. Take over steering, then Super Cruise will disengage.

. To re-engage Super Cruise, press]. See “Using Super Cruise” previously in this section.

Third Alert

. If the steering wheel light bar flashes red for too long, a voice command will tell you to takecontrol of the vehicle.

. Take control of the steering immediately; ACC and Super Cruise will disengage.

. A DIC message will indicate that Super Cruise is locked out. Super Cruise cannot be re-engageduntil the next ignition cycle.

. Continued failure to take over steering will cause the vehicle to brake to a stop and OnStar willbe called. The brake lamps and hazard warning flashers will come on.

. Take control of the vehicle and continue driving.



Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects; Cross-Traffic

{ WarningSuper Cruise is not a crashavoidance system and will not steeror brake to avoid a crash. SuperCruise does not steer to prevent acrash with stopped or slow-movingvehicles. You must supervise thedriving task and may need to steerand brake to prevent a crash,especially in stop-and-go traffic orwhen a vehicle suddenly entersyour lane. Always pay attentionwhen using Super Cruise. Failure todo so could result in a crashinvolving serious injury or death.

Curves in the Road

{ WarningThe vehicle could drift out of yourlane of travel. To prevent crashes,always be ready to manually steer.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Super Cruise may not detect yourlane on curves in the road. SuperCruise may not detect the markingsthat show your lane. You may nothave time to react to a vehicle inthe lane next to your vehicle whileon curves in the road.

Super Cruise may operate differentlyin sharp curves. The vehicle may driftout of your lane of travel if the curveis too sharp.

When entering a curve, Super Cruisemay not detect the lane markings andmay not adjust the steering enough to

stay in your lane of travel. When thishappens, you will need to steer thevehicle.

Super Cruise may detect other lanemarkings that are not in your laneand may or may not steerappropriately to maintain your lane.

Super Cruise may occasionally providean alert and/or steering that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to lane markings in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does not needservice.



Other Vehicles Entering Your Lane

Super Cruise may not detect a vehiclethat enters your lane, or may notbrake fast enough to avoid a crash.You must manually brake and steerthe vehicle.

Intersections; Vehicles Crossing theRoad Ahead

Super Cruise will not brake the vehiclewhen approaching an intersection thatis controlled by a traffic light or stopsign. Super Cruise will not detectvehicles crossing the road ahead,including at intersections, and will notautomatically steer or brake toprevent a collision. You mustmanually brake and steer the vehicle.

Towing a Trailer

Do not use Super Cruise when towinga trailer. For towing capability, seeGeneral Towing Information 0 319.

Super Cruise on Hills

Do not use Super Cruise while drivingon steep hills.

Super Cruise Indicator LightSummary

The steering wheel light bar andinstrument cluster light provide thefollowing important information aboutSuper Cruise operation:



Steering Wheel Light Bar Instrument Cluster Light Super Cruise Description

Off OffSuper Cruise is off. There is no automatic steering. Operate thevehicle manually.

Off White Super Cruise is available and can be engaged.

Solid Green Solid GreenSuper Cruise is steering. Pay attention to the road and vehicleoperation.

Flashing Blue Solid BlueSuper Cruise is not steering. Operate the vehicle manually. See“Steering Manually and Changing Lanes” previously in thissection.

Flashing Green Solid GreenSuper Cruise has detected you are not paying sufficiently closeattention to the road. Pay attention to the road. See “Attentionto the Road” previously in this section.

Flashing Red Solid RedTake over steering immediately. Super Cruise will disengage. See“Take Over Alert” previously in this section.

Disengaging Super Cruise

There are two ways to disengageSuper Cruise:

. Press] while your hands are onthe steering wheel. The Super Cruisesteering will disengage.

. Press the brake pedal while yourhands are on the steering wheel.Both Super Cruise steering andAdaptive Cruise Control willdisengage.

Super Cruise Messages

If^ does not appear,] can bepressed to display a DIC message as towhy the system is unavailable.

Immediately after a disengagement,pressing the] within 10 seconds willdisplay a DIC message with the reasonfor Super Cruise disengagement.



Super Cruise Message Summary

Unavailable Turn on Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control must be on before Super Cruise canbe enabled.

. Set speed is not required before enabling Super Cruise.

. Adaptive Cruise Control is not required to be engagedbefore enabling Super Cruise.

Unavailable Approved Roads Only Super Cruise is disabled because the vehicle is being drivenon a road that is not compatible.

Unavailable Lane Ending Super Cruise is disabled because the driving lane is ending.

Unavailable Poor Weather Conditions Super Cruise is disabled due to inclement weatherconditions affecting system performance.

Unavailable No Road Information . There is no map information available for that portionof the road. Recent road reconstruction may turn offSuper Cruise for that section of road until new mapinformation is available.

. The vehicle is not on the correct type of road.A controlled access freeway or compatible dividedhighway is required for Super Cruise.

. There are lanes entering or exiting on both the left andright side of the road.

. The vehicle is approaching an interchange orintersection. The message will appear for 10 secondsor less.



Super Cruise Message Summary (cont'd)

Unavailable Sensors Can’t Find Lane Lines . Rain or snow is inhibiting the system’s ability to seelane lines.

. Direct sunlight is on the front camera at dawn or dusk.

. There are missing or poor lane line markings onthe road.

. There is sun glare on the road surface.

. There is heavy rain, puddles, or road spray.

Unavailable Sensor Can’t See Face Clearly . Cups, food, hands, or other objects are obscuring theDAS view of the driver’s face.

. The steering column is pointed too high or low for theDAS to see the driver. Adjust the steering column or theseat if the message occurs frequently.

. Sun is shining into the Driver Attention System (DAS)camera.

. Dawn or dusk sun glare is on the driver’s face.

Unavailable Looking Away From Road for Too Long The DAS system detects that the driver is not looking atthe road.

Unavailable Driving Too Fast The vehicle is traveling faster than 137 km/h (85 mph).The maximum Super Cruise speed in curves will vary basedon how sharp the curve is. The vehicle will automaticallydecrease speed if needed.

Unavailable Driving in Exit Lane The Super Cruise system has detected that the vehicle is inan exit lane.



Super Cruise Message Summary (cont'd)

Unavailable Press OnStar Button . The owner’s required Connected Services subscriptionmay have ended.

. There may be poor GPS reception (e.g., in isolatedareas).

. The GPS reception may be blocked by objects such astall buildings or other large structures.

. Press the Blue OnStar button in your vehicle to speakwith an OnStar representative, who can help determinethe issue and what actions to take.

Unavailable You Have Taken Vehicle Control . The brake pedal is being pressed.

. The Adaptive Cruise Control has been canceled orturned off.

Unavailable Sensor Blocked Clear snow, ice, dirt, or other contaminants from the frontand rear areas of the vehicle.

Unavailable Sharp Curve Some curves are too sharp to be navigated by the SuperCruise system. Super Cruise will be available after the curveis traveled.

Super Cruise Unavailable Super Cruise is unavailable for reasons not described inother messages.

Super Cruise Locked Out See Owner’s Manual The driver did not take control of the vehicle whenprompted by the Super Cruise system. The Super Cruisesystem will be disabled until the ignition is turned off andback on.



Map Updates

Super Cruise map information mustbe periodically updated at least onceevery seven months to determinewhether Super Cruise is available oncertain roads.

See the following website for SuperCruise map open source compliancedocumentation, including the licenseinformation:

http://oss.veoneer.com/

Data Download

If the vehicle is equipped with OnStarand has an active service plan,additional data may be collectedthrough the OnStar system. Thisincludes information about: thevehicle’s operation; a crash involvingthe vehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features; and, in certain situations,the location and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Location Services

This setting enables or disablessharing of vehicle location outside thevehicle for certain purposes. Even ifthe Location Services setting isdisabled, vehicle location informationwill continue to be shared foremergency services and Super Cruise,if equipped.

System Care

The camera on the steering columnhas a lens cover that may becomedirty over time and affect cameraperformance. Clean the lens coverwith a soft cloth sprayed with glasscleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dryit. Never use abrasive cloths/cleanersor corrosive chemicals of any kind onthe lens cover.

Super Cruise uses the front radar,front camera, and 360-degree camerasfor its operation. Clean surfaces arerequired for Super Cruise operation.See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced)0 270, “Surround Vision Camera”under Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 296, and Lane Keep Assist(LKA) 0 312 for care information.

CautionThe Super Cruise system is a highlysophisticated system and shouldonly be serviced by technicianswith the proper training, tools, andsafety instructions, which yourdealer has. Without proper trainingand tools the vehicle may becomedamaged.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashes orreduce crash damage while driving,backing, and parking. Read this entiresection before using these systems.

{ WarningDo not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. These systemsdo not replace the need for payingattention and driving safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by thesesystems. Failure to use proper care

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

when driving may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 217.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objects outsidethe area monitored by thesystem.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility or badweather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensor isnot cleaned or is covered by ice,snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensor iscovered up, such as with asticker, magnet, or metal plate.

. Work if the area surrounding thedetection sensor is damaged ornot properly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance features alertthe driver of obstacles by beeping. Tochange the volume of the warningchime, see “Comfort and Convenience”under Vehicle Personalization 0 126.

If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat,the driver seat cushion may provide avibrating pulse alert instead ofbeeping. To change this, see“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.

. Front and rear bumpers and thearea below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the front grilleor near the front emblem


296 DRIVING AND OPERATING. Front side and rear side panels. Outside of the windshield in front ofthe rearview mirror

. Side camera lens on the bottom ofthe outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera above thelicense plate

Radio Frequency

This vehicle may be equipped withdriver assistance systems that operateusing radio frequency. See RadioFrequency Statement 0 439.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), FrontPark Assist (FPA), Surround Vision,Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) andBacking Warning System, and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may helpthe driver park or avoid objects.Always check around the vehicle whenparking or backing.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press Home orBack on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of approximately 12 km/h(8 mph) while in D (Drive).

1. View Displayed by the Camera

1. View Displayed by the Camera2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that RPA or RCTA has detectedan object. This triangle changes fromamber to red and increases in size thecloser the object.

{ WarningThe camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or any

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

other object outside of the cameras’field of view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Showndistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not drive orpark the vehicle using only thesecamera(s). Always check behind andaround the vehicle before driving.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

Surround Vision SystemIf equipped, Surround Vision shows animage of the area surrounding thevehicle, along with the front or rearcamera views on the infotainmentdisplay. The front camera is in thegrille or near the front emblem, theside cameras are on the bottom of theoutside mirrors, and the rear camerais above the license plate.

The Surround Vision system can beaccessed by selecting CAMERA in theinfotainment display or when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). To

return to the previous screen sooner,press any button on the infotainmentsystem, shift into P (Park), or reach avehicle speed of approximately12 km/h (8 mph).

{ WarningThe Surround Vision cameras haveblind spots and will not display allobjects near the corners of thevehicle. Folding outside mirrors thatare out of position may not displaysurround view correctly. Alwayscheck around the vehicle whenparking or backing.

1. Views Displayed by the SurroundVision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by the SurroundVision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

Camera Views

Touch the camera view buttons alongthe bottom of the infotainmentdisplay.



Front/Rear Standard View : Displaysan image of the area in front orbehind the vehicle. Touch Front/RearStandard View on the infotainmentdisplay when a camera view is active.Touching the button multiple timeswill toggle between front and rearcamera views.

If equipped, the front view cameraalso displays when the Park Assistsystem detects an object within30 cm (12 in).

Front/Rear Overhead View : Displaysa front or rear overhead view of thevehicle. Touching the button willtoggle between the two views.

Side Forward/Rearward View :Displays a view that shows objectsnext to the front or rear sides of thevehicle. Touch Side Forward/RearwardView on the infotainment displaywhen a camera view is active.Touching the button multiple timeswill toggle between forward andrearward views. Rear Pedestrian Alert,Park Assist, and RCTA are notavailable when Side Forward/Rearwardview is active.

Guidance Lines : Displays availableguidelines. The horizontal markingsrepresent distance from the vehicle.

Top Down View : Displays an imageof the area surrounding the vehicle,along with other views in theinfotainment display. Top Down canbe enabled or disabled by pressing theTop Down View button multipletimes.

Park AssistThe vehicle may be equipped with theRear Park Assist (RPA) or Front andRear Park Assist (FRPA). The ParkAssist system may provide assistanceto driver when backing up andparking. Park Assist uses ultrasonicsensors in the bumpers to measurethe distance between the vehicle andobjects. The system calculates thedistance between vehicle and objectvia measuring the time it takes for theultrasonic waves to bounce back fromthe object. Park Assist works only atspeeds up to about 11 Km/h (7 mph).An illuminated LED in the parkingassist button indicates that thesystem is ready to operate. Thesensors on the bumpers may detect

objects up to 1.8m (6 ft) behind and1.25m (4 ft) in front of the vehiclewithin a zone 25 cm (10 in) high offthe ground and below bumper level.These detection distances may beshorter during warmer or humidweather. Blocked sensors will notdetect objects and can also cause falsedetections. Keep the sensors clean ofmud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; andclean sensors after a car wash infreezing temperatures.

{ WarningThe Park Assist System is nosubstitute for careful and attentivedriving. The Park Assist systemdoes not detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists, animals,or objects located below thebumper or that are too close or toofar from the vehicle. It is notavailable at speeds greater than11 km/h (7 mph). To prevent injury,death, or vehicle damage, even withPark Assist, always check the area

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

around the vehicle and check allmirrors before moving forward orbacking.

How the System Works

The instrument cluster may have aPark Assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object,” drivingdirection, and object locationinformation for the Park Assistsystem. As the object gets closer, morebars light up and the bars changecolor from yellow to amber to red.

When an object is very close to thevehicle rear (<0.6m (2 ft)), five beepswill sound from the rear followed by acontinuous beep from the rear,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat

will pulse five times. When an objectis very close to the vehicle front(<0.3m (1 ft)), a continuous beep willsound from the front, or both sides ofthe Safety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST : If thismessage occurs, check the followingconditions:. The sensors are not clean. Keep thevehicle's rear bumper free of mud,dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Forcleaning instructions, see ExteriorCare 0 399.

. The Park Assist sensors are coveredby frost or ice. Frost or ice can formaround and behind the sensors andmay not always be seen; this canoccur after washing the vehicle incold weather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF : If the PA systemdoes not activate due to a temporarycondition, the appropriate messagedisplays on the DIC. PA OFF messageis displayed when disabled by thedriver. Front/Rear PA OFF message isdisplayed when an attached object isdetected in the front or rearrespectively. PA TemporarilyUnavailable message is displayed forsystem failures. This can occur underthe following conditions:. The driver has disabled the system.. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed, RPAwill return to normal operation.

. The bumper is damaged. Take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

. Other conditions, such as vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a verylarge truck, are affecting systemperformance.



Turning the Feature On or Off

TouchX on the center stack to turnon or off the Front and Rear ParkAssist, Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB), and the Backing WarningSystem at the same time. Theindicator light next to the buttoncomes on when the features are onand turns off when the features havebeen disabled.

Turn off Park Assist when towing atrailer.

To turn the RPA symbols or guidancelines (on some models) on or off, see“Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols”under Vehicle Personalization 0 126.

Automatic ParkingAssist (APA)If equipped, APA searches for andsteers the vehicle into parallel andperpendicular parking spots. Whenusing APA, you must still shift gearswhile the system applies the brakesand accelerator. A display and audiblebeeps help to guide parkingmaneuvers.

Do not use APA when towing a trailer.

{ WarningAPA may not detect objects in theparking space, objects that are softor narrow, objects high off theground such as flatbed trucks,objects below ground level such aslarge potholes, or moving objects(e.g. pedestrians). Always verify thatthe parking space is appropriate forparking a vehicle. APA does notrespond to changes in the parkingspace, such as movement of anadjacent vehicle, or a person orobject entering the parking space.APA does not detect or avoid trafficthat is behind or alongside of thevehicle. Always be prepared to stopthe vehicle during the parkingmaneuver.

TouchO on the center stack toenable the system to search for aparking space that is large enough andwithin 1.5 m (5 ft) of the vehicle. Thevehicle speed must be below30 km/h (18 mph). The system cannot:. Detect whether it is a legal parkingspace.

. Park exactly lined up with thevehicle next to it if the spot isapproached at an angle or if theparking space is angled.

. Park exactly centered in a spot thatis marked too large.

. Always detect short curbs.

When enabled, APA searches forparallel parking spaces to the right ofthe vehicle. To search for a parkingspace to the left, turn on the left turnsignal or, if available, change the sideselection in the infotainment display.To switch the parking mode betweenparallel and perpendicular, change theparking mode in the infotainmentdisplay.



After completely passing a largeenough space, an audible beep occurs.A red stop symbol and a shift toreverse message are displayed.

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), butdoes not steer into the expectedspace, this may be because the systemis maneuvering the vehicle into apreviously detected space. The APAsystem does not need service.

APA will instruct the vehicle to stoponce a large enough space is found.Follow the displayed instructions.When instructed to drive in reverse,shift to R (Reverse) to engageautomatic steering. The steering wheelwill vibrate briefly as a reminder toremove hands from the steeringwheel. Check surroundings andcontinue braking or accelerating as

needed, and be prepared to stop toavoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects.If the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), APA is automaticallydisengaged.

A progress arrow displays the statusof the parking maneuver. Dependingon the space size, additionalmaneuvers may be required, and therewill be additional instructions. Whenchanging gears, allow the automaticsteering to complete before continuingthe parking maneuver. APA will beepand display a PARKING COMPLETEmessage. Secure the vehicle againstrolling away by applying parkingbrake.

APA may automatically disengage if:. The steering wheel is used by thedriver.

. The maximum allowed speed isexceeded.

. The parking brake is applied or thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

. There is a failure with the APAsystem.

. Electronic stability control orantilock brakes are activated.

. The driver opens the door with anunbuckled seat belt.

The brake holds the vehicle until theparking brake or brake is applied,or the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

To cancel APA, touchO again.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly

The APA system may require a shortperiod of driving along curves tocalibrate.

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)

Backing Warning and ReverseAutomatic Braking (RAB)

Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) have the Backing WarningSystem and Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system. When inR (Reverse), Backing Warning alerts ofrear objects at vehicle speeds greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph), and RAB mayautomatically brake hard at speedsbetween 1–32 km/h (0.5–20 mph).



The Backing Warning System willbeep once from the rear when anobject is first detected, or pulse twiceon both sides of the Safety Alert Seat.When the system detects a potentialcrash, beeps will be heard from therear, or five pulses will be felt on bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat. Theremay also be a brief, sharp applicationof the brakes.

{ WarningThe Backing Warning System onlyoperates at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detectchildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or objects below thebumper or that are too close or toofar from the vehicle. In somesituations, such as at higherbacking speeds, there may not beenough time for the short, sharpapplication of the vehicle brakesystem to occur. To prevent injury,death, or vehicle damage, even withthe Backing Warning System,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforebacking.

When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),if the system detects the vehicle isbacking too fast to avoid a crash witha detected object behind your vehiclein your path, it may automaticallybrake hard to a stop to help avoid orreduce the harm caused by a backingcrash.

{ WarningRAB may not avoid many types ofbacking crashes. Do not wait for theautomatic braking to apply. Thissystem is not designed to replacedriver braking and only works inR (Reverse) when an object isdetected directly behind the vehicle.It may not brake or stop in time toavoid a crash. It will not brake forobjects when the vehicle is movingat very low speeds. It does notdetect children, pedestrians,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bicyclists, animals, or objects belowthe bumper or that are too close ortoo far from the vehicle. To preventinjury, death, or vehicle damage,even with RAB, always check thearea around the vehicle before andwhile backing.

Pressing the brake pedal after thevehicle comes to a stop will releaseRAB. If the brake pedal is not pressedsoon after the stop, the ElectricParking Brake (EPB) may be set. Whenit is safe, press the accelerator pedalfirmly at any time to override RAB.

{ WarningThere may be instances whereunexpected or undesired automaticbraking occurs. If this happens,either press the brake pedal orfirmly press the accelerator pedal torelease the brakes from the RABsystem. Before releasing the brakes,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

check the RVC and check the areaaround the vehicle to make sure itis safe to proceed.

Rear Pedestrian AlertUnder certain conditions, this featurecan provide alerts for a pedestrianwithin the system’s range directlybehind the vehicle. This feature onlyworks in R (Reverse) below 12 km/h(8 mph), and detects pedestrians up to8 m (26 ft) away during daytimedriving. During nighttime driving,feature performance is very limited.

Rear Pedestrian Alert Indicator

When a pedestrian is detected withinthe system’s range directly behind thevehicle, this symbol flashes amber onthe infotainment display, along withtwo beeps from the rear, or if

equipped, two pulses from both sidesof the driver seat. When a pedestrianis detected close to the vehicle, thesymbol flashes red on theinfotainment display, along with sevenbeeps from the rear, or if equipped,seven pulses from both sides of thedriver seat.

{ WarningRear Pedestrian Alert does notautomatically brake the vehicle.It also does not provide an alertunless it detects a pedestrian, and itmay not detect all pedestrians if:

. The pedestrian is not directlybehind the vehicle, fully visibleto the Rear Vision Camera (RVC),or standing upright.

. The pedestrian is part of a group.

. The pedestrian is a child.

. Visibility is poor, includingnighttime conditions, fog, rain,or snow.

. The RVC is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). The RVC, taillamps, or back-uplamps are not cleaned or inproper working condition.

. The vehicle is not in R (Reverse).

To help avoid death or injury,always check for pedestriansaround the vehicle before backingup. Be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 217. Keep the RVC,taillamps, and back-up lamps cleanand in good repair.

Rear Pedestrian Alert can be set to Offor Alert. See “Rear PedestrianDetection” in “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 126. If equipped, alerts can be set tobeeps or seat pulses. See “Alert Type”in “Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.



Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, RCTA displays a redwarning triangle with a left or rightpointing arrow to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either three beepssound from the left or right or threeSafety Alert Seat pulses occur on theleft or right side, depending on thedirection of the detected vehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend out fromthe back of the vehicle do not movefurther back when a trailer is towed.

Turning the Feature On or Off

Turn off RCTA when towing a trailer.

RCTA can also be turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving the vehiclein a forward gear, Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane ChangeAlert (LCA), Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB), and/or the FrontPedestrian Braking (FPB) System canhelp to avoid a crash or reduce crashdamage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemThe FCA system may help to avoid orreduce the harm caused by front-endcrashes. When approaching a vehicleahead too quickly, FCA provides a redflashing alert on the windshield andrapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visual alertif following another vehicle tooclosely.

FCA detects vehicles within a distanceof approximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 8 km/h(5 mph). If the vehicle has Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC), it can detectvehicles to distances of approximately110 m (360 ft) and operates at allspeeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control(Advanced) 0 270.

{ WarningFCA is a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails, bridges,construction barrels, or otherobjects. Be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 217.

FCA can be disabled through vehiclepersonalization. See "Collision/Detection Systems" under VehiclePersonalization 0 126.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected, thevehicle ahead indicator will displaygreen. Vehicles may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills, due to poor visibility; or if avehicle ahead is partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects. FCA willnot detect another vehicle ahead untilit is completely in the driving lane.

{ WarningFCA does not provide a warning tohelp avoid a crash, unless it detectsa vehicle. FCA may not detect avehicle ahead if the FCA sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a vehicle on winding

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

With Head-Up Display

Without Head-Up Display

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. Whenthis Collision Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can causea brief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you are followinga vehicle ahead too closely.



Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near.The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DIC. Additionalbutton presses will change thissetting. The chosen setting willremain until it is changed and willaffect the timing of both the CollisionAlert and the Tailgating Alert features.The timing of both alerts will varybased on vehicle speed. The faster thevehicle speed, the farther away thealert will occur. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting the

alert timing. The range of selectablealert timings may not be appropriatefor all drivers and driving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the followinggap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).

Following Distance Indicator

The following distance to a movingvehicle ahead in your path is indicatedin following time in seconds on theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119. The minimumfollowing time is 0.5 seconds away.If there is no vehicle detected ahead,or the vehicle ahead is out of sensorrange, dashes will be displayed.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessary alertsfor turning vehicles, vehicles in otherlanes, objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts are normaloperation and the vehicle does notneed service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correct theissue:. Clean the outside of the windshieldin front of the rearview mirror.

. Clean the entire front of the vehicle.

. Clean the headlamps.

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB)The AEB system may help avoid orreduce the harm caused by front-endcrashes. AEB also includes IntelligentBrake Assist (IBA). When the systemdetects a vehicle in the path aheadthat is traveling in the same direction,it can provide a boost to braking,or automatically brake the vehicle, toavoid a crash. This can help avoid orlessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This Automatic EmergencyBraking can only occur if a vehicle isdetected. When detecting a vehicle,the Forward Collision Alert (FCA)



vehicle ahead indicator light will beon. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 304.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicleswith Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detectvehicles up to approximately 60 m(197 ft).

{ WarningAEB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Do notrely on AEB to brake the vehicle.AEB will not brake outside of itsoperating speed range and onlyresponds to detected vehicles.

AEB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles, especiallyvehicles with a trailer, tractors,muddy vehicles, etc.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Detect a vehicle when weatherlimits visibility, such as in fog,rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if it ispartially blocked by pedestriansor other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.

AEB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, AEBmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB or firmly press theaccelerator pedal.

{ WarningAEB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

turning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override AEB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providing aboost to braking based on the speedof approach and distance to a vehicleahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continueto be applied as needed. IBA willautomatically disengage only whenthe brake pedal is released.

{ WarningIBA may increase vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block the flowof traffic. If this occurs, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and thenapply the brakes as needed.



AEB and IBA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 126.

{ WarningUsing AEB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

The AEB system does not needservice.

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) SystemIf equipped, the FPB system may helpavoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes with nearbypedestrians when driving in a forwardgear. FPB displays an amber indicator,~, when a nearby pedestrian isdetected ahead. When approaching adetected pedestrian too quickly, FPBprovides a red flashing alert on thewindshield and rapidly beeps or pulsesthe driver seat. FPB can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This systemincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA),and the Automatic Emergency Braking(AEB) System may also respond topedestrians. See Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) 0 306.

The FPB system can detect and alertto pedestrians in a forward gear atspeeds between 8 km/h (5 mph) and80 km/h (50 mph). During daytimedriving, the system detectspedestrians up to a distance ofapproximately 40 m (131 ft). Duringnighttime driving, system performanceis very limited.

{ WarningFPB does not provide an alert orautomatically brake the vehicle,unless it detects a pedestrian. FPBmay not detect pedestrians,including children:

. When the pedestrian is notdirectly ahead, fully visible,or standing upright, or when partof a group.

. Due to poor visibility, includingnighttime conditions, fog, rain,or snow.

. If the FPB sensor is blocked bydirt, snow, or ice.

. If the headlamps or windshieldare not cleaned or in propercondition.

Be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving 0 217. Keepthe windshield, headlamps, and FPBsensor clean and in good repair.



FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert &Brake through vehicle personalization.See “Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.

Detecting the Pedestrian Ahead

FPB alerts and automatic braking willnot occur unless the FPB systemdetects a pedestrian. When a nearbypedestrian is detected in front of thevehicle, the pedestrian ahead indicatorwill display amber.

Front Pedestrian Alert

With Head-Up Display

Without Head-Up Display

When the vehicle approaches apedestrian ahead too rapidly, the redFPB alert display will flash on thewindshield. Eight rapid high-pitchedbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse five times. When thisPedestrian Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can causea brief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Front Pedestrian Alertoccurs.

Automatic Braking

If FPB detects it is about to crash intoa pedestrian directly ahead, and thebrakes have not been applied, FPBmay automatically brake moderatelyor brake hard. This can help to avoid

some very low speed pedestriancrashes or reduce pedestrian injury.FPB can automatically brake todetected pedestrians between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph).Automatic braking levels may bereduced under certain conditions,such as higher speeds. If alsoequipped with the Night Visionsystem, pedestrians detected by theNight Vision system will not causeautomatic braking to occur.

If this happens, Automatic Brakingmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB. A firm press of theaccelerator pedal will also releaseAutomatic Braking and the EPB.

{ WarningFPB may alert or automaticallybrake the vehicle suddenly insituations where it is unexpectedand undesired. It could falsely alertor brake for objects similar in shapeor size to pedestrians, includingshadows. This is normal operationand the vehicle does not need

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

service. To override AutomaticBraking, firmly press the acceleratorpedal, if it is safe to do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 126.

{ WarningUsing the Front Pedestrian Brakingsystem while towing a trailer couldcause you to lose control of thevehicle and crash. Turn the systemto Alert or Off when towing atrailer.

Cleaning the System

If FPB does not seem to operateproperly, cleaning the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror may correct the issue.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding crashes that occur withmoving vehicles in the side blindzone, or blind spot areas. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the left orright side mirror display will light upif a moving vehicle is detected in thatblind zone. If the turn signal isactivated and a vehicle is alsodetected on the same side, the displaywill flash as an extra warning not tochange lanes. Since this system is partof the Lane Change Alert (LCA)system, read the entire LCA sectionbefore using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warning

display will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the turn signal is on.

{ WarningLCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changing lanesunder all driving conditions. Failureto use proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Before making alane change, always check mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and usethe turn signals.

LCA Detection Zones



1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning areastarts at approximately the middle ofthe vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft).Drivers are also warned of vehiclesrapidly approaching from up to 70 m(230 ft) behind the vehicle.


The LCA symbol lights up in theoutside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blind zoneor rapidly approaching that zone frombehind. A lit LCA symbol indicates itmay be unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check the LCAdisplay, check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Outside MirrorDisplay

Right OutsideMirror Display

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate the systemis operating. When the vehicle is in aforward gear, the left or right outsidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in the next laneover in that blind zone or rapidlyapproaching that zone. If the turnsignal is activated in the samedirection as a detected vehicle, thisdisplay will flash as an extra warningnot to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled. When youdisable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert isalso disabled. See “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 126. If LCA is disabled by the driver,the LCA mirror displays will notlight up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires some drivingfor the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic and roadsideobjects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

LCA displays may not come on whenpassing a vehicle quickly, for astopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extending outto either side of the vehicle. Attachedobjects may also interfere with thedetection of vehicles. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not always alert the driver tovehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The system



does not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due to guardrails,signs, trees, shrubs, and othernon-moving objects. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 399.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in the sideblind zone or are rapidly approachingthis zone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information


Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. This system uses a camerato detect lane markings. LKA may beready to assist at speeds between80 km/h (50 mph) and 180 km/h(112 mph). LKA may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking. It may also provide a LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) alert if thevehicle unintentionally crosses adetected lane marking. This system isnot intended to keep the vehiclecentered in the lane. LKA will notassist or alert if the turn signal isactive in the direction of lanedeparture, or if it detects that you areaccelerating, braking, or activelysteering. LKA can be overridden byturning the steering wheel. If thesystem detects you are steeringintentionally across a lane marker, theLDW will not be given. Do not expectthe LDW to occur when you areintentionally crossing a lane marker.

{ WarningThe LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if a lanemarking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid a lanedeparture or crash.

. Detect lane markings under poorweather or visibility conditions.This can occur if the windshieldor headlamps are blocked by dirt,snow, or ice; if they are not inproper condition; or if the sunshines directly into the camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding or hillyroads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it will onlyassist or provide an LDW alert

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

when approaching the lane on theside where it has detected a lanemarking. Even with LKA and LDW,you must steer the vehicle. Alwayskeep your attention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicle damage,injury, or death could occur. Alwayskeep the windshield, headlamps,and camera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in badweather conditions or on roads withunclear lane markings, such asconstruction zones.

{ WarningUsing LKA on slippery roads couldcause loss of control of the vehicleand a crash. Turn the system off.

{ WarningLKA will not alert the driver if atowed trailer crosses into anadjacent lane of travel. Seriousinjury or property damage mayoccur if the trailer moves intoanother lane. Always monitor thetrailer position while towing tomake sure it is within the samelane as the tow vehicle.


LKA uses a camera sensor installed onthe windshield ahead of the rearviewmirror to detect lane markings. It mayprovide brief steering assist if itdetects an unintended lane departure.It may further provide an audible alertor the driver seat may pulse indicatingthat a lane marking has been crossed.The system does not provide a LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) whenintentionally steering across a lanemarker.

To turn LKA on and off, pressA onthe center stack. If equipped, theindicator light on the button comeson when LKA is on and turns offwhen LKA is disabled.

When on,A is white, if equipped,indicating that the system is not readyto assist.A is green if LKA is readyto assist. LKA may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking.A is amber whenassisting. It may also provide a LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) alert byflashingA amber if the vehiclecrosses a detected lane marking.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle. If LKAdoes not detect active driver steering,an alert and chime may be provided.



Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA maybecome temporarily unavailable afterrepeated take steering alerts.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:. Close vehicles ahead.. Sudden lighting changes, such aswhen driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning the windshieldmay help.

A camera blocked message maydisplay if the camera is blocked. Somedriver assistance systems may havereduced performance or not work atall. An LKA or LDW unavailablemessage may display if the systemsare temporarily unavailable. Thismessage could be due to a blocked

camera. The LKA system does notneed service. Clean the outside of thewindshield behind the rearview mirror.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

Surround Vision RecorderIf equipped, this system records the360° camera views to an SD card. Onlyimages are recorded, no sound. An SDcard will be needed for this system.The recommended SD card is a 32GBSDHC card with FAT32 file system,Class 10 and over.

Insert an SD card into the card readerin the trunk. Disable the system fromthe playback screen before removingthe SD card from the reader. Do notremove the card while recording isenabled. This could corrupt the videofile and/or the SD card.

Other files should not be stored onthe same SD card as the surroundvision recorder files. Storing other fileson the same card may increaserecording start up and playback timeor result in a loss of data.



To Activate : Touch Video Recorderon the Home Page. Touch the red dot.The red dot will illuminate when thevideo recorder is on. It will remain onuntil it has been turned off. Recordingwill start after exiting the playbackscreen. Advise other drivers andoccupants of the vehicle that videoimages are being recorded.

To Deactivate : Touch Video Recorderon the Home Page. Touch the red dot.

Select from the following when thevehicle is in P (Park).

Exit : Touch X to exit this applicationand return to the previous app.

Video List : Touch to display a list ofthe most recent and saved videos.Touch the delete button next to thename to delete a saved video.

Rewind : Touch to rewind the video.Touch again to increase speed.Continue touching to stop rewinding.

Play/Pause : Touch to play or pause arecorded video.

Fast Forward : Touch to fast forwardthe video. Touch again to increasespeed. Continue touching to stop fastforward.

Save : Touch to save a video. Thisprotects the video from being erased.Once the SD card is full, the oldestfiles will be overwritten unless theyhave been saved.

Camera Views : When opening theVideo Recorder, the previous file willshow all camera views and can beplayed. Icons in the upper right cornerof each view indicate which camera.Touch one of the views to zoom toonly that camera view. Touch again toreturn to all camera views. Press X atany time to exit the videorecorder app.

The latest recorded video file can beplayed. In addition:. The recorded video is stored infive-minute-long files.

. All files can be viewed on theplayback app or when the SD cardis read by a personal computer (PC).

. Once the SD card is full, the oldestfiles will be overwritten. Saved fileswill not be overwritten.

To Delete Data : Remove the SD cardfrom the vehicle and insert into a PCto manually delete the file.

Video player unavailable can occur if:. No SD card is present.. An empty SD card is present.. The video files are the wrongformat.

. The video files are corrupt.

. The SD card is full.

. There is a system error.

Other files should not be stored onthe same SD card as the surroundvision recorder files. Storing other fileson the same card may increaserecording start up and playback timeor result in a loss of data. An errormessage may be displayed if nosurround vision recorded video file isavailable for playback.



Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline to keep the engineclean, reduce engine deposits, andmaintain optimal vehicle performance.Look for the TOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended Fuel (LSY2.0L L4 Engine)

Premium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating (R+M)/2 of 91 orgreater is recommended.If unavailable, unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 may beused, but will result in reducedperformance and driveability. If heavyknocking is heard when using gasolinerated at 91 or greater, the engineneeds service.

Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Recommended Fuel (LGY3.0L V6 and LT4 6.2LV8 Engines)

Premium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating (R+M)/2 of 91 orgreater is required. The use of thecorrect fuel is an important part ofthe proper maintenance of the vehicleand a condition of the vehiclewarranty. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at 91 orgreater, the engine needs service.

Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.



Prohibited Fuels

CautionDo not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing so maydamage the vehicle and void itswarranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeled greaterthan 15% ethanol by volume,such as mid-level ethanol blends(16–50% ethanol), E85,or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, ferrocene,and aniline. These fuels cancorrode metal fuel system partsor damage plastic and rubberparts.

. Fuel containing metals such asmethylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT),which can damage the emissionscontrol system and spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octane ratingof less than the recommendedfuel. Using this fuel will lower

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)fuel economy and performance,and may decrease the life of theemissions catalyst.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knock index(AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreigncountry, see Prohibited Fuels 0 317.

Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highlyrecommended for use with yourvehicle. If your country does not haveTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, addACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline to the vehicle’s gasoline fueltank at every oil change or 15 000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelcoFuel System Treatment Plus−Gasolinewill help keep your vehicle’s enginefuel deposit free and performingoptimally.

Filling the TankAn arrow on the fuel gauge indicateswhich side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on. See Fuel Gauge 0 102.

{ WarningFuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

Follow these guidelines to helpavoid injuries to you and others:

. Read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronic deviceswhile refueling.

. Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued). Keep children away from the fuelpump and never let childrenpump fuel.

. Before touching the fill nozzle,touch a metallic object todischarge static electricity fromyour body.

. Fuel can spray out if the fillnozzle is inserted too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Insert thefill nozzle slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop beforebeginning to flow fuel.

If equipped, the fuel door unlockswhen the vehicle doors are unlocked.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 7.

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door.

The capless refueling system does nothave a fuel cap. Fully insert and latchthe fill nozzle, begin fueling.

{ WarningOverfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Under certain conditions, fuelfires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Waitfive seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the fillnozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 399. Push the fuel doorclosed until it latches.

{ WarningIf a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the fillnozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank with a Portable FuelContainer

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portable fuelcontainer:



1. Locate the capless funnel adapter.

2. Insert and latch the funnel into thecapless fuel system.

{ WarningAttempting to refuel from aportable fuel container withoutusing the funnel adapter may causefuel spillage and damage thecapless fuel system. This couldcause a fire. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehicle couldbe damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return it to the storagelocation.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WarningNever fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.You or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only into approvedcontainers.

. Do not fill a container while it isinside a vehicle, in a vehicle'strunk, in a pickup bed, or on anysurface other than the ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fill openingbefore operating the nozzle.Maintain contact until filling iscomplete.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Avoid using electronic deviceswhile pumping fuel.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle. Contactyour dealer or trailering dealer forassistance with preparing the vehicleto tow a trailer. Read the entiresection before towing a trailer. To towa disabled vehicle, see Towing theVehicle 0 396. To tow the vehiclebehind another vehicle such as amotor home, see Recreational VehicleTowing 0 399.

When towing with the 2.0L L4 engine,only use unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 89 or higher. Usinggasoline with a lower octane ratingwhile towing may damage the engineand may not be covered by the vehicle



warranty. See Recommended Fuel (LSY2.0L L4 Engine) 0 316 orRecommended Fuel (LGY 3.0L V6 andLT4 6.2L V8 Engines) 0 316.

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips

{ WarningYou can lose control when towing atrailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is not drivenproperly. For example, if the traileris too heavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load, the vehiclemay not stop as expected. You andothers could be seriously injured.The vehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed. Askyour dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be usedproperly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with and follow allstate and local laws that apply totrailer towing. These requirementsvary from state to state.

. State laws may require the use ofextended side view mirrors. Even ifnot required, you should installextended side view mirrors if yourvisibility is limited or restrictedwhile towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during the first800 km (500 mi) of vehicle use toprevent damage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. It is recommended to perform thefirst oil change before heavy towing.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi) oftrailer towing, do not drive over80 km/h (50 mph) and do not makestarts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). If thetransmission downshifts too often, alower gear may be selected usingManual Mode. See Manual Mode0 250.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should be turnedoff when towing a trailer:. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). Super Cruise Control. Lane Keep Assist (LKA). Park Assist. Automatic Parking Assist (APA). Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should be turnedto alert or off when towing a trailer:


DRIVING AND OPERATING 321. Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones that extendout from the back of the vehicle donot move further back when a traileris towed.

{ WarningTo prevent serious injury or deathfrom carbon monoxide (CO), whentowing a trailer:

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting that brings inonly outside air. See “ClimateControl Systems” in the Index.

For more information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 245.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not as responsiveas the vehicle itself. Get used to thehandling and braking of thecombination by driving on a level roadsurface before driving on public roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, and thebrakes must be all be rated to carrythe intended cargo. Inadequate trailerequipment can cause the combinationto operate in an unexpected or unsafemanner. Before driving, inspect alltrailer hitch parts and attachments,safety chains, electrical connectors,lamps, tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 325. If the trailer has

electric brakes, start the combinationmoving and then manually apply thetrailer brake controller to check thetrailer brakes work. During the trip,occasionally check that the cargo andtrailer are secure and that the lampsand any trailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement caused bythe trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This can helpto avoid heavy braking and suddenturns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed whentowing a trailer. The combination ofthe vehicle and trailer will notaccelerate as quickly and is muchlonger than the vehicle alone. It is



necessary to go much farther beyondthe passed vehicle before returning tothe lane. Pass on level roadways.Avoid passing on hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. To move the trailer tothe left, move that hand to the left. Tomove the trailer to the right, movethat hand to the right. Always back upslowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

CautionTurn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so trailer will not go over softshoulders, over curbs, or strike roadsigns, trees, or other objects. Alwayssignal turns well in advance. Do notsteer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore starting down a long or steepdownhill grade. If the transmission isnot shifted down, the brakes mayoverheat and result in reduced brakingefficiency.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engine off.If the overheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 347.

Parking on Hills

{ WarningTo prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle and traileron a level surface when possible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do notshift into P (Park) yet. Turn thewheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocks underthe trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, gradually release the brakepedal to allow the chocks to absorbthe load of the trailer.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

. Start the engine.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 323. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service more oftenwhen used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 411. It isespecially important to check theautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system before andduring each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts andbolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 347.

Trailer Towing (LSY 2.0LL4 and LGY 3.0LV6 Engines Only)

CautionTowing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

Never tow a trailer with a V-Series orV-Series Blackwing. These models arenot designed or intended to tow atrailer.

Trailer Weight

{ WarningNever exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoring theweight, speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, dimensions of

the front of the trailer, and howfrequently the vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

Before towing a trailer, alwaysseparately weigh:. the total weight on the vehicle'stires.

. the trailer.

. the trailer tongue.

{ WarningYou and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. The vehiclemay be damaged, and the repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed. Askyour dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.



Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 233. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached, thetrailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight

The trailer should never weigh morethan 454 kg (1,000 lb). The maximumallowable weight of the trailer may belower based on the weight of thepassengers and cargo in your trailer.

The maximum trailer weight rating iscalculated assuming only the driver isin the tow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balance mustbe maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% of the loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailer types,such as boat trailers, fall outside ofthis range. Always refer to the trailerowner’s manual for the recommendedtrailer tongue weight for each trailer.Never exceed the maximum loads foryour vehicle, hitch, and trailer.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue and calculate the trailer loadbalance percentage to see if theweights and distribution areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to transfer some of the cargointo your vehicle. If the trailer tongueweight is too high or too low, it maybe possible to rearrange some of thecargo inside of the trailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in the trailerhitch receiver, choose a carrier thatpositions the load as close to thevehicle as possible. Make sure thetotal weight, including the carrier, isno more than half of the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whicheveris less.



Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by, andrough roads can affect the trailer andthe hitch.

Never attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches. Only useframe-mounted hitches that do notattach to the bumper.

Always seal any holes in your vehicleif the trailer hitch removed. If notsealed, dirt, water, and carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaust mayenter your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust0 245.

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendations andinstructions.

Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using acompact spare tire on the vehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing a trailer.See Tires 0 367 for instructions onproper tire inflation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer, and attach thechains to the holes on the trailer hitchplatform. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the road ifit becomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Loaded trailers over 450 kg (1,000 lb)must be equipped with brake systemsand with brakes for each axle. Trailerbraking equipment conforming to

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)requirement CAN3-D313, or itsequivalent, is recommended.

State or local regulations may requiretrailers to have their own brakingsystem if the loaded weight of thetrailer exceeds certain minimums thatcan vary from state to state. Read andfollow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so they are installed, adjusted,and maintained properly. Neverattempt to tap into your vehicle'shydraulic brake system. If you do,both the vehicle anti-lock brakes andthe trailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals will illuminate to indicatethe vehicle is turning, changing lanes,or stopping. When towing a trailer,the arrows on the instrument clusterwill illuminate even if the trailer is notproperly connected or the bulbs areburned out.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ WarningThe Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 106.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehicle systems.This could affect vehicle operationand cause a crash. Such devicesmay also access information storedin the vehicle’s systems.

CautionSome electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work and would

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, see Servicingthe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 65 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 65.


VEHICLE CARE 327

Vehicle CareGeneral InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 338Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . 339Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Engine Air Filter Life System . . . . 340Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . 341Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Brake Pad Life System (IfEquipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . 353All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 355Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . 355Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Headlamp AimingFront Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . 357

Bulb ReplacementLED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . . . . 357Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 359Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 362Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . 376Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 384Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394


328 VEHICLE CARE

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 399

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visit yourdealer. You will receive genuine GMparts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbag initiators,seat belt pretensioners, and lithiumbatteries contained in electronic keys,may contain perchlorate materials.

Perchlorate Material – specialhandling may apply. Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GM certifiedparts, including control module orsoftware modifications, is not covered


VEHICLE CARE 329

under the terms of the vehiclewarranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories installed by adealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 65.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WarningIt can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not have theproper knowledge, service manual,tools, or parts. Always followowner’s manual procedures andconsult the service manual for yourvehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper servicemanual, see Publication OrderingInformation 0 439.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 65.

If equipped with remote vehicle start,open the hood before performing anyservice work to prevent remotestarting the vehicle accidentally. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 13.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 423.

CautionEven small amounts ofcontamination can cause damage tovehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

Hood

{ WarningFor vehicles with auto engine stop/start, turn the vehicle off beforeopening the hood. If the vehicle ison, the engine will start when thehood is opened. You or others couldbe injured.

{ WarningComponents under the hood canget hot from running the engine. Tohelp avoid the risk of burningunprotected skin, never touch thesecomponents until they have cooled,and always use a glove or towel toavoid direct skin contact.

Clear any snow from the hood beforeopening.


330 VEHICLE CARE

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever with thei symbol. It is on the lower leftside of the instrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andlocate the secondary release leverunder the front center of the hood.Push the secondary hood releaselever to the right to release.

3. After you have partially lifted thehood, the gas strut system willautomatically lift the hood andhold it in the fully open position.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly, and alltools are removed.

2. Pull the hood down until the strutsystem is no longer holding upthe hood.

3. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in) abovethe vehicle. Allow the hood to fall.Check to make sure the hood islatched completely. Repeat thisprocess with additional force ifnecessary.

{ WarningDo not drive the vehicle if the hoodis not latched completely. The hoodcould open fully, block your vision,and cause a crash. You or otherscould be injured. Always close thehood completely before driving.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)will display a message if the hood isnot fully closed.

Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe hood for obstructions, and closethe hood again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.


VEHICLE CARE 331

Engine Compartment Overview

2.0L L4 Engine


332 VEHICLE CARE

1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir.See Washer Fluid 0 348.

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See Cooling System0 343.

3. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 341.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View).See Cooling System 0 343.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil0 336.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil0 336.

7. Remote Positive (+) BatteryTerminal. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 394.

8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See BrakeFluid 0 352.

9. Remote Negative (-) BatteryTerminal. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 394.

10. Engine Compartment Fuse Block0 359.


VEHICLE CARE 333

3.0L V6 Engine


334 VEHICLE CARE








8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See BrakeFluid 0 352.




VEHICLE CARE 335

6.2L V8 Engine








8. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 352.


336 VEHICLE CARE



Engine OilTo ensure proper engine performanceand long life, careful attention mustbe paid to engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps will helpprotect your investment:. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section.

. Check the engine oil level regularlyand maintain the proper oil level.See “Checking Engine Oil” and“When to Add Engine Oil” in thissection.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 338.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do with UsedOil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especially priorto a long trip. The engine oil dipstickhandle is a loop. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 331 for thelocation.

{ WarningThe engine oil dipstick handle maybe hot; it could burn you. Use atowel or glove to touch the dipstickhandle.

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check the oillevel.

Follow these guidelines:. To get an accurate reading, park thevehicle on level ground. Check theengine oil level after the engine hasbeen off for at least two hours.Checking the engine oil level onsteep grades or too soon afterengine shutoff can result inincorrect readings. Accuracy

improves when checking a coldengine prior to starting. Remove thedipstick and check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine is warm,or at least 30 minutes if the engineis not warm. Pull out the dipstick,wipe it with a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping thetip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

2.0L L4 Turbo (LSY) Engine

3.0L V6 Twin Turbo (LGY) and 6.2L V8(LT4) Engines


VEHICLE CARE 337

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick and theengine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 426.

CautionDo not add too much oil. Oil levelsabove or below the acceptableoperating range shown on thedipstick are harmful to the engine.If the oil level is above theoperating range (i.e., the engine hasso much oil that the oil level getsabove the cross-hatched area thatshows the proper operating range),the engine could be damaged. Drainthe excess oil or limit driving of thevehicle, and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 331 for the location of the engine oilfill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 420.

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification. Engineoils that have been approved by GMas meeting the dexos1 specificationare marked with the dexos1approved logo.

CautionFailure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

For the 2.0L L4 Turbo (LSY) engine,use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

For the 3.0L V6 Twin Turbo (LGY)engine, use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil. Cold TemperatureOperation: In an area of extreme cold,where the temperature falls below−29 °C (−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil maybe used. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting for theengine at extremely low temperatures.

For the 6.2L V8 (LT4) engine, useSAE 0W-40 viscosity grade engine oil.GM recommends Mobil 1 engine oilthat shows the dexos2 approved logo.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.


338 VEHICLE CARE

Engine Oil Additives/Engine OilFlushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting the dexos1specification are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could cause enginedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trash

or pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based on acombination of factors which includeengine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven. Basedon driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes on. Change theoil as soon as possible within the next1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary for up

to a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work andreset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly over thecourse of an oil drain interval andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally,the oil must be changed at 5 000 km(3,000 mi) since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem

Reset the system whenever the engineoil is changed so that the system cancalculate the next engine oil change.To reset the system:

1. Using the DIC buttons, displayREMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.


VEHICLE CARE 339

2. Press and hold the thumbwheel onthe steering wheel. When theconfirmation message displays,select YES. The oil life will changeto 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change.

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:

1. Using the DIC buttons, displayREMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is not on, the system isreset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageis off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to your dealer andhave it repaired as soon as possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact your dealerfor additional information.

CautionUse of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage thevehicle, and the damage may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use the correct automatictransmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 420.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule 0 411, and be sure to use thefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 420.

Manual Transmission FluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to your dealer andhave it repaired as soon as possible.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 420 for the proper fluidto use.


340 VEHICLE CARE

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have the systeminspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has this symbol on it.See Engine Compartment Overview0 331 for reservoir location. Thecommon hydraulic clutch and brakemaster cylinder fluid reservoir is filledwith brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See Brake Fluid 0 352 forbrake fluid to use.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top-off the fluid level.Remove the cap only when necessaryto add the proper fluid until the levelreaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Filter LifeSystemIf equipped, this feature provides theengine air filter’s remaining life andbest timing for a change. The timingto change an engine air filter dependson driving and environmentalconditions.

When to Change the Engine AirFilter

When the Driver Information Center(DIC) displays a message to replacethe engine air filter at the next oilchange, follow this timing.

When the DIC displays a message toreplace the engine air filter soon,replace the engine air filter at theearliest convenience.

The system must be reset after theengine air filter is changed.

If the DIC displays a message to checkthe engine air filter system, see yourdealer.

How to Reset the Engine AirFilter Life System

To reset:

1. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

2. Display the Air Filter Life on theDIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

3. Press T on the steering wheel,or press the trip odometer resetstem if the vehicle does not haveDIC controls, to move to the Reset/Disable display area. Select Reset,then press the thumbwheel orpress the reset stem for severalseconds.


VEHICLE CARE 341

4. Press the thumbwheel or the resetstem to confirm the reset.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment on the passengerside of the vehicle for the 2.0L L4 and6.2L V8 engines, and in the center ofthe engine compartment for the 3.0LV6 engine. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 331.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter. For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule 0 411.

. If equipped with Engine Air FilterLife System, see Engine Air Filter LifeSystem 0 340.

. If driving in very dusty areas, followthe engine air filter inspecting andchanging intervals, see MaintenanceSchedule 0 411.

How to Inspect/Replace theEngine Air Cleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter,make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby componentsare free of dirt and debris. Do notclean the engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Remove the five screws on top ofthe air cleaner/filter cover.

2. Lift the air/cleaner/filter cover awayfrom the air cleaner/filter housing.

3. Pull out the air cleaner/filter.

{ WarningIf part replacement is necessary,the part must be replaced with oneof the same part number or with anequivalent part. Use of areplacement part without the samefit, form, and function may result inpersonal injury or damage to thevehicle.

4. Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall theair cleaner/filter cover.

6. If equipped, reset the engine airfilter life system after replacing theengine air filter. See Engine AirFilter Life System 0 340.


342 VEHICLE CARE

3.0L V6 Engine

1. Air Duct Clamps2. Electrical Connectors3. Screws

1. Disconnect the harness connectorsfrom the air cleaner/filter coverelectrical connectors (2).

2. Loosen the screws on the air ductclamps (1) holding the air outletducts in place. Do not removeclamps. Move the ducts aside.

3. Remove the 13 screws (3) on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filter coverto gain access to both air cleaner/filters.

4. Lift the engine air cleaner/filtercover.

5. Lift and remove one or both engineair cleaner/filters.

6. Inspect or replace one or bothengine air cleaner/filters.

7. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall theengine air cleaner/filter cover.


6.2L V8 Engine

1. Remove the six screws on top ofthe air cleaner/filter cover.

2. Lift the air/cleaner/filter cover awayfrom the air cleaner/filter housing.

3. Pull out the air cleaner/filter.

4. Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall theair cleaner/filter cover.


{ WarningOperating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use cautionwhen working on the engine. Donot start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present if theengine backfires.


VEHICLE CARE 343

CautionIf the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whendriving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engineto maintain the correct workingtemperature.

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)

3.0L V6 Engine



6.2L V8 Engine



{ WarningAn underhood electric fan can startup even when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


344 VEHICLE CARE

{ WarningDo not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts. Theycan be very hot and can burn you.Do not run the engine if there is aleak; all coolant could leak out.That could cause an engine fire andcan burn you. Fix any leak beforedriving the vehicle.

CautionDo not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM Standard GMW3420 andclean, drinkable water. Anythingelse can cause damage to theengine cooling system and thevehicle, which would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL engine coolant.See Maintenance Schedule 0 411 andRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 420.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating 0 347.

What to Use

{ WarningDo not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts. Theycan be very hot and can burn you.Do not run the engine if there is aleak; all coolant could leak out.That could cause an engine fire andcan burn you. Fix any leak beforedriving the vehicle.

Use a 50/50 mixture of cleandrinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down to

−37 °C (−34 °F), outside temperature.. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), engine temperature.

. Protects against rust and corrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

CautionDo not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM Standard GMW3420 andclean, drinkable water. Anythingelse can cause damage to theengine cooling system and thevehicle, which would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding used coolantdisposal. This will help protect theenvironment and your health.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a level surfacewhen checking the coolant level.

It is normal to see coolant moving inthe upper coolant hose return linewhen the engine is running. It is alsonormal to see bubbles entering thesurge tank through the small hose.


VEHICLE CARE 345

Check to see if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the indicatedmark, add a 50/50 mixture of cleandrinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WarningSpilling coolant on hot engine partscan burn you. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn ifthe engine parts are hot enough.

{ WarningPlain water, or other liquids such asalcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but therewould not be an overheat warning.The engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned.

{ WarningSteam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and you

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

could be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

CautionFailure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolant isnot visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If no problem is found, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the coolant surgetank. If coolant is visible but thecoolant level is not at or above theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem, including the coolant surgetank pressure cap, is cool before youdo it.


346 VEHICLE CARE

2.0L L4 Engine

Automatic Coolant Service FillInstructions

The vehicle is equipped with a servicefeature that assists with filling andremoving air from the cooling systemafter service of components or whencoolant is added after being too low.

To use the service feature:

1. With a cold system, add coolant tothe indicated line on thesurge tank.

2. Replace the pressure cap on thesurge tank.

To activate the service feature:

1. Connect the vehicle to a batterycharger.

2. Turn the ignition on. See IgnitionPositions 0 238.

3. Turn off the air conditioning.

4. Set the parking brake.

5. At the same time, press theaccelerator and the brake pedal fortwo seconds, then release.

6. At the end of the cycle, check thecoolant level in the surge tank andadd coolant if it is below theindicated line. Turn the ignitionoff, allow the Electronic ControlModule (ECM) to go to sleep, abouttwo minutes, and repeat Steps 2–6.

Listen for pump activation andmovement of the control valves whilewatching the level of the coolant inthe surge tank. If the tank empties,turn the ignition off, carefully removethe pressure cap, refill to the indicatedline, replace the pressure cap, andrepeat Steps 2–6.

The fill and air removal process willrun for approximately 15 minutes.

CautionIf the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure the capis properly and tightly secured.

3.0L V6 Engine and 6.2LV8 Engine

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolant surgetank pressure cap and upperradiator hose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise. If you hear ahiss, wait for that to stop. This willallow any pressure still left to bevented out the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.


VEHICLE CARE 347

2.0L L4 Engine and 3.0L V6 EngineCoolant Surge Tank

6.2L V8 Engine Coolant Surge Tank

3. Fill the surge tank with the propermixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the enginecooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tank maybe lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to thesurge tank until the level reachesthe indicated level mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Check the level in the surge tankafter the engine is shut off and thecooling system has cooled down.If the coolant is not at the properlevel, repeat Steps 1–6. If thecoolant still is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

CautionIf the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure the capis properly and tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof the engine overheating.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears, getservice help right away. See RoadsideService 0 434.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.


348 VEHICLE CARE

CautionDo not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of all coolantand can damage the system andvehicle. Have any leaks fixedright away.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WarningSteam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

If No Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can geta little too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highest fanspeed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let the engine idle.

If the overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not come

back on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling system checkedfor proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes while parked.If the warning is still displayed, turnoff the engine until it cools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid


VEHICLE CARE 349

Open the cap with the washer symbolon it. Add washer fluid until the tankis full. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 331 for reservoir location.

Caution. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This can causethe wiper blades to chatteror skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer system andpaint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid. Watercan cause the solution to freezeand damage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentrated washerfluid, follow the manufacturerinstructions for adding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is verycold. This allows for fluid

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)expansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

BrakesDisc brake linings, except J57 V-SeriesBlackwing with carbon ceramic brakes,have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning soundwhen the brake linings are worn andnew linings are needed. The soundcan come and go or can be heard allthe time when the vehicle is moving,except when applying the brake pedalfirmly. The V-Series Blackwing haselectronic pad wear sensors. See BrakePad Life System (If Equipped) 0 351

{ WarningThe brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes will notwork well. That could lead to acrash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

CautionContinuing to drive with worn-outbrake linings could result in costlybrake repairs.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake linings for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 426.

Brake linings should be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Squeal and Brake Dust

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied, clearing upfollowing several applies. This doesnot mean something is wrong withthe brakes.

Vehicles equipped with highperformance brake systems providesuperior fade resistance, but willproduce increased brake squeal and


350 VEHICLE CARE

brake dust on the wheels and calipersas compared to standard brake linings.This is normal.

To help reduce squeal, highperformance brake pads are treatedwith an anti-squeal paste that mayneed to be reapplied periodically aspart of normal vehicle maintenance.The anti-squeal paste will dissipateover time. Also, the use of wheelcleaners or power washers directly onthe brake calipers may remove theanti-squeal paste from the brake pads.It may be necessary to reapply theanti-squeal paste if it is removedduring cleaning.

If brake squeal is excessive, theanti-squeal paste should be reapplied.The anti-squeal paste should alwaysbe reapplied whenever the brake padsare removed or replaced. See yourdealer for service.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or ifthere is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign that brakeservice may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes may notwork properly. The brakingperformance can change in manyways if the wrong brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.

The Brake Fade Warning Assistsystem is designed for use with thefactory-installed brake pads or GMapproved replacement pads. If thebrake pads on the vehicle need to bereplaced, use GM-approved brakepads. If this is not done, the brakefade warning system may not functionproperly.

High Performance Brake LiningCar Wash and ExtendedParking Care

If equipped with high performancebrake components, binding orclunking may be noticeable afterextended parking or in cold weatherwhen the brakes have been wet, suchas when driving in the rain or after acar wash. The clunking is normal for

brakes with high performance brakelinings and does not affect theoperation of the brakes. When driving,normal braking will allow for thebrakes to feel smooth and theclunking to go away. If the vehicle iswashed before overnight parking orlong term storage, drive it and applythe brakes several times to thoroughlydry the brakes.

Brake Rotor Wear (V-SeriesBlackwing With J57 CarbonCeramic Rotors)

The V-Series Blackwing with J57 hascarbon ceramic brake rotors. Therotors should be visually inspectedwhenever the brake pads are replaced.Carbon ceramic brake rotors also needto be weighed before brake pads arereplaced to confirm that the rotormass is greater than the wear-outmass printed on the rotor. The rotorcan be reused if the weight of therotor is above the mass limit. Carbonceramic brake rotors inspection andweighing methods can be found in theservice manual.


VEHICLE CARE 351

V-Series Blackwing BrakeBurnish Procedure for CorrosionCleanup

Corrosion spotting and grooving onthe brake rotor surface may appearafter the vehicle sits for an extendedperiod of time, especially in highhumidity. This corrosion may result inbrake pulsation and noise. To helprestore optimal braking performanceand reduce noise, complete thefollowing procedure:

CautionPerforming the brake burnishprocedure on a base brake systemcan result in brake damage.

Perform this procedure only on drypavement, in a safe manner, and incompliance with all local and stateordinances/laws regarding motorvehicle operation.

CautionThe new vehicle break-in periodshould be completed beforeperforming the brake burnishing

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)procedure or damage may occur tothe powertrain/engine. See NewVehicle Break-In 0 236.

CautionBrake fade can occur during thisburnish procedure and can causebrake pedal travel and force toincrease. This could extendstopping distance until the brakesare fully burnished.

Completing the following procedure asinstructed will not damage the brakes.The brake pads may smoke andproduce an odor. The braking forceand pedal travel may increase. Afterthe procedure, the brake pads mayappear white at the rotor contact.

1. Using the G-Force Gauge in theHUD display, apply the brakes 10times starting at 100 km/h(60 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph)while decelerating at 0.4g.SeeHead-Up Display (HUD) 0 122.

This is a medium brake application.Drive for at least 0.5 km (0.3 mi)between applying the brakes.

2. If further cleanup of the brakediscs is needed, repeat thisprocedure with 0.7g applications.

As with all high performance brakesystems, some amount of brake squealis normal.

Brake Pad Life System (IfEquipped)

When to Change Brake Pads

If equipped, this system estimates theremaining life of the front and rearbrake pads. Brake Pad Life is displayedin the Driver Information Center(DIC), along with a percentage foreach axle. The system must be resetevery time the brake pads arechanged.

When the system has determined thatthe brake pads need to be replaced, amessage displays, which may includemileage remaining.

Brake pads should always be replacedas complete axle sets.


352 VEHICLE CARE

How to Reset the Brake Pad LifeSystem

The system will automatically detectwhen significantly worn brake padsare replaced. When the ignition isturned on after new pads and wearsensors are installed, a message willdisplay. Follow the prompts to resetthe system.

The brake pad life system can also bemanually reset:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

2. Select the Brake Pad Life menu.

3. Select front or rear pads asappropriate.

4. Select YES on the confirmationmessage. Repeat for the pads onthe other axle if they were alsoreplaced.

How to Disable the Brake PadLife System

The brake pad life system can beturned off. This may be necessary ifaftermarket brake pads without wearsensors are installed. When thesystem is turned off, the front andrear brake pad life percentages willnot display. However, the built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn can still determine when thepads should be replaced. See Brakes0 349.

To turn off the brake pad life system:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

2. Select the Brake Pad Life menu.

3. Select DISABLE.

To turn the brake pad life system backon, follow the above steps but selectENABLE in Step 2.

Brake Pad Sensor System(V-Series Blackwing)

The V-Series Blackwing has electronicbrake pad wear sensors, when thebrake pads need to be replaced, amessage displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

When the message displays, installnew brake pads and brake pad wearsensors on the vehicle.

When the ignition is turned on afternew brake pads and brake pad wearsensors are installed, the messageshould no longer display.

The brake pad sensor system can onlybe reset by replacing the brake padsand brake pad wear sensors.

Brake Fluid


VEHICLE CARE 353

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with GM approvedDOT 4 brake fluid as indicated on thereservoir cap. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 331 for the location of thereservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

Place the vehicle in P (Park) orNeutral with the parking brake appliedif equipped with a manualtransmission. On a level surface, thebrake fluid level should be betweenthe minimum and maximum markson the brake fluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, the fluidlevel goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed. Witha leak, the brakes will not work well.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area around the capbefore removing it.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings are installed.Add or remove fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system.

{ WarningIf too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake System WarningLight 0 108.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluid atthe specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 411.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 4 brakefluid from a clean, sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 420.

{ WarningThe wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

CautionIf brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be damaged. Immediatelywash off any painted surface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not remove thecap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed.


354 VEHICLE CARE

The vehicle has an Absorbed GlassMat (AGM) 12-volt battery.Installation of a standard 12-voltbattery will result in reduced 12-voltbattery life.

When using a 12-volt battery chargeron the 12-volt AGM battery, somechargers have an AGM battery settingon the charger. If available, use theAGM setting on the charger, to limitcharge voltage to 14.8 volts. Followthe charger manufacturer'sinstructions.

For replacement of the battery, seeyour dealer.

Stop/Start System

This vehicle has a Stop/Start systemto shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. See Stop/Start System0 241.

{ WarningWARNING: Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescan expose you to chemicalsincluding lead and lead compounds,which are known to the State of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling. Formore information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

See the warning on the back cover.

Vehicle Storage

{ WarningBatteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. Youcan be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 394 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery tokeep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: Remove the black,negative (−) cable from the battery oruse a battery trickle charger.

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle is equipped withAll-Wheel-Drive (AWD), this is anadditional system that needslubrication.

Transfer Case

Under normal driving conditions,transfer case fluid does not requiremaintenance unless there is a fluidleak or unusual noise. If required,have the transfer case serviced byyour dealer.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WarningWhen you are doing this check, thevehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of thevehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle beginto move.


VEHICLE CARE 355

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. Automatic transmission vehiclesonly: To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability: Withthe engine running, shift to P (Park).Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on a regularbasis or when worn. For properwindshield wiper blade length andtype, see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 421.

CautionAllowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiper bladeis installed could damage thewindshield. Any damage that occurswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperarm to touch the windshield.

To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper assemblyaway from the windshield. Thepassenger side wiper arm haslimited travel.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where the wiperarm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull the wiperblade down toward the windshieldfar enough to release it from theJ-hooked end of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper bladereplacement.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield needs to bereplaced, a GM replacementwindshield is recommended. Thereplacement windshield must beinstalled according to GMspecifications for proper alignment.If it is not, the HUD image may lookout of focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to be replacedand the vehicle is equipped with afront camera sensor for the DriverAssistance Systems, a GM


356 VEHICLE CARE

replacement windshield isrecommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Acoustic Windshield

The vehicle is equipped with anacoustic windshield. If the windshieldneeds to be replaced be sure to get anacoustic windshield so you willcontinue to have the benefits anacoustic windshield can provide.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance in liftingand holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.

{ WarningIf the gas struts that hold open thehood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, youor others could be seriously injured.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice immediately. Visuallyinspect the gas struts for signs ofwear, cracks, or other damageperiodically. Check to make sure thehood/trunk/liftgate is held openwith enough force. If struts arefailing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have thevehicle serviced.

CautionDo not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also do notpush down or pull on gas struts.This may cause damage to thevehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 411.

Hood

Trunk


VEHICLE CARE 357

Liftgate

Headlamp Aiming

Front Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb Replacement

LED LightingThis vehicle has LED lamps. Forreplacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical System OverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until thecurrent load returns to normal or theproblem is fixed. This greatly reducesthe chance of circuit overload and firecaused by electrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can be borrowed.

Choose some feature of the vehiclethat is not needed to use and replaceit as soon as possible.

To check a fuse, look at the bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sure toreplace a bad fuse with a fuse of theidentical size and rating.


358 VEHICLE CARE

Replacing a Blown Fuse1. Turn off the ignition.

2. Locate the fuse puller in the enginecompartment fuse block.

3. Use the fuse puller to remove thefuse from the top or side, as shownabove.

4. If the fuse must be replacedimmediately, borrow a replacementfuse with the same amperage fromthe fuse block. Choose a vehiclefeature that is not needed to safelyoperate the vehicle. RepeatSteps 2-3.

5. Insert the replacement fuse intothe empty slot of the blown fuse.

At the next opportunity, see yourdealer to replace the blown fuse.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause thelamps to go on and off, or in somecases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right away ifthe lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop. Wiper function isavailable immediately after the wiperswitch is set to off, and back to on.

To protect the wiper motor fromoverheating, the wipers may slowdown when the windshield is dry for along period of time. If a period of dry


VEHICLE CARE 359

operation, or little moisture, exceeds10 minutes, the wipers may switch tointermittent operation, and remainthere. When moisture is againdetected on the windshield, wiperoperation will return to the operatorselected speed.

Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear ice andheavy snow from the windshieldbefore using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused by electricalproblems.

{ DangerFuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuit breakers.Use of an oversized fuse or circuitbreaker can result in a vehicle fire.You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed.

{ WarningInstallation or use of fuses that donot meet GM’s original fusespecifications is dangerous. Thefuses could fail, and result in a fire.You or others could be injured orkilled, and the vehicle could bedamaged.

See Accessories and Modifications0 328 andGeneral Information 0 328.

To check or replace a blown fuse, seeElectrical System Overload 0 357.

Engine Compartment FuseBlockThe engine compartment fuse block ison the driver side of the enginecompartment.


360 VEHICLE CARE

Lift the fuse block cover to access thefuses.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses and relays shown.

CautionSpilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep the coverson any electrical component.

Fuses Usage

1 Long Range RadarFront Sensor

2 Park/DaytimeRunning Lamps

3 Exterior LightingModule 4


5 Headlamp Level

Fuses Usage

6 –

7 Electronic BrakeControl Module

8 Washer Pump

9 –

10 –

11 –

12 Horn


VEHICLE CARE 361

Fuses Usage

13 Front Wiper





18 Aero Shutter

19 –

20 –

21 Virtual Key System/Power SounderModule

22 Engine ControlModule Battery

23 Transmission ControlModule

24 Active Engine Mount

25 –

26 Engine ControlModule

Fuses Usage

27 Injectors/Ignition 2

28 Charged Air Cooler

29 Transmission Aux OilPump/TransmissionReverse Lock Out

30 Injectors/Ignition 1

31 Emissions 1

32 Emissions 2

33 Starter Solenoid

34 –

35 –

36 Starter Pinion

37 AC Clutch

38 –

39 –

40 –

41 –

42 Water Pump

43 –

44 –

Relays Usage

47 –

48 Front Wiper Speed

49 Front Wiper Control

51 –

52 Engine ControlModule

53 Starter Solenoid

54 Starter Pinion

55 –

57 AC Clutch

58 –


362 VEHICLE CARE

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block is inthe end of the driver side of theinstrument panel.

To access the fuses, remove the endpanel by gently prying with a plastictool near each clip, beginning at thepoint shown.

To install the end cover, insert thetabs on the back of the cover into theslots in the instrument panel at thepoints shown. Align the clips with theslots in the instrument panel, andpress the cover into place.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses and relays shown.


VEHICLE CARE 363

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 Heating, Ventilation,and Air ConditioningBlower

3 –

4 –

Fuses Usage

5 Theft Deterrent/Universal GarageDoor Opener/Overhead Console/Rain Sensor

6 –

7 Air Quality Ionizer

8 Heated SteeringWheel

Fuses Usage

9 –

10 Electronic SteeringColumn Lock 1

11 –

12 –

13 –

14 –

15 –

16 –

17 –

18 Display/Infotainment/USB/Multi-functionControl Module

19 Sensing andDiagnostic Module/Automatic OccupantSensing/Data LinkConnection/WirelessCharging Module/Virtual Key Module

20 Power SteeringColumn Module/Electronic SteeringColumn Lock 2


364 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

21 Driver MonitorSystem/PerformanceData Recorder

22 –

23 –

24 –

25 USB

26 –

27 –

28 –

29 –

30 –

31 Headlamp Level

32 –

33 Body Ignition/IPIgnition

34 Exhaust Valve

Fuses Usage

35 Transmission ControlModule Ignition/Engine ControlModule Ignition/ShiftIgnition/BrakeIgnition

36 Shift Module

37 Body ControlModule 1/ElectronicPark Brake Switch

38 Center Stack Module

39 Steering WheelControls

40 Body ControlModule 2



CircuitBreakers

Usage

CB1 Auxiliary PowerOutlet 1

CB2 Auxiliary PowerOutlet 2

Relays Usage

1 Run After Park/Accessory

2 Run Crank

3 –

4 –

5 –


VEHICLE CARE 365

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind a cover on the driver side ofthe rear compartment.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Fuses Usage

1 Remote FunctionActuator

Fuses Usage

2 –

3 Driver Heated Seat

4 Fuel Tank ZoneModule

5 –

6 –

7 –

8 –

9 –

10 Motor Seat BeltPassenger

11 Canister VentSolenoid

12 Sunroof

13 –

14 –

15 PassengerHeated Seat

16 –

17 ElectronicSuspension Control


366 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

18 –

19 Motor Seat BeltDriver

20 Rear Defog

21 DC to DCTransformer 2

22 Driver PowerWindow/Door HandleSwitch

23 External ObjectCalculating Module/Front CameraModule/HighDefinitionLocalization Module/Short Range Radar

24 Passenger PowerWindow/Door HandleSwitch

25 –

26 Amplifier (V-SeriesBlackwing)

27 Rear Drive ControlModule

Fuses Usage

28 –

29 –

30 –

31 DC to DCTransformer 1

32 Transfer CaseElectronic Control

33 Central GatewayModule/Side BlindZone Alert

34 Video ProcessingModule

35 Hands Free ClosureRelease


37 Passenger MemorySeat Module

38 –

39 Right Front/RightRear Window

40 –

41 –

Fuses Usage

42 Amplifier

43 Park Assist Module

44 Driver Memory SeatModule

45 OnStar

46 –

47 –

48 –

49 –

50 Driver Seat

51 Left Front/Left RearWindow

52 Passenger Seat

Relays Usage

53 –

54 –

55 Run


VEHICLE CARE 367

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. See thewarranty manual for informationregarding the tire warranty andwhere to get service. Foradditional information refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ Warning. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits 0 233.

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crash

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

could cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure shouldbe checked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a sudden impact— such as when hitting apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only yourdealer or an authorized tire

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

service center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause the tiresto explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation 0 375 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come with all-seasontires. These tires are designed toprovide good overall performance onmost road surfaces and weatherconditions. Original equipment tiresdesigned to GM's specific tireperformance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto thesidewall. Original equipment


368 VEHICLE CARE

all-season tires can be identified bythe last two characters of this TPCcode, which will be “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires on thevehicle if frequent driving on snow orice-covered roads is expected.All-season tires provide adequateperformance for most winter drivingconditions, but they may not offer thesame level of traction or performanceas winter tires on snow or ice-coveredroads. See Winter Tires 0 368.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing winter tireson the vehicle if frequent driving onice or snow covered roads is expected.See your dealer for details regardingwinter tire availability and proper tireselection. Also, see Buying New Tires0 382.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction, increasedroad noise, and shorter tread life.

After changing to winter tires, be alertfor changes in vehicle handling andbraking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of the samesize, load range, and speed rating asthe original equipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Run-Flat TiresThis vehicle, when new, may have hadrun-flat tires. There is no spare tire,no tire changing equipment, and noplace to store a tire in the vehicle.

{ WarningWhile driving with run-flat tires ata reduced inflation pressure, avoidmaking sudden stops or severemaneuvers as the handlingcapabilities of the tires will bereduced. Driving too fast couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured. Do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) withthe tire operating at low pressure.Drive cautiously and check the tirepressure as soon as possible.

Run-flat tires can be driven up to80 km (50 mi) at speeds less than80 km/h (50 mph) after a loss ofinflation pressure has occurred. Thereis no need to stop on the side of theroad to change the tire. The possibledriving range after a pressure loss willvary based on the vehicle load anddriving conditions. As soon aspossible, contact the nearestauthorized GM or run-flat servicingfacility for inspection and repair orreplacement.


VEHICLE CARE 369

When driving on a deflated run-flattire, avoid potholes and other roadhazards that could damage the tireand/or wheel beyond repair. When atire has been damaged, or if drivenany distance while deflated, checkwith an authorized run-flat tireservice center to determine whetherthe tire can be repaired or should bereplaced. To maintain the run-flatfeature, all replacement tires must berun-flat tires.

To locate the nearest GM or run-flatservicing facility, call CustomerAssistance.

Self-Sealing TiresThis vehicle may have self-sealingtires. These tires have a materialinside that can seal punctures fromcommon road hazards, such as nailsand screws, in the tread area. The tiremay lose air pressure if the sidewall isdamaged or the tread puncture is toolarge. If the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem indicates the tire pressure islow, inspect the tire for damage andinflate it to the recommendedpressure. If the tire is unable tomaintain the recommended pressure,

contact the nearest authorized GMservicing facility immediately forinspection and repair or replacement.To locate the nearest GM servicingfacility, call GM Customer Assistance.

CautionDo not drive on a deflatedself-sealing tire as this coulddamage the tire. Make sure the tireis inflated to the recommendedpressure or have it immediatelyrepaired or replaced.

When tire replacement is neededreplace with a self-sealing tire,because the vehicle does not comewith a spare tire or tire changingequipment.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has 245/45R18 96V,245/40R19 94V, 245/40ZR19 94Y,255/35ZR20 97W, 275/35ZR19(100Y), or 305/30ZR19 (102Y) sizetires, they are classified aslow-profile tires.

CautionLow-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact withroad hazards like potholes, or sharpedged objects, or when sliding intoa curb. The warranty does not coverthis type of damage. Keep tires setto the correct inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Summer TiresHigh Performance Summer Tires

This vehicle may come with maycome with 245/40ZR19 94Y,275/35ZR19 (100Y), or 305/30ZR19(102Y) high performance summertires. These tires have a special treadand compound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, and on


370 VEHICLE CARE

ice and snow. It is recommended thatwinter tires be installed on the vehicleif frequent driving at temperaturesbelow approximately 5 °C (40 °F) or onice or snow covered roads is expected.See Winter Tires 0 368.

CautionHigh performance summer tireshave rubber compounds that loseflexibility and may develop surfacecracks in the tread area attemperatures below −7 °C (20 °F).Always store high performancesummer tires indoors and attemperatures above −7 °C (20 °F)when not in use. If the tires havebeen subjected to −7 °C (20 °F) orless, let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5 °C (40 °F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated airdirectly on the tires. Always inspecttires before use. See Tire Inspection0 380.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexample shows a typical passengertire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size : The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification) : Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. GM'sTPC specifications meet or exceedall federal safety guidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

DOT Tire Date of Manufacture :The last four digits of the TINindicate the tire manufactureddate. The first two digits representthe week and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2020 would havea 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week01 is the first full week (Sundaythrough Saturday) of each year.


VEHICLE CARE 371

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured. TheTIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one sidemay have the date ofmanufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire Quality Grading0 384.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter "P" as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire andRim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The 3-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A 2-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspectratio is 75, as shown in item (3) ofthe illustration, it would meanthat the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire. Theletter "R" means radial plyconstruction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents the loadcarrying capacity a tire is certified


372 VEHICLE CARE

to carry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed in kPa(kilopascal) or psi (pounds persquare inch).

Accessory Weight : The combinedweight of optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are automatictransmission, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationship ofa tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of thetread.

Cold Tire Pressure : The amountof air pressure in a tire, measuredin kPa (kilopascal) or psi (poundsper square inch) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving. SeeTire Pressure 0 374.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengersand cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. The DOT code includesthe Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tiremanufacturer, production plant,brand, and date of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 233.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unitfor air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.


VEHICLE CARE 373

Load Index : An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 thatcorresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : The loadrating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curb weight,accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production optionsweight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 233.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehicle manufacturer'srecommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tireplacard. See Tire Pressure 0 374andVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the ply cords that extendto the beads are laid at 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beads areseated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)of tread remains. See When It IsTime for New Tires 0 382.


374 VEHICLE CARE

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire'straction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 384.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargoload. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 233.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to a vehicleshowing the vehicle capacityweight and the original equipmenttire size and recommended

inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” underVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operate effectively.

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tires thatdo not have enough air, canresult in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating, which could leadto a blowout.

. Premature or irregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, can result in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.(Continued)

Warning (Continued). Rough ride.. Needless damage from roadhazards.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel on the vehicle indicates theoriginal equipment tires and thecorrect cold tire inflationpressures. The recommendedpressure is the minimum airpressure needed to support thevehicle's maximum load carryingcapacity. See Vehicle Load Limits0 233.

How the vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ride comfort.Never load the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the pressure of the tiresonce a month or more.


VEHICLE CARE 375

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been driven forat least three hours or no morethan 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add airuntil the recommended pressure isreached. If the inflation pressureis high, press on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve torelease air.

Recheck the tire pressure with thetire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture. Use only valve capsdesigned for the vehicle by GM.TPMS sensors could be damagedand would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WarningDriving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, puts additionalstrain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessiveheat buildup and can cause suddentire failure. This could cause acrash, and you or others could bekilled. Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicle to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, are in excellentcondition, and are set to the correctcold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with tire sizes listed in theHigh Speed Operation InflationPressures table require inflationpressure adjustment when driving thevehicle at speeds of 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tireinflation pressure to thecorresponding value in the table forthe tire size on the vehicle.


376 VEHICLE CARE

High Speed Operation Inflation Pressures

Tire Size Cold Inflation Pressure kPa (psi)

275/35ZR19 (100Y) 280 kPa (41 psi) Front

305/30ZR19 (102Y) 290 kPa (42 psi) Rear

245/40ZR19 94Y 300 kPa (44 psi)

245/40R19 94V 280 kPa (41 psi)

245/45R18 96V 280 kPa (41 psi)

255/35ZR20 97W 330 kPa (48 psi)

Return the tires to the recommendedcold tire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 233 andTire Pressure 0 374.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your tires and transmittire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.


VEHICLE CARE 377

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver's responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation0 377.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). The TPMS isdesigned to warn the driver when alow tire pressure condition exists.TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly. TheTPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warning light locatedon the instrument cluster. If thewarning light comes on, stop as soonas possible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 233.

A message to check the pressure in aspecific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressurelevels can be viewed. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC


378 VEHICLE CARE

operation and displays see DriverInformation Center (DIC) (Base Level)0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the airpressure is getting low and needs tobe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label,attached to your vehicle, shows thesize of the original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressure forthe tires when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 233, for anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location.Also see Tire Pressure 0 374.

The TPMS can warn about a low tirepressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. SeeTire Inspection 0 380, Tire Rotation0 380 andTires 0 367.

CautionTire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits usea GM-approved liquid tire sealant.Using non-approved tire sealantscould damage the TPMS sensors. SeeTire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0 388for information regarding the inflatorkit materials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensors aremissing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the lowtire pressure warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignition cycle.

A DIC warning message also displays.The malfunction light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditions thatcan cause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The malfunction light andDIC message should go off after theroad tire is replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matching processwas not done or not completedsuccessfully after rotating the tires.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing the sensormatching process. See "TPMSSensor Matching Process" later inthis section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed and the


VEHICLE CARE 379

sensor matching process isperformed successfully. See yourdealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels do notmatch the original equipment tiresor wheels. Tires and wheels otherthan those recommended couldprevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. See Buying New Tires0 382.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. See yourdealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signal lampwill flash.

When the recommended pressureis reached, the horn sounds onceand the turn signal lamp will stopflashing and briefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

{ WarningOverinflating a tire could cause thetire to rupture and you or otherscould be injured. Do not exceed themaximum pressure listed on thetire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 370 andVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

If the tire is overinflated by more than35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will soundmultiple times and the turn signallamp will continue to flash for severalseconds after filling stops. To releaseand correct the pressure, while theturn signal lamp is still flashing,briefly press the center of the valvestem. When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers are on,the tire fill alert visual feedback willnot work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tire fillalert properly under the followingconditions:. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from the inflationdevice is not sufficient to inflatethe tire.

. There is a malfunction in the TPMS.


380 VEHICLE CARE. There is a malfunction in the hornor turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of the TPMSsensor is not registered to thesystem.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use a tirepressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process— Auto Learn Function

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. When a tire isinstalled, the vehicle must bestationary for about 20 minutes beforethe system recalculates. The followingrelearn process takes up to10 minutes, driving at a minimumspeed of 20 km/h (12 mph). A dash (-)or pressure value will display in the

DIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base Level) 0 116 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Uplevel) 0 119. A warning messagedisplays in the DIC if a problemoccurs during the relearn process.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspected forsigns of wear or damage at leastonce a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire canbe seen.

. There is cord or fabric showingthrough the tire's rubber.

. The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 411.

Tires are rotated to achieve amore uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear is noticed,rotate the tires as soon aspossible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Time forNew Tires 0 382 andWheel Replacement 0 386.

Different tire sizes should not berotated front to rear.


VEHICLE CARE 381

Use this rotation pattern if thevehicle has different size tires onthe front and rear.

Use this rotation pattern if alltires are the same size.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label after the tireshave been rotated. See TirePressure 0 374 andVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 377.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 426.

{ WarningRust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it is fastened,can cause wheel nuts to becomeloose over time. The wheelcould come off and cause acrash. When changing a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency,a cloth or paper towel can beused; however, use a scraper orwire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter ofthe wheel hub opening with wheelbearing grease after a wheelchange or tire rotation to preventcorrosion or rust build-up.

{ WarningDo not apply grease to thewheel mounting surface, wheelconical seats, or the wheel nutsor bolts. Grease applied to theseareas could cause a wheel tobecome loose or come off,resulting in a crash.


382 VEHICLE CARE

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds, vehicleloading, and road conditions affect thewear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. See TireInspection 0 380 andTire Rotation 0 380 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factors includingtemperatures, loading conditions, andinflation pressure maintenance affecthow fast aging takes place. GMrecommends that tires, including thespare if equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Toidentify the age of a tire, use the tiremanufacture date, which is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) moldedinto one side of the tire sidewall. Thelast four digits of the TIN indicate thetire manufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week and the lasttwo digits, the year. For example, thethird week of the year 2020 wouldhave a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week01 is the first full week (Sundaythrough Saturday) of each year.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Park avehicle that will be stored for at leasta month in a cool, dry, clean areaaway from direct sunlight to slow

aging. This area should be free ofgrease, gasoline, or other substancesthat can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires that mayresult in vibrations while driving.When storing a vehicle for at least amonth, remove the tires or raise thevehicle to reduce the weight from thetires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of the vehicle,including brake system


VEHICLE CARE 383

performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM'sTPC Spec number is molded ontothe tire's sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed by MS formud and snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 370 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handling performancemay be adversely affected if all thetires are not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done, allfour tires should wear out atabout the same time. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle. SeeTire Rotation 0 380.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount ordismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes(other than those originallyinstalled on the vehicle), brands,tread patterns, or types maycause loss of vehicle control,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use the correctsize, brand, and type of tire onall wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheel rimflanges to develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheelson the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W, Y and ZR speed rated tires.Never exceed the winter tires’maximum speed capability whenusing winter tires with a lowerspeed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.


384 VEHICLE CARE

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 233.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also be affected.

{ WarningIf different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. This increasesthe chance of a crash and serious

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injury. Only use GM specific wheeland tire systems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires 0 382 andAccessories and Modifications 0 328.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in theUnited States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The UniformTire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter tires, compact sparetires, tires with nominal rim

diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they mustalso conform to federal safetyrequirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) standards.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.


VEHICLE CARE 385

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half(1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specified

government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance. Warning: Thetraction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representingthe tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were aligned andbalanced at the factory to provide thelongest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tire balancing are notnecessary on a regular basis. Consideran alignment check if there is unusualtire wear or the vehicle is significantlypulling to one side or the other. Someslight pull to the left or right,depending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variations


386 VEHICLE CARE

such as troughs or ruts, is normal.If the vehicle is vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, the tires andwheels may need to be rebalanced.See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it. Some aluminum wheelscan be repaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter,width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors with new GM originalequipment parts.

{ WarningUsing the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutscan be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of thevehicle. Tires can lose air, andcause loss of control, causing acrash. Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

CautionThe wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WarningReplacing a wheel with a used oneis dangerous. How it has been usedor how far it has been driven maybe unknown. It could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. When replacingwheels, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WarningDo not use tire chains. There is notenough clearance. Tire chains usedon a vehicle without the properamount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension,or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains couldcause loss of control and a crash.Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle's tiresize combination and roadconditions. Follow that

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 387

Warning (Continued)

manufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowlyand readjust or remove the tractiondevice if it contacts the vehicle. Donot spin the wheels. If tractiondevices are used, install them onthe rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tires aremaintained properly. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. See Tires 0 367 foradditional information. But if thereever is a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction as used ina skid. Stop pressing the acceleratorpedal and steer to straighten thevehicle. It may be very bumpy andnoisy. Gently brake to a stop, well offthe road, if possible.

{ WarningDriving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash. Neverattempt to re-inflate a tire that hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat. Have yourdealer or an authorized tire servicecenter repair or replace the flat tireas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has run-flat tires, thereis no need to stop on the side of theroad to change a flat tire. See Run-FlatTires 0 368.

{ WarningSpecial tools and procedures arerequired to service a run-flat tire.If these special tools andprocedures are not used, injury orvehicle damage may occur. Alwaysbe sure the proper tools andprocedures, as described in theservice manual, are used.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 138.

The vehicle has no spare tire, no tirechanging equipment, and no place tostore a tire.

If the vehicle has self-sealing tires, seeSelf-Sealing Tires 0 369. Treadpunctures typically will not cause tiresto lose air. However, if the vehicledoes get a flat tire, there is no sparetire, tire changing equipment, or placeto store a tire. Contact RoadsideService for help.


388 VEHICLE CARE

This vehicle may come with a tiresealant and compressor kit. To use thetire sealant and compressor kit, seeTire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0 388.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WarningIdling a vehicle in an enclosed areawith poor ventilation is dangerous.Engine exhaust may enter thevehicle. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath. Never run the engine in anenclosed area that has no fresh airventilation. For more information,see Engine Exhaust 0 245.

{ WarningOverinflating a tire could cause thetire to rupture and you or otherscould be injured. Be sure to readand follow the tire sealant and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

compressor kit instructions andinflate the tire to its recommendedpressure. Do not exceed therecommended pressure.

{ WarningStoring the tire sealant andcompressor kit or other equipmentin the passenger compartment ofthe vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant andcompressor kit in its originallocation.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire or tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressor canbe used to temporarily seal puncturesup to 6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread areaof the tire. It can also be used toinflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated from thewheel, has damaged sidewalls, or hasa large puncture, the tire is tooseverely damaged for the tire sealantand compressor kit to be effective. SeeRoadside Service 0 434.

Read and follow all of the tire sealantand compressor kit instructions.

The kit includes:

1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve2. Sealant/Air Hose3. Base of Sealant Canister4. Tire Sealant Canister5. On/Off Button6. Slot on Top of Compressor


VEHICLE CARE 389

7. Pressure Deflation Button8. Pressure Gauge

9. Power Plug10.Air Only Hose

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe tire sealant canister (4).

Check the tire sealant expiration dateon the tire sealant canister. The tiresealant canister (4) should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement tire sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the tire sealantcanister must be replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tire faster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 138.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 387 for otherimportant safety warnings.

Do not remove any objects that havepenetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant canister (4)and compressor from its storagelocation. See Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit 0 394.

2. Remove the air only hose (10) andthe power plug (9) from the bottomof the compressor.

3. Place the compressor on theground near the flat tire.

4. Attach the air only hose (10) to thesealant canister inlet valve (1) byturning it clockwise until tight.


390 VEHICLE CARE

5. Slide the base of the tire sealantcanister (3) into the slot on the topof the compressor (6) to hold itupright.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the ground sothe hose will reach it.

6. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

7. Attach the sealant/air hose (2) tothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until tight.

8. Plug the power plug (9) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets. SeePower Outlets 0 92.

Do not pinch the power plug cordin the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle mustbe running while using the aircompressor.

10. Press the on/off button (5) to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit on.

The compressor will inject sealantand air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (8) will initiallyshow a high pressure while thecompressor pushes the sealant intothe tire. Once the sealant iscompletely dispersed into the tire,the pressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gauge (8). Therecommended inflation pressurecan be found on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 374.

The pressure gauge (8) may readhigher than the actual tire pressurewhile the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get anaccurate pressure reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/offuntil the correct pressure isreached.


VEHICLE CARE 391

CautionIf the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be driven farther.The tire is too severely damagedand the tire sealant and compressorkit cannot inflate the tire. Removethe power plug from the accessorypower outlet and unscrew theinflating hose from the tire valve.

12. Press the on/off button (5) to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and the sealant isdistributed in the tire. Therefore,Steps 13–21 must be doneimmediately after Step 12.

Be careful while handling the tiresealant and compressor kit as itcould be warm after usage.

13. Unplug the power plug (9) from theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle.

14. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)counterclockwise to remove it fromthe tire valve stem.

15. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

16. Remove the tire sealant canister (4)from the slot on top of thecompressor (6).

17. Turn the air only hose (10)counterclockwise to remove it fromthe tire sealant canister inletvalve (1).

18. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)clockwise onto the sealant canisterinlet valve (1) to prevent sealantleakage.

19. Return the air only hose (10) andpower plug (9) back to theiroriginal storage location.

20. If the flat tire was able to inflate tothe recommended inflationpressure, remove the maximumspeed label from the sealantcanister and place it in a highlyvisible location.

Do not exceed the speed on thislabel until the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

21. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

22. Immediately drive the vehicle 8 km(5 mi) to distribute the sealant inthe tire.

23. Stop at a safe location and checkthe tire pressure. Refer to Steps 1–10 under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallen morethan 68 kPa (10 psi) below therecommended inflation pressure,stop driving the vehicle. The tire istoo severely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.


392 VEHICLE CARE

If the tire pressure has not droppedmore than 68 kPa (10 psi) from therecommended inflation pressure,inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressure.

24. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, or vehicle.

25. Dispose of the used tire sealantcanister (4) at a local dealer or inaccordance with local state codesand practices.

26. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

27. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take the vehicle toan authorized dealer within 161 km(100 mi) of driving to have the tirerepaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured)

The kit includes:

1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve2. Sealant/Air Hose3. Base of Sealant Canister4. Tire Sealant Canister5. On/Off Button6. Slot on Top of Compressor7. Pressure Deflation Button8. Pressure Gauge

9. Power Plug10.Air Only Hose

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 138.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 387 for otherimportant safety warnings.

1. Remove the compressor from itsstorage location. See Storing theTire Sealant and Compressor Kit0 394.

2. Remove the air only hose (10) andthe power plug (9) from the bottomof the compressor.


VEHICLE CARE 393

3. Place the compressor on theground near the flat tire.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the ground sothe hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (10) to thetire valve stem by turning itclockwise until tight.

6. Plug the power plug (9) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets. SeePower Outlets 0 92.

Do not pinch the power plug cordin the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle mustbe running while using the aircompressor.

8. Press the on/off button (5) to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit on.

The compressor will inflate the tirewith air only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gauge (8). Therecommended inflation pressurecan be found on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 374.

The pressure gauge (8) may readhigher than the actual tire pressurewhile the compressor is on. Turnthe compressor off to get anaccurate pressure reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/offuntil the correct pressure isreached.

CautionIf the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be driven farther.The tire is too severely damagedand the tire sealant and compressorkit cannot inflate the tire. Removethe power plug from the accessorypower outlet and unscrew theinflating hose from the tire valve.

10. Press the on/off button (5) to turnthe tire sealant and compressorkit off.

Be careful while handling thecompressor as it could be warmafter usage.

11. Unplug the power plug (9) from theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle.

12. Turn the air only hose (10)counterclockwise to remove it fromthe tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (10) andpower plug (9) back to theiroriginal storage location.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas accessory adapters located in acompartment on the bottom of itshousing that can be used to inflate airmattresses, balls, etc.


394 VEHICLE CARE

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kit isin a bag in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk 0 18.

2. Lift the load floor.

3. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit bag.

4. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from the bag.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 353.

If the battery has run down, try to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure touse the following steps to do it safely.

{ WarningWARNING: Battery posts,terminals and related accessoriescan expose you to chemicalsincluding lead and lead compounds,which are known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling. Formore information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

See the warning on the back cover.

{ WarningBatteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enough electricityto burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you.

CautionIgnoring these steps could result incostly damage to the vehicle thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Trying to start the vehicleby pushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.


VEHICLE CARE 395

1. Discharged Battery RemotePositive Terminal

2. Discharged Battery NegativeGrounding Point

3. Good Battery Negative Terminal4. Good Battery Positive Terminal

The jump start positive terminal (4)and negative post (3) are on thebattery of the vehicle providing thejump start.

The jump start remote positiveterminal (1) and the remote negativegrounding point (2) for the dischargedbattery are on the passenger side ofthe vehicle.

The positive jump start connection forthe discharged battery is under acover. Lift the cover to expose theterminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

CautionIf the other vehicle does not have a12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the vehicle in P (Park) with anautomatic transmission, or Neutralwith a manual transmission.

CautionIf any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged.The repairs would not be covered

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)by the vehicle warranty. Wheneverpossible, turn off or unplug allaccessories on either vehicle whenjump starting.

4. Turn the ignition off. Turn off alllights and accessories in bothvehicles, except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WarningAn electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not running andcan injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WarningUsing a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this, andsome have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

(Continued)


396 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you.If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical helpimmediately.

{ WarningFans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep yourhands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the remotepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the good battery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (–) cabledoes not go to the dead battery.It goes to a heavy, unpainted metalengine part.

8. Connect the other end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point for thedischarged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehicle withthe good battery and run theengine at idle speed for at leastfour minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will not startafter a few tries, it probably needsservice.

CautionIf the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order,electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)correct order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicle andremoving the jumper cables, allow itto idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

CautionIncorrectly transporting a disabledvehicle may cause damage to thevehicle. Use proper tire straps tosecure the vehicle to the flatbedtow truck. Do not strap or hook toany frame, underbody,or suspension component notspecified below. Do not movevehicles with drive axle tires on theground. Damage is not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


VEHICLE CARE 397

CautionThe vehicle may be equipped withan electric parking brake and/or anelectronic shifter. In the event of aloss of 12-volt battery power, theelectric parking brake cannot bereleased, and the vehicle cannot beshifted to N (Neutral). Tire skatesor dollies must be used under thenon-rolling tires to prevent damagewhile loading/unloading the vehicle.Dragging the vehicle will causedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

CautionThe vehicle may be equipped with atow eye. Improper use of the toweye may cause damage to thevehicle and is not covered by thevehicle warranty. If equipped, usethe tow eye to load the vehicle ontoa flatbed tow truck from a flat roadsurface, or to move the vehicle avery short distance at a walkingpace. The tow eye is not designed

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)for off-road recovery. The vehiclemust be in N (Neutral) with theelectric parking brake releasedwhen using the tow eye.

Contact a professional towing serviceif the disabled vehicle must betransported. GM recommends aflatbed tow truck to transport adisabled vehicle. Use ramps to helpreduce approach angles, if necessary.

If equipped, a tow eye may be locatednear the spare tire or emergency jack.Do not use the tow eye to pull thevehicle from the snow, mud, sand,or ditch. Tow eye threads may haveright or left-hand threads. Use cautionwhen installing or removing thetow eye.

The vehicle must be in N (Neutral)and the electric parking brake must bereleased when loading the vehicleonto a flatbed tow truck.. If the vehicle is equipped with carwash mode and has 12-volt batterypower, refer to “Car Wash Mode”under Automatic Transmission 0 246to place the vehicle in N (Neutral).

. If the 12-volt battery is dead and/orthe engine will not start, the vehiclewill not move. Try to jump start thevehicle. Refer to Jump Starting -North America 0 394 and if thejump start is successful, retry the“Car Wash Mode” procedure.

. If jump starting is unsuccessful, thevehicle will not move. Tire skates ordollies must be used under thenon-rolling tires to prevent vehicledamage.


398 VEHICLE CARE

V-Series Blackwing Only

Due to low ramp angles on theV-Series Blackwing, use care whenloading the vehicle onto a flatbedcarrier. Front spring spacers wereprovided for lifting the frontsuspension if more clearance isnecessary when towing.

Front Tow Eye

The vehicle is equipped with a toweye. Only use the tow eye to pull thevehicle onto a flatbed car carrier froma flat road surface. Do not use the toweye to pull the vehicle from snow,mud, or sand. The tow eye is locatedunder the carpet in the trunk.

Carefully open the cover in the fasciaby using the small notch that concealsthe tow eye socket.

Install the tow eye into the socket andturn it until it is fully tightened. Whenthe tow eye is removed, reinstall thecover with the notch in the originalposition.

Rear Tow Eye

If equipped, carefully open the coverby using the small notch that concealsthe rear tow eye socket. Install thetow eye into the socket and turn ituntil it is fully tightened. When thetow eye is removed, reinstall the coverwith the notch in the originalposition.


VEHICLE CARE 399

Recreational VehicleTowing

CautionDolly towing or dinghy towing thevehicle may cause damage becauseof reduced ground clearance.Always put the vehicle on a flatbedtruck or trailer.

The vehicle was neither designed norintended to be towed with any of itswheels on the ground. If the vehiclemust be towed, see Towing the Vehicle0 396.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whennecessary, and have the locks greasedafter using. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 0 420.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle finish, wash itoften and out of direct sunlight.

CautionDo not use petroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents as theycan damage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

CautionAvoid using high-pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8 274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Automatic Car Wash

CautionAutomatic car washes can causedamage to the vehicle, wheels,ground effects, and convertible top(if equipped).

Do not use automatic car washesdue to lack of clearance for theundercarriage, wide rear tires, andwheels.

CautionTo avoid damage to a matte paintfinish, do not use an automatic carwash equipped with brushes orscrubbers. Only use touchlessautomatic car washes.

If using an automatic car wash, followthe car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that may bedamaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.


400 VEHICLE CARE

Hand Wash

Rinse the vehicle well, before and afterwashing, to remove all cleaning agentscompletely. If they are allowed to dryon the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Cleaning Underhood Components

CautionDo not power wash any componentunder the hood that has thisesymbol.

This could cause damage to thevehicle that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Avoid using solvents or abrasivecleaners that may harm underhoodcomponents. GM recommends usingonly water to clean underhoodcomponents.

If using a pressure washer, ensure thefollowing criteria is met:. Water pressure must be kept below14 000 KPa (2,000 PSI).

. Water temperature must be below80 °C (180 °F).

. A spray nozzle with a 40 degreewide angle spray pattern or widermust be used, and must be kept atleast 30 cm (1 ft) away from allsurfaces.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfaces aredamaged, see your dealer to have thedamage assessed and repaired.Materials such as calcium chlorideand other salts, ice melting agents,road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage the vehiclefinish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. See yourdealer for approved cleaning products.

CautionDo not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or mattepaint as damage can occur.

CautionMachine compounding oraggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damageit. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish onthe vehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.


VEHICLE CARE 401

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

CautionFailure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can result ina hazy white finish or pitting. Thisdamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To prevent damage,always follow these cleaninginstructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to thetouch before applying any cleaningsolution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. Some cleaners arehighly acidic or contain alkalinesubstances and can damage themoldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protect andextend the molding finish.

Carbon Fiber Care

Carbon fiber composite parts can bewashed and waxed like any otherparts. Use a clear or black pigmentedwax. See Composite Materials 0 237.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses,Emblems, Decals, and Stripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems,decals, and stripes. Follow instructionsunder "Washing the Vehicle"previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic, andsome have a UV protective coating. Donot clean or wipe lamp covers whendry. This can cause scratches to thesurface of the lamp cover.

Do not use any of the following itemson lamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by the manufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or otherharsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessive heatgenerated.

CautionFailure to clean lamps properly cancause damage to the lamp coverthat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

CautionUsing wax on low gloss black finishstripes can increase the gloss leveland create a non-uniform finish.Clean low gloss stripes with soapand water only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakesbetween the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.


402 VEHICLE CARE

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help improve fueleconomy. Always keep the shuttersystem clear of debris, snow and ice.If the check engine light is activated,please check to see if the shuttersystem is clear of debris, snow or ice.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber wiper blades using alint-free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshield

thoroughly when cleaning the blades.Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dusty conditions,sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks from rubbermaterial on painted surfaces can beremoved by rubbing with a cleancloth. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 420.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

CautionUsing petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle maydamage the paint finish and/ortires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray fromall painted surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soapand water to clean the wheels. Afterrinsing thoroughly with clean water,dry with a soft, clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

CautionChrome wheels and chrome wheeltrim may be damaged if the vehicleis not washed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium chloride or calciumchloride. These are used on roadsfor conditions such as dust control.Always wash the chrome with soapand water after exposure.


VEHICLE CARE 403

CautionTo avoid surface damage on wheelsand wheel trim, do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drive thevehicle through an automatic carwash that uses silicon carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damagecould occur and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brakepads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect brake linings/shoesfor wear or cracks. Inspect all otherbrake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering, suspension,and chassis components for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signs ofwear at least once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hoodhinges, liftgate hinges, and the steelfuel door hinges, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

Underbody Maintenance

Every six months, use plain water toflush any corrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer caseand/or axles and should be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requiressheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restorecorrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care” previously inthis section.


404 VEHICLE CARE

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Before using cleaners, read and followall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, open thedoors and windows to get properventilation. Newspapers or darkgarments can transfer color to thevehicle’s interior.

CautionImmediately remove cleaners, handlotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfacesor permanent damage may result.

CautionUse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage to thevehicle. Apply all cleaners directlyto a cleaning cloth. Do not spraycleaners on any switches orcontrols.

When using liquid soap cleaners,follow the directions on the specificcleaner or soap solution for dilutioninstructions.

CautionTo prevent damage:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not get any exposed electricalcomponents wet.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Do not use solutionsthat contain strong orcaustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued). Do not use disinfecting wipesthat are scented or containbleach. Do not use wipes orcleaners that show a colortransfer to the wipe or changethe appearance of the interiorsurface when used.

. Do not use scented or gel-typehand sanitizers. If hand sanitizercomes in contact with interiorsurfaces of the vehicle, blotimmediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap and water solution.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a microfiber cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercial glasscleaner after cleaning with plain water.


VEHICLE CARE 405

CautionTo prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six months ofownership will reduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will not bedamaged. Clean spots with water andmild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Vinyl/Rubber

If equipped with vinyl floor andrubber floor mats, use a soft clothand/or brush dampened with water toremove dust and loose dirt. For morethorough cleaning, use a mild soapand water solution.

{ WarningDo not use cleaners that containsilicone, wax-based products,or cleaners that increase gloss onvinyl/rubber floor and mats. Thesecleaners can permanently changethe appearance and feel of thevinyl/rubber and can make the floorslippery. Your foot could slip whileoperating the vehicle, and youcould lose control, resulting in acrash. You or others could beinjured.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surface usinga soft brush attachment. If a rotatingvacuum brush attachment is being

used, only use it on the floor carpet.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible:. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as much aspossible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfastcloth with water. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture by gentlywringing until water does not dripfrom the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth to aclean area frequently to preventforcing the soil into the fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing the soiledarea until there is no longer anycolor transfer from the soil to thecleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soap solutionfollowed only by plain water.


406 VEHICLE CARE

If the soil is not completely removed,it may be necessary to use acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. Test a small hidden area forcolorfastness before using acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First, usea soft bristle brush to remove dirt thatcan scratch the surface. Then gentlyclean by rubbing with a microfibercloth. Never use window cleaners orsolvents. Periodically hand wash themicrofiber cloth separately, using mildsoap. Do not use bleach or fabricsoftener. Rinse thoroughly and air drybefore next use.

CautionDo not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. This maycause damage and would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl,Other Plastic Surfaces, LowGloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with waterto remove dust and loose dirt. For amore thorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap and water solution.

CautionSoaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, as wellas other interior surfaces, maycause permanent damage. Wipeexcess moisture from these surfacesafter cleaning and allow them to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)dry naturally. Never use heat,steam, or spot removers. Do not useliquids that contain alcohol orsolvents on leather seats. Do notuse cleaners that contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleanerscontaining these solvents canpermanently change the appearanceand feel of leather or soft trim, andare not recommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

CautionUse of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plastics andpainted surfaces. If an air freshenercomes in contact with any plasticor painted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mild

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 407

Caution (Continued)soap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water,and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WarningDo not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Floor Mats

{ WarningIf a floor mat is the wrong size or isnot properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distancewhich can cause a crash and injury.Make sure the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat use.. The original equipment floor matsare designed for your vehicle. If thefloor mats need to be replaced, it isrecommended that GM-certifiedfloor mats are purchased. Non-GMfloor mats may not fit properly andmay interfere with the pedals.Always check that the floor mats donot interfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if the vehicleis not equipped with a floor matretainer on the driver side floor.

. Use the floor mat with the correctside up. Do not turn it over.

. Do not place anything on top of thedriver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat on thedriver side.

. Do not place one floor mat on topof another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two button-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock the retainers and remove.


408 VEHICLE CARE

2. Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

3. Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place. Verify the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Cleaning Rubber Floor Mats(All-Weather Mats and FloorLiners)

See “Vinyl/Rubber” under Interior Care0 404 for important cleaninginformation.


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 409

Service andMaintenanceGeneral InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application Services . . . . . 417

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describes therequired maintenance for the vehicle.Follow this schedule to help protectagainst major repair expensesresulting from neglect or inadequatemaintenance. It may also help tomaintain the value of the vehicle if itis sold. It is the responsibility of theowner to have all requiredmaintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and online schedulingto assist with service needs.

Your dealer recognizes the importanceof providing competitively pricedmaintenance and repair services. Withtrained technicians, the dealer is theplace for routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations and

additional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

CautionDamage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, and lubricantsare important to keep the vehicle ingood working condition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GM performedon the vehicle. The use of flushes,solvents, cleaners, or lubricants thatare not approved by GM coulddamage the vehicle, requiringexpensive repairs that are notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps to


410 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy, andreduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more frequentchecks and services. The AdditionalRequired Services - Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 233.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal driving limits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel (LSY 2.0L L4Engine) 0 316 orRecommended Fuel (LGY 3.0L V6 andLT4 6.2L V8 Engines) 0 316.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed or competitivedriving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ WarningPerforming maintenance work canbe dangerous and can cause seriousinjury. Perform maintenance workonly if the required information,proper tools, and equipment areavailable. If they are not, see yourdealer to have a trained techniciando the work. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 329.



Maintenance ScheduleOwner Checks and Services

Check the engine oil level. See EngineOil 0 336.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 374.

. Inspect the tires for wear. See TireInspection 0 380.

. Check the windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 348.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km (600 mi). If drivenunder the best conditions, the engineoil life system may not indicate theneed for vehicle service for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and theoil life system must be reset. Yourtrained dealer technician can performthis work. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km (3,000 mi)

since the last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 338.

Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years. Thisservice requires replacement of thedesiccant to help the longevity andefficient operation of the airconditioning system. This service canbe complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km(7,500 mi)

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform the followingservices. See Tire Rotation 0 380.. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed, changeengine oil and filter, and reset oillife system. See Engine Oil 0 336 andEngine Oil Life System 0 338.

. If equipped, check the air filterlife percentage. If necessary, replacethe engine air filter and reset theengine air filter life system. SeeEngine Air Filter Life System 0 340.If the vehicle is not equipped withthe engine air filter life system,inspect the engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 341.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 343.

. Check windshield washer fluid level.See Washer Fluid 0 348.

. Check tire inflation pressures. SeeTire Pressure 0 374.

. Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection0 380.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect brake system. See ExteriorCare 0 399.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage, includingcracks or tears in the rubber boots,loose or missing parts, or signs ofwear at least once a year. SeeExterior Care 0 399.


412 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE. Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts and driveshafts for excessive wear, lubricantleaks, and/or damage including:tube dents or cracks, constantvelocity joint or universal jointlooseness, cracked or missing boots,loose or missing boot clamps, centerbearing excessive looseness, loose ormissing fasteners, and axle sealleaks.

. Check restraint system components.See Safety System Check 0 54.

. Visually inspect the fuel systemincluding the evaporative (EVAP)system for damage or leaks. Visuallycheck all fuel pipes, vapor lines, andhoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.

. Visually inspect exhaust system andnearby heat shields for loose ordamaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 399.

. Check parking brake and automatictransmission park mechanism. SeePark Brake and P (Park) MechanismCheck 0 354.

. Check accelerator pedal for damage,high effort, or binding. Replace ifneeded.

. Visually inspect gas strut for signsof wear, cracks, or other damage.Check the hold open ability of thestrut. If the hold open is low,service the gas strut. See GasStrut(s) 0 356.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 32.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires, if recommended for the vehicle, andperform Required Services. (1) Check engine oil leveland oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter,if needed.If equipped, check engine air filter life percentageand status. Change engine air filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (2) @ @ @ @ @ @

If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine airfilter life system, replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)

@ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/orboots.

@ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4)

@

Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited slipdifferential. (4)

@ @ @

Change rear axle fluid, without limited slipdifferential. (4)

@

Change front axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. (4) @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. (9) @ @

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)



Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

(1) Vehicles with different size frontand rear tires do not have tirerotation. See Tire Rotation 0 380.

(2) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 341.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 343.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 352.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 355.

(9) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 356.

(10) Replace air conditioningdesiccant every seven years.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires, if recommended for the vehicle, andperform Required Services. (1) Check engine oil leveland oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter,if needed.If equipped, check engine air filter life percentageand status. Change engine air filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (2) @ @ @ @ @ @

If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine airfilter life system, replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)

@ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires and/orboots.

@ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. (10Speed Transmission)

@ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. (6 SpeedTransmission)

@ @ @

Change manual transmission fluid. (If equipped) @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4)

@ @ @

Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited slipdifferential. (4)

@ @ @

Change rear axle fluid, without limited slipdifferential. (4)

@ @

Change front axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. (4) @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. (9) @ @

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)

Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

(1) Vehicles with different size frontand rear tires do not have tirerotation. See Tire Rotation 0 380.

(2) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, window

fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 341.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminated

fluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 343.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 352.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 355.



(9) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 356.

(10) Replace air conditioningdesiccant every seven years.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use VehiclesOnly: Lubricate chassis componentsevery oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care 0 399.

Additional Maintenanceand CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additional maintenanceservices may be required.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — their traineddealer technicians know your vehiclebest. Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti-point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditions tolook for that may indicate services arerequired.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain a batterywith full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians have thediagnostic equipment to test thebattery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs of cracking orsplitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the belts and recommendadjustment or replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucialto safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the brakes and recommendquality parts engineered for thevehicle.



Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approved fluidsprotect the vehicle’s systems andcomponents. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 0 420 for GM approvedfluids.. Engine oil and windshield washerfluid levels should be checked atevery fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights may comeon to indicate that fluids may below and need to be filled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and should beregularly inspected to ensure thatthere are no cracks or leaks. With amulti-point inspection, your dealercan inspect the hoses and advise ifreplacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage. Thebrake lamps need to be checkedperiodically to ensure that they lightwhen braking.

. With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can check the lamps andnote any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include steeringwheel vibration, bounce/sway whilebraking, longer stopping distance,or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspect theshocks and struts for signs ofleaking, blown seals, or damage, andcan advise when service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cord orfabric showing through the rubber;cracks or cuts in the tread orsidewall; or a bulge or split inthe tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can also providetire/wheel balancing services toensure smooth vehicle operation atall speeds. Your dealer sells andservices name brand tires.



Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 404 andExterior Care 0 399.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliver optimalwear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may needto be adjusted include pulling,improper vehicle handling,or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure proper wheelalignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and the bestviewing, keep the windshield cleanand clear.. Signs of damage include scratches,cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacement ifneeded.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleaned andkept in good condition to provide aclear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield, andworn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades and replacethem when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name or specification, including fluids or lubricants not listed here, can beobtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. SeeCooling System 0 343.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade.ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 336.

Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch,Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Release Pawl

Lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer.

Manual Transmission DEXRON III Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Rear Axle/Front Axle (All-Wheel Drive) See your dealer.

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) See your dealer.

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

I2.0L L4 Engine

84498926 A3245C

I3.0L V6 Engine (Driver Side)

84335354 A3235C

I3.0L V6 Engine (Passenger Side)

84335354 A3235C

I6.2L V8 Engine

84578064 A3247C

Engine Oil Filter

I2.0L L4 Engine

55495105 PF66

I3.0L V6 Engine

12707246 PF63

I6.2L V8 Engine

12696048 PF64



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

IAllergen

84987523 CF185

ICarbon

23195727 CF184

Spark Plugs

I2.0L L4 Engine

55504354 41-103-IP

I3.0L V6 Engine

12650283 41-131

I6.2L V8 Engine

12642722 41-128

Wiper Blades

IDriver Side – 60 cm (23.62 in)

84566977 —

IPassenger Side – 45 cm (17.72 in)

84574892 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type ofservices performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed


424 TECHNICAL DATA

Technical DataVehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) (V-SeriesBlackwing Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Service Parts Identification . . . . . . 425

Vehicle DataCapacities and Specifications . . . . 426Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . 429

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification label andcertificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code identifies thevehicle's engine, specifications, andreplacement parts. See “EngineSpecifications” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 426 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) (V-SeriesBlackwing Only)A serialized plate can be found at thelower portion of the steering wheel.

The plate will correspond to the lastsix digits in the VIN.

1. Vehicle Build:

2 − Advanced Regular Production

3 − Advanced Special Production

4 − Regular Production

5 − Special Production

2. Transmission

6 − 6-speed Manual

1 − 10-speed Automatic

3. Sequence Number


TECHNICAL DATA 425

Service Parts IdentificationThere may be a large barcode on thecertification label on the center pillarthat you can scan for the followinginformation:. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options

If there is not a large barcode on thislabel, then you will find this sameinformation on a label inside of thetrunk.


426 TECHNICAL DATA

Vehicle DataCapacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants0 420 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Brake Fluid 0.4 L 0.4 qt

Engine Cooling System*

I2.0L L4 Engine

10.4 L 11.0 qt

I3.0L V6 Engine with Rear Wheel Drive

12.1 L 12.8 qt

I3.0L V6 Engine with All-Wheel Drive

12.3 L 13.0 qt

I3.0L V6 Engine Intercoolers (RWD)

3.1 L 3.3 qt

I3.0L V6 Engine Intercoolers (AWD)

3.0 L 3.2 qt


TECHNICAL DATA 427


Metric English

I6.2L V8 Engine

13.1 L 13.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

I2.0L L4 Engine

5.0 L 5.3 qt

I3.0L V6 Engine (RWD)

5.7 L 6.0 qt

I3.0L V6 Engine (AWD)

6.2 L 6.5 qt

I6.2L V8 Engine

8.5 L 9.0 qt

Front Axle 0.40 L 0.42 qt

Rear Axle

IOpen Differential - Small

0.75 L 0.79 qt

IOpen Differential - Large

1.0 L 1.0 qt


428 TECHNICAL DATA


Metric English

IMechanical Limited Slip

1.0 L 1.0 qt

IElectronic Limited Slip

1.5 L 1.5 qt

Fuel Tank 66.0 L 17.5 gal

Transfer Case (AWD) 0.80 L 0.85 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.

*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Engine (LSY) K Automatic 0.65–0.75 mm (0.026–0.030 in)

3.0L V6 Engine (LGY) W Automatic 0.65–0.75 mm (0.026–0.030 in)

6.2L V8 Engine (LT4) 6 AutomaticManual

0.725–0.875 mm (0.028–0.034 in)

Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage thespark plug.


TECHNICAL DATA 429

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L L4 Engine (LSY)

3.0L V6 Engine (LGY)

6.2L V8 Engine (LT4)


430 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

CustomerInformationCustomer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Customer Assistance Offices . . . . 432Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . 432

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . 437Publication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . 439

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to theUnited States Government . . . . . 440

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . 440

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . 441OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operationof the vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer's sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following stepsshould be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed withthe sales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of your dealershipor the general manager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management, itappears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership without


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 431

further help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800–458–8006. In Canada, callthe Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre at 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Have the followinginformation available to give theCustomer Assistance representative:. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).This is available from the vehicleregistration or title, or the plate atthe top left of the instrument paneland visible through the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

When contacting Cadillac, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : BothGeneral Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with the newvehicle. However, if you continue to

remain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINEProgram to enforce your rights.

The BBB AUTO LINE Program is anout-of-court program administered byBBB National Programs, Inc. to settleautomotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required toresort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program isfree of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decisiongiven in your case, you may reject itand proceed with any other venue forrelief available to you.

You may contact the BBB AUTO LINEProgram using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB AUTO LINE a Division ofBBB National Programs, Inc.1676 International DriveSuite 550McLean, VA 22102

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District of Columbia.Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in thisprogram.

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners :In the event that you do not feel yourconcerns have been addressed afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors ofCanada Company wants you to beaware of its participation in ano-charge mediation/arbitrationprogram. General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involving



factory-related vehicle service claims.The program provides for the reviewof the facts involved by an impartialthird party arbiter, and may includean informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe Cadillac Customer Care Centre,1-888-446-2000, or write to:

General Motors Cadillac CustomerCare CentreGeneral Motors of Canada CompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Cadillac, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada CompanyCadillac Customer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.cadillaccanada.ca

1-888-446-2000 (English/French)Cadillac Roadside Service:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment availableat its Customer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-2622.TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.



Online Owner Center

The Cadillac Owner Center (U.S.)my.cadillac.com

Learn more about your vehiclefeatures, shop for and manage yourconnected services and OnStar plans,and access diagnostic informationspecific to your vehicle.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manuals andview vehicle-specific how-to videos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View service records from yourdealership and add your own.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers, andhours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls or search byVehicle Identification Number (VIN).See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 424 orVehicle Identification Number (VIN)(V-Series Blackwing Only) 0 424.

H : Manage your profile and paymentinformation. View your GM RewardsCard earnings and My CadillacRewards points.

F : Chat with online helprepresentatives.

Visit my.cadillac.com and create anaccount today.

Cadillac Owner Centre (Canada)mycadillac.ca

Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre atmycadillac.ca (English) ormy.cadillac.ca (French) to accesssimilar benefits to the U.S. site.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available to qualifiedapplicants for cost reimbursement, upto certain limits, of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such as handcontrols or a wheelchair/scooter liftfor the vehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has aMobility program. Seecadillaccanada.ca, or call1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.



Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400.

Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service, havethe following information ready:. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of your location

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and license platenumber of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for the durationof the vehicle’s powertrain warranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicleis covered. In Canada, a person drivingthe vehicle without permission fromthe owner is not covered.

Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the RoadsideService program at any time withoutnotification.

General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery: Deliveryof enough fuel for the vehicle to getto the nearest service station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service to unlockthe vehicle if you are locked out.A remote unlock may be available ifyou have OnStar. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this service isgiven.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service to changea flat tire with a spare tire. Thespare tire, if equipped, must be ingood condition and properlyinflated. It is your responsibility forthe repair or replacement of the tireif it is not covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be reimbursed duringthe Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel, meals,and rental car or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer, upto 500 miles.



Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside Serviceis more than an auto club or towingservice. It provides every Cadillacowner in the United States with theadvantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, where available, aCadillac trained dealer technician whocan provide on-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to yourlocation within a 30-mile radius of aparticipating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrangeto have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership. Each techniciantravels with a specially equippedservice vehicle complete with thenecessary Cadillac parts and toolsrequired to handle most roadsiderepairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by violationof any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting, or changingof snow tires, chains, or othertraction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicle isin an area that is not accessible to theservice vehicle or is not a regularlytraveled or maintained public road,which includes ice and winter roads.Off-road use is not covered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is upto 7 liters. Diesel fuel delivery maybe restricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided through thisservice.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy of therepair orders are required. Onceauthorization has been received, theRoadside Service advisor will helpyou make arrangements and explainhow to receive payment. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals, and

rental car or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer, upto 800 km.

. Alternative Service: If assistancecannot be provided right away, theRoadside Service advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by the warrantyare the owner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment andadvising the service consultant ofyour transportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until it



can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safetyrelated. If it is, please call yourdealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you are urgedto do so as early in the work day aspossible to allow for same-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada), FederalEmission, Extended Powertrain orElectric specific warranties in both theU.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a partof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.A separate manual entitled “LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation” furnished with each newvehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, your dealermay offer the following transportationoptions:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters of yourdealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must be supportedby original receipts and within themaximum amount allowed by GM.If U.S. customers arrange their owntransportation, limited reimbursement

for reasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supportedby original receipts. See your dealerfor information.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completed rentalagreement and meet state/provincial,local, and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. Additional fees suchas fuel, rental vehicle insurance, taxes,levies, usage fees, excessive mileage,or rental usage beyond the completionof the repair are also yourresponsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional Program Information

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at everydealer. Contact your dealer for specificavailability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in a collisionand it is damaged, have the damagerepaired by a qualified technicianusing the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorlyperformed collision repairs diminishthe vehicle resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as the parts

with which the vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts arethe best choice to ensure that thevehicle's designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses in priorcrashes. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part may be anacceptable choice to maintain thevehicle's originally designedappearance and safety performance;however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not coveredby the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures arenot covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly,

exhibit premature durability/corrosionproblems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered bythe GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts is not covered bythat warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that you choosea collision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer may havea collision repair center withGM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians andcomparable equipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. There aresignificant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by variousinsurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reducedprotection to the GM vehicle by



limiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collisionparts. Some insurance companies willnot specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Readthe lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of the lease forpoor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Movethe vehicle only if its position putsyou in danger, or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involved inthe crash.

For emergency towing see RoadsideService 0 434.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and telephonenumber

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of the damageto the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility thatuses quality replacement parts. See“Collision Parts” earlier in this section.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an Airbag Inflates?0 60.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommends thatyou take an active role in its repair.If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take the vehiclethere, or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GMparts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts.Discuss this with the repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember, if the vehicle isleased, you may be obligated to havethe vehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.



If another party's insurance companyis paying for the repairs, you are notobligated to accept a repair valuationbased on that insurance company'scollision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you can havecontrol of the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on the engine,transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,electrical system, steering system,body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. Theowner’s manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase include owner’smanuals, warranty manuals, andportfolios. Portfolios include anowner’s manual, warranty manual,if applicable, and zip lock bag orpouch.

Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm,Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle uses license-exempttransmitters / receivers / systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal Communications Commission(FCC) rules and with Innovation,Science and Economic Development(ISED) Canada's license-exempt RSS(s)/ RSP-100 / ICES-GEN.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or GeneralMotors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call Transport Canadaat 1-800-333-0510; go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations and RecallsDivision80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

In the U.S., call 1-800-458-8006,or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Company1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 800-466-0805 or800-212-234-5522.



In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-555-901-2369.

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven or used. For example,the vehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deploymentand deploy them in a crash, and,if equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may store datato help the dealer technician servicethe vehicle or to help GM improvesafety or features. Some modules mayalso store data about how the vehicleis operated, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. Thesemodules may retain personalpreferences, such as radio presets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.

CybersecurityGM collects information about the useof your vehicle including operationaland safety related information. Wecollect this information to provide,evaluate, improve, and troubleshootour products and services and todevelop new products and services.The protection of vehicle electronicssystems and customer data fromunauthorized outside electronic accessor control is important to GM. GMmaintains appropriate securitystandards, practices, guidelines andcontrols aimed at defending thevehicle and the vehicle serviceecosystem against unauthorizedelectronic access, detecting possiblemalicious activity in related networks,and responding to suspectedcybersecurity incidents in a timely,coordinated and effective manner.Security incidents could impact yoursafety or compromise your privatedata. To minimize security risks,please do not connect your vehicleelectronic systems to unauthorizeddevices or connect your vehicle to anyunknown or untrusted networks (suchas Bluetooth, WIFI or similar

technology). In the event you suspectany security incident impacting yourdata or the safe operation of yourvehicle, please stop operating yourvehicle and contact your dealer.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDRin this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,


442 CUSTOMER INFORMATION. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by theEDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle orthe EDR.

GM will not access these data or shareit with others except: with the consentof the vehicle owner or, if the vehicleis leased, with the consent of the

lessee; in response to an officialrequest by police or similargovernment office; as part of GM'sdefense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as permitted bylaw. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM researchneeds or may be made available toothers for research purposes, where aneed is shown and the data is not tiedto a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped with OnStarand has an active service plan,additional data may be collected andtransmitted through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features,including infotainment; and thelocation and approximate GPS speedof the vehicle. Refer to the OnStarTerms and Conditions and PrivacyStatement on the OnStar website.

See OnStar Additional Information0 445.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment section forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


ONSTAR 443

OnStarOnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle system thatcan connect to an OnStar Advisor forEmergency, Security, Navigation,Connections, and Diagnostics Services.OnStar services may require a paidservice plan and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service, andGPS satellite signals to be availableand operating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency service providers.OnStar may collect information aboutyou and your vehicle, includinglocation information. See OnStar UserTerms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more details

including system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light is nextto the OnStar buttons. If the statuslight is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Q twice tospeak with an OnStar Advisor.

Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.

Press= to:. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. If equipped,the infotainment system has OnStarcontrols in the embedded OnStarapp on the Home Page. Most OnStarfunctions that can be performedwith the buttons can be done usingthe app. To open the app, touch theOnStar icon on the Home Page. App


444 ONSTAR

updates require a correspondingservice plan. Features vary by regionand model. Features are subject tochange. For more information, seemy.cadillac.com/learn or press Q.

Or. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

Press Q to connect to an Advisor to:. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check of thevehicle's key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Service.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or respond toan AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severe weather orother crisis situations and findevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require an activesafety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisor whois immediately connected in to thevehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, and relayimportant information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Service, Advisors canlocate a nearby service provider tohelp with a flat tire, a battery jump,or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can block theengine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can work withlaw enforcement to gradually slowthe vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover the vehicle.


ONSTAR 445

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. Press Qto set up an account.

. After change in ownership and at90 days.

Transferring Service

Press Q to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring the Vehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)immediately to terminate your OnStaror connected services if the vehicle isdisposed of, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

Press Q and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStar orconnected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, and Roadside Service areavailable on most vehicles. Not allOnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar User Terms, PrivacyStatement, and Software Terms:. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. Press Q to speak with an Advisor.

OnStar or connected services cannotwork unless the vehicle is in a placewhere OnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar orconnected services. Service involvinglocation information about the vehiclecannot work unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStar hardware.OnStar or connected services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar or connectedservices may not work. Otherproblems beyond the control ofOnStar — such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the vehicle,damage to the vehicle in a crash,or wireless phone network congestionor jamming — may prevent service.



446 ONSTAR

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to help withphysical disabilities and medicalconditions.

Press Q to help:. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., thatmeets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability to communicateto deaf, hard-of-hearing,or speech-impaired customers while inthe vehicle. The availabledealer-installed TTY system canprovide in-vehicle access to all OnStarservices, except Virtual Advisor andOnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can be turnedon or off by touching Settings, thenApps, and then Phone. When TTY

mode is on, phone calls can be madeor received with OnStar using theinfotainment display.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will need tobe changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To changethe OnStar PIN, contact an OnStarAdvisor by pressing Q or calling1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may be warrantedas part of the vehicle warranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages. PressQ and ask for an Advisor. Advisorsare available in English, Spanish, andFrench. Available languages may varyby country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform Remote DoorUnlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistanceafter the vehicle has been offcontinuously for an extended periodof time without an ignition cycle. Tofind out the duration of time thatapplies for the vehicle, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressing Q orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR. If the vehiclehas not been started for an extendedperiod of time, OnStar can contactRoadside Service or a locksmith tohelp gain access to the vehicle.

Global Positioning System (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can occur ina large city with tall buildings; inparking garages; around airports; intunnels and underpasses; or in anarea with very dense trees. If GPSsignals are not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar could havedifficulty identifying the exactlocation.

. In emergency situations, OnStar canuse the last stored GPS location tosend to emergency responders.


ONSTAR 447

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals to thevehicle. Do not place items over ornear the antenna to prevent blockingcellular and GPS signal reception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverage orthe cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message maycome on. Press Q to try the call againor try again after driving a few milesinto another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service, andGPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features to

function properly. These systems maynot operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integrated intothe electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 326. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such assaved navigation destinations orpre-set radio stations. Neither OnStarnor GM is responsible for any affectedor erased data or settings. Theseupdates or changes may also collect

personal information. Such collectionis described in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. These updatesor changes may also cause a system toautomatically communicate with GMservers to collect information aboutvehicle system status, identifywhether updates or changes areavailable, or deliver updates orchanges. An active OnStar agreementconstitutes consent to these softwareupdates or changes and agreementthat either OnStar or GM mayremotely deliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orpress Q to speak with an Advisor.Users of wireless communications arecautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.


448 ONSTAR

Third parties may unlawfully interceptor access transmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

To obtain the source code under GPL,LGPL, MPL, and other open sourcelicenses, that is contained in thisproduct, please visithttp://opensource.lge.com. In additionto the source code, all referred licenseterms, warranty disclaimers, andcopyright notices are available fordownload. This offer is valid for aperiod of three years after our lastshipment of this product. This offer isvalid to anyone in receipt of thisinformation.

*Provided through LG Electronics Inc.,who is solely responsible forprovisions of related OSS compliance.


CONNECTED SERVICES 449

Connected ServicesConnected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specific OnStaror connected service plan.

Press Q to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped. Select Turn-by-TurnDirections from the Services tab of theOnStar app to call an Advisor or selecta recent or favorite destination. Touchthe navigation icons to select home,address, or place. A destinationtransfer from OnStar will show thedetail view of the destination when itis transferred from OnStar to theNavigation application. Seewww.onstar.com for a coverage map.Services vary by model. Map coverageis available in the United States andCanada.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. Press Q to connect to an Advisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guided commands.

Using Voice Commands During aPlanned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For some vehicles,press= to open the OnStar app onthe infotainment display.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to the vehicle’snavigation screen, if equipped.

Press Q, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent to thenavigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.


450 CONNECTED SERVICES

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security. Change the default passwords forthe Wi-Fi hotspot and myCadillacmobile app. Make these passwordsdifferent from each other and use acombination of letters and numbersto increase the security.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier). This isyour network’s name that is visibleto other wireless devices. Choose aunique name and avoid familynames or vehicle descriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fihotspot that provides access to theInternet and web content at 4G LTEspeed. Up to seven mobile devices canbe connected. A data plan is required.Use the in-vehicle controls only whenit is safe to do so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to open theOnStar app on the infotainment

display, then select Wi-Fi Hotspot.On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi orWi-Fi Settings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on some vehicles,the connection type (no Internetconnection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), andsignal quality (poor, good,excellent). The LTE icon showsconnection to Wi-Fi. It is possiblethat the icon may not illuminateeven though the vehicle has anactive connection.

3. To change the SSID or password,press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR toconnect with an Advisor. On somevehicles, the SSID and passwordcan be changed in the Wi-FiHotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobile devices.Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fion or off on your mobile device, byusing the myCadillac mobile app,or by contacting an OnStar Advisor.

On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also bemanaged from the Wi-FiHotspot menu.

MyCadillac Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myCadillac mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. Cadillac users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equipped withautomatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S.market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitordata consumption, if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request Roadside Service.


CONNECTED SERVICES 451. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with Cadillac on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyCadillac mobile app informationand compatibility, see my.cadillac.com.

An active OnStar or connected serviceplan may be required. A compatibledevice, factory-installed remote start,and power locks are required. Datarates apply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlockthe doors or sound the horn and flashthe lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers on yourroute, help locate hotels, or book aroom. These services vary by market.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle’s key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com for detailsand system limitations. Features aresubject to change. For updates onfeature capabilities, seemy.cadillac.com. Message and datarates may apply.


452 INDEX

Index AAccessories and Modifications . . . . . 328Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . . . . 244Active Rev Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 326Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

AgreementsTrademarks and License . . . . . . . . . 199

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 341Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Air FilterLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . 59Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 61

Airbag System (cont'd)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 57AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . 105Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Rear Cross Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Rear Pedestrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . 310

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367All-WheelDrive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149


INDEX 453

AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 254Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Apple CarPlay andAndroid Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . 304Assistance Systems for Parkingand Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

AudioBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Auto StopStop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . 306Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Parking Assist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Vehicle Hold Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) . . . . 257

Avoiding Untrusted MediaDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Battery - North America . . . . . .353, 394Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . 355BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183

Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157BrakeElectric Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Brake Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Automatic Emergency (AEB) . . . . . 306Reverse Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Braking SystemFront Pedestrian (FPB) . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Buckle To Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Bulb ReplacementHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92CaliforniaPerchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 394,

Back CoverCameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . .1Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 426Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . .2Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86


454 INDEX

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . . . . 68Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 82Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 98Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . 437CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . . . . . 265

Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . 388Connected ServicesConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218ControlsSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26CoolantEngine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

Engine Temperature WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Coverage Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Cruise Control (cont'd)Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . 270Cruise Control, Super . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 432

Customer InformationPublications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 437Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . .2Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Data RecorderPerformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . 137Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


INDEX 455

Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163DiagnosticsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . 267Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . 429Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 354

DriverTeen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . 294Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 119

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . . . 112DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Driving (cont'd)Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 231If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Track Events andCompetitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

EElectric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . 108Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . 326Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 359Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 362Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . 331Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . 245Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Engine Air Filter Life System . . . . . . 340Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54


456 INDEX

Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . 137Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . 142

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . 138Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 339Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Economy, Driving for Better . . . . . 216

Fuel (cont'd)Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 114Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 359Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 362Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Gauges (cont'd)Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Warning Lights and Indicators . . . 95

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 409Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

GuidanceProblems with the Route . . . . . . . . . 170

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . 138HD Radio Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137


INDEX 457

Headlamps (cont'd)High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 137Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . 231Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . 48HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

IIf the System Needs Service . . . . . . . 171Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25IndicatorPedestrian Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Indicator (cont'd)Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 98Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . .4Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 28Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 143

JJump Starting - North America . . . . 394

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370LampsCornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 137Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . 137

Lamps (cont'd)Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Malfunction Indicator (CheckEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . 310Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after a Crash . . . . . 80

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357LightPerformance Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Automatic Vehicle Hold . . . . . . . . . . 110


458 INDEX

Lights (cont'd)Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 108Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 137Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

LockSteering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 114Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . 73

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . 106Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Manual Transmission (cont'd)Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161MassageSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

MatchingActive Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

MediaAvoiding Untrusted Devices . . . . . 154

Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

MirrorRear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . 28Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . 28Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259


INDEX 459

Mode (cont'd)Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . 376Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

NNavigationConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 338Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 67Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442OnStar Additional Information . . . . 445OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296, 298Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Parking AssistAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . 61Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 111

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . . . . 328

Performance DataRecorder (PDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Performance Shifting Light . . . . . . . . 109PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

PhoneApple CarPlay andAndroid Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183PortUSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

PositioningVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . 243Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . 54PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . 441

Problems with Route Guidance . . . . 170


460 INDEX

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . 436

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 394,

Back CoverPublication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

RRadioHD Radio Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Radio Data System (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . 152Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . 439Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Rear Cross Traffic Alert System . . . 304Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . 296Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

RecognitionVoice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

RecorderVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . 399Reimbursement Program, GMMobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Replacing LATCH System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 440General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Reverse Automatic Braking . . . . . . . . 301Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Ride Control SystemsEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . 429Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 440General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153


INDEX 461

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . 435Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Buckle To Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Heated and Ventilated Front . . . . . . 43Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . 39Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . 37Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . . 80, 82SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . 329Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 423Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . 435

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Servicing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . 310Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . 138Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Special Application Services . . . . . . . 417Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 426Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 146Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Super Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Surround Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

SystemBrake Pad Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351


462 INDEX

System (cont'd)Engine Air Filter Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Forward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . 304Global Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Rear Cross Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . 304Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . 432Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 38Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Tires (cont'd)Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, 375Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . 377Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . 376Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Run-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . 388Sealant and Compressor Kit,Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Terminology and Definitions . . . . 372Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . 384Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 320Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Track Events and CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

TractionControl System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . 112

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . 267Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . 138

UUmbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . 384Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . 132Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134


INDEX 463

Universal Remote System (cont'd)Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

UpdatesMap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Using the Navigation System . . . . . . 158Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Automatic Hold Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 424Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Vehicle Care (cont'd)Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Vehicle HoldAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Vehicle Hold (AVH)Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Vehicle SecuritySteering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . . . . 385Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Wheels (cont'd)Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . 382Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . 72Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 355Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

CT5

2022

2022 C

T5

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o�-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

84728180 A

• Owner and Warranty Manuals • Connected Services • myCadillac Mobile App • How To Videos• Vehicle Diagnostics • Schedule Maintenance • Vehicle Features• Many Additional Resources

Scan to Access

United States Canada

Customer Assistance 1-800-458-8006



Customer Assistance1-888-446-2000

United States and Canada

Connected Services1-888-4-ONSTAR

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

ai161972528869_22_CAD_CT5_COV_en_US_84728180A_2021MAY18.pdf 1 4/29/2021 3:41:28 PM

2022 Cadillac CT5 Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

Documents